Home

Paperless Recorders

1. Thermocouple Copper wire cable Look up table 1 Volts converts volt p age reading to K ang Oat 7 y temperature Measuring junction Reference Input junction held terminals at0 C on rear Temperature reading panel of to maths expression recorder Ext 0 C Reference By keeping the reference junction at 0 C then the negative input is act ing as a 0 Volt reference so the voltage reading from the thermocouple can be passed di rectly to the tables where the corresponding temperature reading can be found Diagram shows passive burnout for active burnout replace the for External with a Specified Temperature Thermocouple Copper wire oT Inputs Look up table lt Ls cl 0 Volts V D yp added Volts converts f C D voltage read Measuring Tai ing to tem junction Input 7 perature terminals Reading in volts Reference on ae l junction held panel o Thermocouple emperature m 45 C recorder i Table P reading to maths temp expression External Reference with a specified temperature The reference junction is kept at a con stant known temperature other than 0 C This temperature can be specified in the setup menus This reference temperature is then used in the same way as the reading from the temperature sensor using the Internal Reference method Diagram shows passive burnout for active bu
2. Alarms Menu No Login required See Figure 5 6 for Alarms menu access Alarms a aJe Configure View Ack Alarm Back al al ME Screen Messages 102 Process Status a System B Overview Maintenance gt a Eo Recording Diagnostics Screen Menu No Login required See Figure 5 7 for Screen menu access Permission Area 2 Replay ga Clean Screen Calibrate Touch Test a Back inis Messages i Al 31 Alarms 28 E 3 Security Messages Menu No Login required Permis sion Area 1 Except Clear Messages requires Engi neer access See Figure 5 10 Pa Recording EI Finish Process Menu No Login required See Figure 5 8 for Process menu access 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Status Menu No Login required All of the Mes sages buttons require No Login access Permission Area 3 Piai Start Stop Recording Export Required In Schedule Media Full In FTP Export Requir 15 pens recording 1d 0h 39m 245 1 Hour to USB1 20 Days Om 00s EN Recording Menu Operator Access This is a view only screen All of the buttons on the Recording menu re quire Operator access Permission Area 11 177 Figu
3. a enam FTP Mem Lo CJC Missing Ww cee oe e Error Types The following conditions are available to be enabled ee Network Unplugged will detect hub switch failure also e e Internal Memory Alarm Display when internal memory is going to start over writing non exported data within a defined period of time Storage Alarm level must be set ee Export Alarm Where external media capacity will run out within a defined period of time Storage Alarm level must be set ee Media Missing External media is missing so a scheduled export is not possi ble FTP Memory Low Display when internal memory is going to start overwriting non FTP d data within a defined period of time Storage Alarm level must be set ee CJC Missing CJC Sensor is not plugged into Al Card TC Burnout A TC burnout has been detected Storage Alarm Levels need to be set as to when the system is alerted that the three differ ent memory areas as low This is done in the Edit Recording menu go to Storage Alarm on page 117 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 99 Internal Memory Full Thu Apr 19 13 24 44 Logged data is being lost en 4 6 3e 01 Pen 5 e os Pen 6 48 98 Pen 7 14 64 Pen 8 0 00 Border Colour Use the on screen colour palette to change the message border col our e Background Colour Use the on screen colour palette to change the message back ground colour e Auto Clear
4. Pause this will pause the chart until it is resumed Resuming a paused chart will display continuous chart data from when it had been paused The chart can be stopped if in a paused state If the Event is disabled the chart will need to be restarted using Resume as an event effect or by resetting the recorder Stop this will stop the chart and no chart data will be displayed for the length of time the chart is stopped If a stopped chart is resumed there will be a gap in the displayed chart data If the Event is disabled the chart will need to be restarted using Resume as an event effect or by resetting the recorder Resume this can be used after the chart has been stopped or paused The chart data will continue from where it has been paused with no gaps displayed But if the chart has been stopped the displayed data will display a gap in data until it is resumed Clear this will clear all the data from the chart being displayed Data will not be cleared if the chart has been stopped This will not clear recorder data from the memory only the chart Prefill this will clear the chart and then fill it with the current reading A stopped chart cannot be prefilled Clear All Messages this will clear all the messages in the message list See Mes sages Menu on page 147 Delayed Event This will allow one event to trigger one or more other events after a specified period of time The time period can be set in seconds
5. Enabled i Event 1 Cause 2 Effect 1 _ Enabled Effect 2 Increment User Counters Event 1 example Increment By Cause Scheduled interval every 30 seconds mmm Effect User Counter increments by 1 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK A second Event can then be set up using the User Counter Effect in Event 1 as the Cause for Event 2 In this example the Cause will be triggered by User Counter 1 in Event 1 reach ing an count of 50 The Effect of this will be a Mark on Chart o a oe rl Enabled a Beinen Y Sen Type T User Counters eet yaa Enabled Type Mark Chart Mark Chart Text User Counter 1 every 50 I Tag Event 2 Cause 1 User Counters Cause 2 x Il Effect 1 v Mark Chart Effect 2 x Event 2 example Cause User Counter 1 triggers at 50 increments Effect A Mark is placed on the Chart ee aa In summary every 30 seconds a scheduled interval will cause a counter to increment by 1 When the increments reach 50 a mark will be placed on the Chart Event Effects Enabled Tick to enable Type Choose from Mark on Chart Logging Totaliser Digital Outputs Alarm Ack Email Screen Change Print Screen Counters Max Mins Reset Chart Control Clear All Messages
6. Icon Type Description Alarm Red Bell in Alarm and not acknowledged Alarm Green Bell out of alarm Green Bell Black outline out of alarm and Alarm acknowledged Alarm Green Yellow bell out Alarm not acknowledged Alarm Red Green bell in Alarm and acknowledged System Diagnostics Information General eg System check System Diagnostics Warning eg media error FTP failure Timeouts System Diagnostics Error eg Password failure power failure no media E V 0 2 O gt p ppp Security Security audit trail Security Log In open padlock Security Log Out closed padlock Security Access Failure No entry sign User Mark on Chart and Batch User Start Logging or Totals User Stop Logging or Totals User Pause Logging or Totals A User Reset Logging or Totals 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 149 150 Process Menu Main Menu gt Process If Max Min Totals and Counters can be controlled from this screen Finish Controls for any process in use Max Min Reset Max Min Maximum or Minimum values by categories Totals Start Stop Reset or View Totals by categories Counters View and Reset counters by type Firmware option User Variables Modify and View User variables that have been set up in Maths and Scripting See User Variables on page 152 Script Timers Script timers provide 20 independent timers to be us
7. P2 Alm 2 Out of slarm S092 P2 Alm 2 Into Alarm S092 LOCAL UI june Logoff Success LOCAL UI june Valid Access te LOCAL UI june Valid Access ti LOCAL UI june Login SuccessF P2 Alm 1 Out of alarm 4057 LOCAL UI Invalid User Id P2 Alm 1 Into Alarmn 4057 P2 Alm 2 Out of alarm 5091 P2 Alm 2 Into Alarm 5091 P2 Alm 1 Out of alarmn 4056 4 3 Back e apwo clear Print The messages screen will hold the latest 200 messages Message button bar The message button bar runs along the bottom of all messages screens The button are e Back Takes you back to the main Messages screen e Jump Select an item in any of the message lists and press the Jump button This will take you to the exact time of the occurrence on the replay screen See Replay on page 190 If the message requested is older that the oldest chart time data available a message box will appear and jump you to the oldest chart time and date available e Clear This will delete all the messages for the particular message screen you are in e Print All the Messages screens have a Print button Select this and choose to print All the Messages in the list or the Current page that will fill an A4 or Letter size page Refer to Application Note 43 TV 07 32 on your CD or website for a list of possible error messages 148 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Message Format Table 4 8 Message Types
8. ccccccoccssssscsssscccsssccessscecsssccccssecsssssessscescssssecsssssees 5 Mechanical Installation sssssssssssssssssossssossssossessssissssosses osssossssossssossssossssssssssssssss 6 Installation INStructiOns ccccccccscccsscesssessesssssccseeescssecsssssseesseeecseesseessecescnseensseseseaeees 9 Electrical Installation ccssiscsisdsssescessscssvecsossseosdssnessossssossencsdsessonsscesvssavescosessess 13 Installation Cate BOTY vescasesiceiesesiassases snes dastesessteoacsinessinvencadsesiabvedasteoseaieasss sonedieivess 13 Analogue Input Gard sissu ciconia aaa o aE nieis iia eSt 16 QXe Analogue Input Standard card cececcccccceccssceessseeseseeeeseesenseseceeseseneescessneesees 19 Analogue Output Card iiss tccisissssrcisestitieiisinsis abi Ii Eees i EER RESES ied seins Pulse Input Cara sis sssressesrsodestinisesstiasisanasevrassattushestiatestndaeidvaaniecs paves E iia Transmitter Power Supply Card s Alarm Relay Cards amp Digital Input Output Cards 24 Communications CONNECTIONS cccccccccccccccccccesececseeesseeccseecesseeseseecnseeeesaeecsaesenseeeeaaes 28 OXe EXPANSION CGA seeneniit enanar Tiia aat 29 USB Device Sp AEA 29 Section 3 OVervVi W ii stscsadapiscrcncecsesastsdsetecsececesssdundascccsasareseceantebescubeceuesnaiabianas 31 FUncCtiOns and Feat res ssscsisecssnesssaccdoscesssesscesndsstsssesesesocsescesesssses sesassessineseos 31 Recorder Functionality c ccccccccccccsescessesceseeseesseseesececsecsecsecsecsecsecseeecee
9. All devices attached to an Ethernet network are connected to a shared signalling system Ethernet signals are transmitted serially one bit at a time over the shared signal channel attached to each device It is up to the high level protocol that is sending data over the network to make sure that the data is correctly received at the destination device Devices attached to an Ethernet network can send application data to one another using high level protocol software such as TCP IP protocol suite High level protocols have their own system addresses such as the 32 bit addresses used in the current version of IP The high level IP based networking software in a device is aware of its own 32 bit IP address and can read the 48 bit Ethernet address of its own network in terface but it doesn t know the Ethernet addresses of the other devices on the network To discover the Ethernet addresses of other IP based devices on the network another high level protocol is used For TCP IP this is done using a protocol called Address Resolution Protocol ARP Example Device X has an IP address of 195 23 37 1 and sends data over the Ethernet channel to another IP based device Device Y with IP address 195 23 37 2 Device X sends the pack ets of information containing an ARP request The ARP request is asking the device with the IP address of 195 23 37 2 to identify the address of the Ethernet Interface Only Device Y with the IP address of 195
10. Hiui 29 043 Exit 2 309 Print__ Rev rt Print 07 1400 OF Jul 06 07 16 00 OF Jul 06 07 14 58 07 Jul 06 D A Chart Exit Hiui mn 28 947 26 803 Out J 07 14 00 07 15 00 07 16 00 07 Jul 06 06 07 Jul 06 07 14 59 07 Jul 06 Chart Exit 07 Hiui M 28 995 26 347 Print Rev 43 TV 25 33 GLO 1 hour div replay chart bigger divisions 10 mins div replay chart 5 mins div replay chart 2 mins div replay chart Slow chart speed 5mm hr 1 min div replay chart Iss 7 Feb08 UK Chart Speeds This is the speed at which the chart travels across the screen There are three categories Slow Medium and Fast default chart speeds that can be set up in Charts on page 113 To change the chart speed gently tap the touch screen on a chart to activate the Settings button in the top right of the screen Press the Settings button to produce a drop down list of the 3 chart speed categories Select the desired speed and this will immediately change the chart speed on all screens that have charts The Settings button will auto hide in 4 sec onds touch the chart again to activate To change the chart speed from Slow Medium or Fast return to a process screen with a chart and touch the chart This will produce the Settings button in the top right of the screen select this to display the current chart speeds setting for Fast Medium and Slow The cur rent select
11. The SX recorder has up to 20 screens available for displaying combinations of charts bars and DPMs can be configured 4 examples below OOOO MUST eret 73 76 2623 52 01 32 60 72 44 55 44 51 67 1 20 92 81 36 46 70 28 26 61 16 Digital Panel Meters showing Max Min values and Totals for each pen DPM and Scales 16 Horizontal Bars showing Max Min values and Totals for each pen 38 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Functions and Features QX Standard Screens The QX recorder has up to 12 screens available for displaying combinations of charts bars and DPMs can be configured 6 examples below P 0001 Turbine 1 een 10Jan06 14 16 47 12 4 Ne 2 wl 0001 Turbine 1 Menu 1 18h Screen 10 Jan06 14 16 47 06 3620 06 3625 03 02 Feb 03 02 Feb 03 0 LNA Ht ANN HU 340 Fi E g B es ima en 2 en 3 en 4 3 30 _ 1 400 3 200 __ 9 000 _ Horizontal Chart 4 Vertical Bars and 4 DPMs 0001 Turbine 1 0001 Turbine 1 Screen 10Jan06 14 16 47 l Screen 10Jan06 14 16 47 0001 Turbine 1 gt 0001 Turbine 1 Screen 10 Jan 06 14 16 47 18h 3 Screen 10 Jan 06 14 16 47 T 20 00 40 00 60 00 80 00 p 100 005 10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 60 000 14 42 10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 60 000 a Ee 2 0000n 5 900_ 10 000 15 00 20 000 25 000 30 900 35 900 40 000 n3 0 00 20 01 40 00 60 00 80 00 100
12. 100 Alarm de activated at this point 10 Hysteresis level 50 40 Low Alarm Level Alarm activated at this point 0 Totaliser Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Pens gt Totaliser The Totals option must be active to use this option See Table 7 1 Firmware Options on page 201 To Start Stop Reset and View Totals see Totals on page 150 The Totaliser function is normally associated with flow monitoring applications The input to the recorder would be a measure of flow rate eg In litres per second and the total amount that has flowed over a specified time period Multiple totalisations are possible with the use of extra pens firmware Credit option Totalisation values are 10 digits plus exponent NOTICE IEEE floating point numbers with large unit factors beyond the IEEE range may incur incremental errors specially if incrementing by a small amount each time If this is your type of application a work around would be to set the Unit factor to 1 and then divide the total by your original unit factor Click on Totaliser to set up the totalising profile per pen Totaliser menus showing Normal and Sterilisation types Menu path to current menu Enabled Normal Sterilisation Tag Total 1 Total 1 AddtoMsas Add to Msgs Units None Temp Input U Celsius Time Factor 1 000 x Start Temper 100 000 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Se
13. 10Hz 100msec for QXe e Up to 16 Analogue Inputs for the QX e Up to 48 Analogue Inputs for the SX Up to 12 Analogue Inputs for the QXe Remote Viewer via the recorder web page Events set up occurrences to trigger actions Single and concurrent batch capability Print Support Counters Modbus master communications Alert System Sound system add sound effects to identify occurrences Email facility the recorder will email an event notification and include a screen shot of the occurrence as an attachment 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Functions and Features Recorder Functionality X Series recorders provide flexible electronic data acquisition and recording in a high functionality instrument QX is a DIN standard 144mm format recorder with a 5 5 QVGA display and the SX is a large 12 1 diagonal display format recorder The QXe is a DIN standard 144mm format recorder with a 5 QVGA display The QX has up to 16 Analogue inputs and the SX has up to 48 Analogue inputs and the QXe has up to 12 Analogue inputs QX and the SX has 70Mb to 1850MB of expandible non volatile flash memory available plus additional removable storage media the Xe has 70Mb to 400MB All recorders use digital colour TFT LCD screens to provide easy to read displays with wide viewing angles for the best all around data viewing The touch screen operator interface provides fast easy access to the recorder menus mak ing set up and data
14. 130 Password Policy siicceccciecadcinnernes 171 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Password Security sissies Audit Trail si ESS rai a a a Ee First Time Password Setup ESS Level Permissions Table Log On Off woes ii Userssamd Groups 3 csccsaradssccisvsarersstesreasessarsersess ne Passwords o Add USET norna eR Administrator eseese Change Passwords Delete User wwe eee First Time Login GV CIS aye ttre site ces teehee POLICY cossssesseistsctecsnaeccisecsecascortess Reset Passwords o ccceeeeeeee NN User Administration eeeeeeseeeseeererereersrereerrrernr USET oea a OAE Passwords Setup First time ESS PCTS aa AEREO TAEA Peers Status cce Pen Overview Status ccc Pen Pointers sesccnnranemsnansrenmeneeno Pen Report Information Pens Ment occ Total SET enaere e besedscchscstcses steresneteseassateiassaoseestess Play Sound Event Effects orieionninisaiiiiineinio 95 Policy Passwords s 127 Ports RS4B I unces a aa n 74 Ports COmmS secasses 72 Ports Ethernet veccecceccccccccsssscessessessesseseseessesseeseesees 74 Power p soreereciro ot EROR 43 Preface Re ee ne RA B E ee Er 1 Preset Markers sa Print Screen Event Effects Print Support sssi m Printer Ment viceeccecccccccceessssessessessesssesessessessesaeeee Printing Messag List ss cssssasacteiecispeeinsies ss asnicranantnasene 148 Messages Screens eeceeseeeeeseseseeeeeeteeeeeteeeneneeees 148 Status Screens Status
15. BLKV1 treset 1 return tget 1 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Tests if the DI 1 is not set If it isn t then Tests if the global variable 1 is equal to channel 1 If it is then keep the timer running without resetting Return the current timer value If not then Pause the timer Return the current paused timer value If it is reset the timer 1 to zero return the current zeroed timer value 283 284 Full Maths amp Script Processing Example 4 Commenting in Scripts This is an example of how commenting can be used in scripts you can use the standard C commenting inline comments use for example if A1 gt 10 return 9 f A1 greater then 10 return 9 or for block single or multiline commenting the to open and to close these are C style comments and work as follows if A1 gt 10 return 9 f A1 greater then 10 return 9 for single line or if A1 gt 10 if A1 is greater then 10 then return 9 return 9 these are also useful for commenting out code to try different things for example if A1 gt 10 return 9 bal else return 20 return A1 Here the else statement is commented out so it won t be included but can easily be re in troduced if required Maths Error Messages When the Maths functionality is processing through the scrips you have written it will carry out Syntax and other checks When
16. Displays the name of the group that this pen has been assigned to Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen Diagnostics Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnostics The Diagnostics button will become active when Health Watch Maintenance is selected as a firmware option To enable this go to Options on page 156 Hardware Hardware Status on page 160 Events Events Status on page 163 Comms See Comms Status on page 164 Media See Media Status on page 166 eee Finish Hardware Status Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnostics gt Hardware Complete diagnostics are shown for each of the following categories 160 Analogue In Status See Analogue In Status on page 1617 Analogue Out Status See Analogue Out Status on page 162 Alarm Digital IO Status See Alarm Digital IO Status on page 162 Pulse Input Status See Pulse Inputs Status on page 163 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Analogue In Status Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnostics gt Hardware gt Analogue In Analogue Input Statu Channel Input Range Cal Sample Rate Sqrt Sensor comp Pen CIC ALD y 0 71 my Type J 50mV Factory 2Hz 500ms None 28 amp 2 2 4 0 01 mv Type T 25m Factory 2Hz SO00ms Dual 28 A3 3 0 02 12 Factory 2Hz S00ms Dual Adi 0 02 124 Factory 2Hz S00ms None None None None AG 6 0 02 12 Facto
17. Hardware Installation Local Area Network setup This is a group of computers and or associated devices e g our devices that share a com mon communications line and typically share the resources of a single processor or server within a local geographical area e g within an office Figure 8 2 LAN Setup Realtime data from the device to the Comms Server I Comms Database Server j p gt Server Software Software i y Disk data shown ay in dotted is gt E Realtime data from imported from the the Comms Server to Bo device to the ee Database server the Trend Server Trend Server Links to Remote Networks Communications is not just limited to local networks Devices and databases on remote net works can be accessed using the Trend Server software via remote comms servers and remote database servers Remote servers means it is not directly connected to your PC Figure 8 3 Data Logging and Transfer on page 210 shows an example of two local systems having access to each others remote servers Trend Server 1 can access Comms Server 2 and Database Server 2 and all the devices within the databases on those servers Similarly Trend Server 2 can access the devices and databases held on Database 1 and Comms Server 1 Data Logging and Transfer Using the Trend Server software the device s details are added on to a database in Trend Server Once th
18. Process View and Reset 151 Counters Ment cc 96 OA cieceeccessccssessesssessessssssessusssessssssvssessstsstesvsssesseess 101 Ctr Reset button c 109 CULSOF cenuenceerenenenaiian Custom Screens D DC Input 24V scsesoshusncincsasinisesdenieapiomoscvansatbesaveem 28 DC POW CF soaroirnieioro an eR S DNS WINS MDNS P Data Logging and Transfer sss 209 Data Storage Overview sssi 34 Database Management Tool c cscccscsce0eee 237 Database Size Management 0 0 219 Date Settings siiri 135 Daylight Saving o sesccssosssccssesesessesssssessssssnnes 106 Default Time Zone sssri 45 Delayed Event Event Effects ooccccccccccccccsccsscsscssssssssssssssssssssesseeees Delete Screen veces Demo Traces icccceccssscsscssscsssesveee Deviation Alarm Markers wth Deviation Alarms eeen Diagnostics Alarm Digital JO csscssssstsscestsstsssensectstessesveeey 162 Analogue In an Analogue Out o cecccccessesesseesesesescseceneasscseeeesaeeees COMMS veena stele naa ts Comms Server eccerre Event Status oeer Hardware Status oo eee an Medid seet oY nan Ae aE i Pulse Inputs cceeceeeeseseceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeens Diagnostics Messages n Diagnostics Status sssini Digital IO Card Connections ccccsccccsssesssseeeee 8 and 16 Digital Input Output Cards ni Channel Numbers ou cccccccccccccccscescescssseseesesseseees Digital Input Event Ca s s seroren nre 86 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Digital Outputs Eve
19. Recording time can be extended Less hard disk memory required for archiving on the PC Quicker graphing of data O a A Q Smaller data files for remote collection How does it work Fuzzy Logging does not log data points that form part of a straight line The technique is best illustrated by the diagram below 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 293 294 Input Signal Continuously Sampled data LS 12 points only a gt Fuzzy Logged data Qa om Q N7 F er Changing slope requires more data points to be logged to capture the shape correctly Diagram 1 Points marked O are NOT logged as they lie on an imaginary straight line between points marked The graph of the Fuzzy Logged data looks identical to the graph of the sampled data but has taken less than half the points to build it What about Spikes on my trend line Won t it miss them NO you will not miss any Spikes Glitches or Transients these are what you need to see As Fuzzy Logging is an adaptive technique it will log as fast as it needs to in order to capture everything Although not all points are logged the base Scan Rate of the input is the same as if you were using a standard logging technique 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK What about slowly drifting inputs Again No Problem The algorithm is processed in Real Time i e as the reading is taken As it already
20. Select the Counters button to View and Reset counters Counters have been split into the following types Alarm Counters Reset will give you the option of resetting All alarms by pen Groups or by individual Pens View will display all Pens with active alarms Alarms will be counted providing they are enabled The count will increase when the pen goes into an alarm state and increase again when the pen goes out of an alarm state e User Counters Reset All will do exactly that reset all of the User Counters Reset Single will allow you to select which User Counters you wish to reset View will display all the User Counters that have been set up e Event Counters Reset All will reset all of the Event Counters Reset Single will allow you to select which Event Counters you wish to reset View will display all the Event Counters that have been set up e Digital Input Counters Reset All will reset all of the Digital Input Counters Reset Sin gle will allow you to select which Digital Input Counters you wish to reset View will dis play all the Digital Input Counters that have been set up e Relay Output Counters Reset All will reset all of the Relay Output Counters Reset Single will allow you to select which Relay Output Counters you wish to reset View will display all the Relay Output Counters that have been set up e Pulse Counters Reset All will reset all of the Pulse Counters Reset Single will allow you to select whi
21. Supply Output RS485 port and USB Host option 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK USB host Ethernet RS485 AC supply 100 250VAC Analogue Input card Slot B op tion Alarm or Digital I O Slot G option Up to 6 Analogue Inputs and Ethernet std 249 Table 10 3 QXe Spares 1 50012923 501 QXe Processor Board 3 CH Analogue Standard Input with Ethernet Assy 50012923 502 QXe Processor Board 6 CH Analogue Input with Ethernet Assy 2 51453006 502 QXe Analogue Input 6CH Assy Requires Expansion card item 3 3 50012927 501 QXe Expansion Board Assy Required for items 2 4 and 6 4 51453018 501 QXe Digital I O 8CH Assy 4 51453021 501 QXe Relay Alarm 4CH Assy 51453021 502 QXe Relay Alarm 8CH Assy 5 50015140 501 QXe Power Supply AC Mains 50015140 502 QXe Power Supply 20V 30VDC 20 25VAC 6 50012930 501 QXe Communications card plus 24V DC Transmitter Power Supply RS485 Modbus RTU and USB port 7 50016251 503 QXe Bezel Touch Screen and Nema Includes Bezel Touch 4X IP66 Door Assy Screen and Door Assy 9 50015106 501 QXe Nema 4X IP66 Door 16 50015135 501 QXe Bezel Touch Screen Display As Includes Bezel Touch sembly NEMA 4X IP66 Screen Assy Door Display Speaker In verter Cables and Mounting Bracket 19 50012893 501 QXe 5 Display with cables 23 50001782 501 QXe QX SX Speaker 24 5001289
22. This document provides the Maths Variable and Function table and examples of the capa bilities from the simple to the complex to assist the user in understanding the concepts and potential of these features Important Note Full Maths and Script functions are Options and must be enable using the Credit System Be sure to enable these options or they will not be available See Firm ware Credit System on page 201 Notes if elseif amp else are followed by expressions in curly brackets e lines within the curly brackets always end in semicolon e g every execution path must have a return statement As soon as a return is executed the script finishes make sure that the return is the last operation to be executed every expression within curly brackets does not have to include a return Small values fractions entered into a maths expression will require a zero before the deci mal point Eg 0 5 Decimal point and not comma must be used always Outputs that are set to Single Pulse should not be used as a part of a maths expression as it Can Cause spurious values e No white spaces e Syntax is not case sensitive 500 character limit for scripting NOTICE Full Maths and Scripting functions are Options and must be enabled using the Credit System Be sure to enable these options in the recorder or they will not be available See Firmware Credit System on page 201 Math
23. To be used with Analogue Input type Volts Amps or Ohms These are user defined tables that can be set up to allow a non linear input signal to be dis played on the recorder By entering a set of non linear signal input values X into the line arisation table the recorder will use the table to generate linear output Y in engineering units to be displayed and or log on the recorder e Select the next available table and rename it for ease of identification by selecting the name button e Select the Values button to take you to the start of a new table Press the Add button to produce the first line More than one set of points are required to do the conversion Edit Setup gt Field 1 0 a Values 2 Points Click into the text entry boxes under the X and Y boxes and enter the required values or leave it if your table starts at 0 The Signal Input X goes in the first column and the Engineering units Y in the second column To add a line at the bottom click on Add To ad a line above or below click on a line and use the Insert Above and Insert Below buttons To delete a line click in the line and select Delete 0 10 table 0 10 table oo Ls J vo feo Insert Below Cancel e When you have finished your table select the tick box this will also verify the table and produce a Data Error box if there are any problems 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 59 60 Data Error box If incorrect vales are enter
24. Trend Server 1 Data Comms Database base Server 1 p gt Server 1 Software Software Data cee base Logged to Database 1 Data Comms Database base Server 2 _ gt gt Server 2 Software _ Software a Data Ad cee base Trend Server 2 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Comms and Trend Analysis software Comms and Trend Analysis software Trend Server software is required to set up and run communications to and from the de vices and the PC software Trend Server offers the ability to download and import data using FTP File Transfer Pro tocol via the Ethernet Interface To use it you must have a device with communications fitted as standard or as an option on the QXe recorder with Ethernet as your active port and the FTP enabled Trend Server is part of the Trend Analysis software complete with its own Commu nications Server function Trend Server is a fully network aware package which allows data viewing archiving and communication over Ethernet and RS485 Ethernet can provide communications limited only by PC resources and RS485 can provide comms for up to 31 devices Included as standard is the ability to e mail graph print and export data Device data can be entered into any PC on the LAN Local Area Networks and automatically viewed and graphed at any other PC on the LAN
25. X Drag and Drop Recorder from the list onto the graph area Realtime Modbus The white background area The blue background area button recorder is the historical data is the real time data The white area for historical data will display the data that is stored to the database At this point we have no data being stored to the database it is simply being acquired and graphed if the graph is closed any data downloaded via Modbus will be lost More information about graphing on Trend Server and the options for arranging pens etc are available in the Trend Analysis software manual for this product 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 231 Comms Database Server Comms Database Server ed Devices are held in databases and the databases are accessed via the Database Server It ossible to connect to remote database servers and access their databases and devices Similarly connections can be made to remote comms servers to retrieve data from their de isp active Loads automatically with Trend Server vices See Figure 8 3 Data Logging and Transfer on page 210 System Setup The system can be set up two ways Modbus Capab The above specifications should be used as a guideline because factors such as network 1 For customers who are setting up in preparation for the arrival of their devices Using the Trend Server and Comms Server software create a database for the device s and configure
26. diagonal Digital Colour LCD TFT with Touch Screen Industrial grade with brightness adjustment and wide viewing angle Resolution QVGA 320 x 240 pixels Screen Saver Set in minutes from 1 to 720 can be set to dim the screen or to switch off Brightness adjustment Adjustable between 10 and 100 default set to 80 brightness Backlight life time 40 000 hours to half brightness when used at 100 62 500hr if used at 80 Maximum luminosity 450 cd m Touch Screen life 1 000 000 touches Display Update Rate Display values updated every second Status Display A status bar at the top of the recorder s screen displays the real time icons of the recorder status such as Time left and alarm active Communications Ethernet 10 100 base T with RJ45 connector supporting Modbus TCP FTP Internet DHCP or fixed IP address RS485Modbus RTU up to 115200 Baud Rate RS485 is available as an option on the Comms card for the QXe Mathematics Basic maths include Add Subtract Multiply Divide Modulo and power Full Maths and Scripting option support up to 100 character free form math expression for each pen Like SINE COS TAN Log Parenthesis eg A1 A2 comm variables free memory and access to any data item variable A1 P1 D1 etc Scripting is not available for the QXe Front and Rear USB Ports USB host ports front and rear for data and setup transfers through these ports External devices keyboard or mouse
27. is understood that the temperature is 250 F 121 11 C the subscript O as in the term Fo 7 4 is used to indicate that the z 18 degrees F and the temperature is 250 F 121 11 C Specification Environmental and Operating Conditions Parameter Reference Rated Extreme Transport amp Stor age Ambient Temperature 67 F to 77 F 32 F to 122 F 32 F to 122 F 14 F to 140 F 19 C to 25 C 0 C to 50 C 0 C to 50 C 10 C to 60 C Relative Humidity RH 50 to 65 10 to 90 5 to 90 5 to 95 Vibration Frequency Hz 0 0 to 70 0 to 100 0 to 100 Acceleration g 0 0 1 0 2 0 5 Mechanical Shock Acceleration g 0 1 5 20 Duration ms 0 30 30 30 Mounting Position from Vertical Tilted Forward 5 40 40 Any Tilted Backward 5 65 65 Any Tilted to Side 5 65 65 Any Power Requirements Mains Voltage Vrms 220 to 240 100 to 250 90 to 264 N A Low Voltage AC Vrms 24 2 20 to 30 QX SX 20 to 30 QX SX N A 20 to 25 QXe 20 to 25 QXe DC Voltages 24 2 20 to 55 QX SX 20 to 55 QX SX N A 20 to 30 QXe 20 to 30 QXe Frequency Hz 49 8 to 50 2 47 to 63 47 to 63 N A Power Consumption QX QXe AC lt 40W max DC lt 40W max Typical 20W SX AC lt 60W max DC lt 60W max Typical 30W Warm Up 30 minutes minimum Seismic Qualification Complies with IEEE 323 1974 and or 1983 and IEEE 344 1975 and or 1987 option Hard ware includes an IEC bracket The max
28. 1880 used in Maths block on ae CV1 CV32 CVv32 ner i CV33 ECV1 2400 CV64 So ECV1 2400 is a different modbus a comms register but maps to exactly the ECV same place as CV1 1880 OV 96 Both map to the comms variables CV1 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Modbus Function Codes Modbus Function Codes 0004 can be used to send Report Device ID e Slave ID for X Series recorders is always 05 e Device description Item Size in bytes Contents Device Description 16d 0x10 Recorder type space software version The length is extended to exactly 16 bytes by trailing 0x00 characters Recorder type is a combination of the OEM series name followed by the OEM device name truncated to 16 characters Software version is of the form nn XX eg 00 FQ e Number of data block records byte 23 always equals 05 data blocks are always in order 00 Analogue inputs 02 Digital inputs 03 Digital outputs 06 Pens 09 Totalisers 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 305 306 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Index A AC Power nsss AI Calibration Factory Calibration Acknowledge Alarm sssri 136 Active X Control aa Add Screen sossssessrssssrsssorsssesrosrrsssrrrrssrorssssress Administrator Passwords sss 127 Alarm Event Causes dunra men ETS 86 Alarm Acknowledge Event Effects iss sescassiscissssssssssccessvsstivnsinnt ssteneanas Alarm Markers sa Alarm Marker Flash Colours be Ala
29. Alarms menu and select the relevant alarm number then activate Allow Change View Main Menu gt Alarms gt View This will display all available Pens with alarms set up To view the configuration select the desired pen this will display the alarm details 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Screen Menu Main Menu gt Screen The Screen Menu contains an Edit button to configure screen settings for standard screens or Pen Channel Mapping for custom screens The Replay screen is used to view previous data and a List button to change the screen currently being displayed There is also a Clean Screen facility and should you require to re Calibrate your touch screen there is a Calibrate function and a Touch Test feature a Screen Replay BI Clean Screen Calibrate Touch Test Finish Edit Screen Properties Main Menu gt Screen gt Edit For Standard Screens the menus are the same as Edit Layout on page 121 Edit Toolbar For Custom Screens Not available on the QXe Select the Edit button whilst displaying a Custom Screen Layout from Screen Designer will take you to your current process screen and displays the Edit toolbar at the top of the screen eS g Es 0001 O ap Expert Exit 20 Jul06 14 11 03 ee In Edit mode you can select items on the screen and assign channel pen information to them and move and resize certain items on the screen Expert Non Expert button All process screen
30. Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup The Edit Setup gives access to sub menus for Field IO Pens Comms Events Counters General Screen and Recording set up See Edit Setup on page 49 Save Setup Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Save The Save button will produce a list of destinations to save the set up to and allow for naming the setup file Maximum of 50 characters File format is set The Compact Flash and the front USB device port are found under the front flap on the re corder There is another USB port at the rear of the recorder The first USB device fitted will be USB1 therefore the second USB device fitted is USB2 Compact Flash not available for the QXe Load Setup Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Layout Setups can be loaded from Compact Flash or USB key The Load button will produce a list of source files to load setups from The Compact Flash and the front USB device port are found under the front flap on the re corder There is another USB port at the rear of the recorder The first USB device fitted will be USB1 therefore the second USB device fitted is USB2 Compact Flash not available for the QXe Back Button Takes you back to the previous menu 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Edit Setup Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup Edit Setup will access the main configuration of the recorder through further sub menus for Field IO Pens Comms Events Counters
31. Diagnostics gt Digital IO e Channel Displays the Slot position eg G H or I the Digital IO number and the system channel position This will show a tick if this channel is enabled Fixed refers to the com mon relay output on the power board 24V relay Input Output Pulse Displays what activity is on this channel Input Output or Pulse Input Alarm Displays the Pen number and the Alarm number that activates the digital output when the alarm is active The Alarm has to be set to Relay out e Status Displays the current state of the digital input on this channel or pulsed if Pulse Out is selected The relay is displayed as open or closed e Counters Displays the counter number when active e Duration Displays the Output Pulse duration set Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen 162 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Pulse Inputs Status Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnostics gt Hardware gt Pulse Inputs Not available for the QXe e Channel Displays the Slot position eg A B C D E or F the Pulse Input number and the system channel position This will show a tick if this channel is enabled Frequency Count Displays the input mode fixed as Frequency in Hertz Input Displays the current Pulse Input reading for this channel in Hertz Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the Events Status Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnos
32. Email on page 78 e Hysteresis not available for Deviation Toggles On and Off When this is activated you can set a tolerance level for an alarm It allows a specified percentage value of the span of the scale to be added to the alarm level e Hyst Level not available for Deviation alarm Enter as a percentage of the span of the scale This is how much tolerance the signal can have past the set alarm activation point until the alarm is de activated The example in Figure 4 5 shows the alarm acti vating at 40 which is the set low alarm level The alarm is not de activated until the signal is at 50 which is 10 past the set alarm level So the Hyst Level would be set to 10 Reverse the process for a high alarm e Damping Toggles On and Off Damping is a time delay that works going into alarm only When switched On the alarm level must be breached for a specific period of time before an alarm is triggered e Damping Time Set the amount of Damping time in seconds e Reflash Toggles On and Off Activate this to re enable an active alarm that has been acknowledged Set the Reflash Time Reflash Time Only enabled when Reflash is active Set the time period after the alarm has been acknowledged for the alarm to reflash if it is still in an alarm state When the setup is complete go back to the Pen menu and complete the pen setup 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 67 68 Figure 4 5 Hysteresis Level
33. Enter the recorder s name Maximum characters 32 Description Enter a description for the recorder using the on screen keyboard Maxi mum characters 64 ID This is a unique 4 digit identifier specific to this recorder It is advised to change the ID as all recorders will default to 0001 If Modbus communications are used it is highly recommended to use the same number as the Modbus slave ID When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Error Alert Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Error Alert A new alert system has been implemented to allow on screen alerts to be displayed for se rious errors and for early warning on potentially serious issues like available media space When an alert is detected a large message box will be displayed on the screen it has a flashing border for which colours are user defined and will display the current error state An acknowledge button is available and a re flash can be set to warn the user again if the error condition is not rectified _ caitsetup Edit edit setup 3 gt Genera ae Error Types 3 emes sero Pd Border colour iM Cd Colour Bkg Colour Edit exit setup Genera Jeror alert Sra Types Error Alert Auto Clear Network Unpl 4 a Enable Reflash Int Mem Alarm Reflash Time 60 Mins Export Alarm
34. General Screen and Recording set up The Edit button may display a warning message if the Commit Later option has been select ed This means changes to the configuration have been made but the changes have not been committed to the recorder See Commit Later on page 167 oy Edit Setup Field 10 Events Counters General Recording Reports Select a button to take you to the next menu e Field IO This button displays a sub menu containing Analogue In Analogue Out Alarm Digital IO and Pulse Inputs card menus See Field IO Menu on page 50 e Pens This button displays all the configuration areas for setting up Pens including Scales Maths Alarms Logging and Totalisers See Pens Menu on page 62 Comms This button displays Services TCP IP and Network Admin Services takes you to a sub menu containing Modbus Web Email SNTP FTP and Peers menus See Comms Services Menu on page 73 e Events Counters Events and counters are firmware options that can be activated using the credit system Events are certain conditions or operations which can be set up and logged according to the time and date of the occurrence See Events Menu on page 82 User Counters can be set up and used as a Cause or Effect in the Events system to count an occurrence See Counters Menu on page 96 Pre set Markers are also available to be configured for use in the event system and as a mark on chart General
35. NO NC Normal Relay Output Power On Open Closed States Power Off Open Closed NO NC Failsafe Relay Output Power On Closed Open States Power Off Open Closed 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Specification Tables Specification Tables Specification Design Attributes Digital indicators and Display QX Recorder Display size and Type 5 5 diagonal Digital Colour LCD TFT with Touch Screen Industrial grade with brightness adjustment and wide viewing angle Resolution QVGA 320 x 240 pixels Screen Saver Set in minutes from 1 to 720 can be set to dim the screen or to switch off Brightness adjustment Adjustable between 10 and 100 default set to 80 brightness Backlight life time 55 000 hours to half brightness when used at 100 86 000hr if used at 80 Maximum luminosity 400 cd m Touch Screen life 1 000 000 touches SX Recorder Display size and Type 12 1 diagonal Digital Colour LCD TFT with Touch Screen Industrial grade with brightness adjustment and wide viewing angle Resolution SVGA 800 x 600 pixels Screen Saver Set in minutes from 1 to 720 can be set to dim the screen or to switch off Brightness adjustment Adjustable between 10 and 100 default set to 80 brightness Backlight life time 43 000 hours to half brightness when used at 100 67 000hr if used at 80 Maximum luminosity 400 cd m Touch Screen life 1 000 000 touches QXe Recorder Display size and Type 5
36. Number of pens Number of totalisers Number of communication variable spread across 3 groups per client Recommended number of clients that can connect a OPC DA server is 3 OPC A amp E Server Number of active alarm that is maintained at a given time is 576 Includes pens having active alarms and pens which have normal but unacknowledged alarms if latch enabled Recommended maximum number of event subscriptions is 3 Not only can pen and alarm values be imported from the recorder but CV values can be sent to the recorder from the OPC software How OPC works When data acquisition devices conform to the OPC standard you can use them with any OPC enabled software application and vice versa You can therefore easily combine differ ent devices from different manufacturers in one system OPC gives you the freedom to add new hardware from third party vendors to existing set ups or to replace a device without worrying about compatibility with your chosen software The measurement and control hardware such as a recorder provides front line data acqui sition As soon as the hardware device has collected the data it makes it available to soft ware applications running under Windows It presents the data according to the OPC standard and is thus known as an OPC server Each OPC server offers data in the same way If the software application can understand the OPC format it can therefore access data from any OPC server device making indivi
37. One of the unique features of the Trend Server software is the Realtime facility in con junction with the Communications Server Realtime data can be retrieved from the device to a PC via an Ethernet and or RS485 connection This data can be viewed graphed and logged into the system Data from the device can be logged to a database and held ona database server Remote servers can be added to the comms server to allow access to remote devices on remote databases not on a local network See Database Size Management on page 219 System Requirements Following minimum specification 1GHz Pentium IV processor or higher CD ROM drive Monitor recommended screen resolution 1024x768 minimum requirement high colour e Windows 2000 XP 512 Mbyte or more of RAM min 512 Mbyte recommended 16 bit colour graphics 24 bit recommended Screen Designer only 50 Mbyte hard disk free disk space 2 Gbyte for Trend Server TCP IP installed for Trend Server Flash card reader or USB port TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol is the main transport pro tocol used on the Internet for connectivity and transmission of data across heteroge neous systems With all the software performance improves with more RAM faster CPUs and faster and larger hard disk drives NB It is recommended that at least 100 Mbyte of free hard disk space is available for archiving data Please note the more logging and data being stored
38. POTIS seissssceverdosnetbssicsdeiatsestaronstsnatesesatsvenchavetesasieesatvacvace Technical Data amp Specifications 255 Analogue Output oo ceceeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeenens 255 Field O eiccsccesszhssasziscsszenssazess nsona pi 255 Input Range Performance Accuracy Table 263 Pulse Input Card sc2cssccscsssscesiaiesssssestesseosiestestacvastes 255 Relay Alarm Digital Input oe 256 Specification Tables n 259 Temp Units ches covcsecaistcatesyni tives seiiatzesuasponsenpnnaesseeneenir 106 Thermocouple Connections External Reference 0 cccceececeeseseteteeteteeeeneeeeeeees How Thermocouples work cceeeseeeeeeeeteeeees Internal Reference oie eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteteeees Thermocouple CJC Compensation see Thermocouple Connections Appendix C 285 Time Settings lt icarsievocssuees otatnaentewvnaadeiepionn peor 135 Time Sync Time Zone a Totaliser ssn Displaying Totals Event Causes Event Effects FSub 0 sorei Sterilisation Totals Start Stop Reset Touch Screen sssri Touch Test prcnieiecsociinenorenonenni Trademarks ccsctssspizycstaies aaron teinsties dossebooebateriedcre 1 Transmitter Power Supply Card 24 Trend Analysis Software ccssiescccieeeeees 237 Trend Manager Trend Server Trend Viewer Trend Manager Trend Server Trend Viewer 315 U USB Comms POT ts iaaiiai 74 USB Devices asaos 29 Barcode Reader uc ccccsescsccsscseccssscsscessccsssssscees 30 Keyboard
39. QVGA Resolution 320 x 240 pixels e Clear and intuitive operation Industrial rugged Touch Screen with rapid navigation Custom build screens in the recorder or using Screen Designer not QXe 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 32 Functions and Features Comprehensive Connectivity e 10 100 Ethernet DHCP Web OPC Server and E mail e FTP and TCP IP transfer of encrypted data by using TrendServer software e RS485 Modbus Protocol A Comms option card and expansion card are required for the QXe recorder e USB ports for keyboard mouse and printer Rear port is an option for the QXe Data Storage On board non volatile Flash memory up to 2GB for QX and the SX up to 400MB for QXe e Removable Compact Flash and USB storage See Storage Media Format on page 145 for formatting information of Compact Flash cards and USB keys Compact Flash not available for the QXe e No moving parts all solid state flash memory Security Stringent Total Data integrity e Password Protection 21CFR Part 11 e ESS Extended Security System e Password Newtwork Synchronisation Plus e Health Watch for preventative maintenance e Remote Access Advanced Software Data Analysis at your PC e Independent Chart and Logging speeds e Global Language Support e Rapid review and replay of data at recorder e Approvals CE CSA UL QX and SX also have FM approval NEMA 4X IP66 option e Logging speed up to 50Hz 20 msec
40. SS Please select the root directory where your storage device is located eg A for a floppy disk General options IV Auto graph the data Make a log file in the program directory FT Include extra diagnostic details aS Personal s E gt Common on uk22nt2n UK22_Data X W s Removable Disk 2 S 8 My Documents amp My Network Places When the External Import box appears select Setup only use the Change button to browse for the device Select the import button to import the setup to Trend Server 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 213 214 Comms and Trend Analysis software Or for Ethernet connections the setup can be down loaded from the recorder via FTP Select Setup only as shown but change From Directory to From Network FTP External Import Select type of import aand events Setup only Close When From network is selected the dialog Source Location box will change From Directory From Network FTP Henry 160 221 36 29 X Hit the Set up button The dialog box ex tends to allow you set up your recorder to al Setup Batch Schedule low FTP transfers General options Recorder information imported by FTP will not update in the Modbus Profile tool To en sure the recorder details are updated in the Modbus Profile tool setup must be imported manually using removable media X Series FTP options Co
41. Technician or Operator even though the individual permissions will differ First Time Password System Setup The first time the system is used a default user name and password is available the user name is Admin and will have no password this is known as the first time user Access to the first time user is removed once the password system has been configured The first time user is reinstated if the password system is reset ESS Extended Security System CFR21 Part 11 The password system allows for user names to be typed in All logging in and out activity is automatically stored in the audit trail If your recorder is fitted with the ESS password system follow these instructions First Time Password System Setup Add System Administrator Your recorder is configured with ESS Extended Security System This is a password system that cannot be switched off Follow these steps on first time power up Administrator User name 1 Switch the recorder On 2 From the process screen press the Menu button in the top left of the screen and select the Log In icon in the top right as shown here 3 A box will appear and prompt you to enter a User name enter Admin This is the first time user login Access to the first time login is removed once the password system has been configured The first time user is reinstated if the password system is reset No password is required for first time login No password is required
42. The following list is provided as a general guide and not specific to any single unit e Recorder specification as ordered check against the Model Selection Guide e Mounting fixings Mounting clamps and panel gasket Connector kit mating half connectors to recorder spec Including a CJC connector for Thermocouple operation e Quick Start Guide to get you started First time Password system instructions for ESS recorders only e e CD Viewer software documentation e Plastic stylus x 2 for use with the touch screen e Manual optional Hard copy English French or German Any other items ordered as an option Re packing NOTICE Should the original packing be destroyed or lost new packaging can be ordered or as a last alternative then ONLY pack the recorder in polystyrene granules if the recorder is FIRST sealed in a strong plastic bag Failure to do this will invalidate your warranty Environment and Location e The recorder is designed to be mounted into a panel See Installation Instruc tions on page 9 e Mounting angle is unlimited Choose a suitable location with an ideal viewing angle See Mounting and Viewing Angles on page 6 e The location should be free from vibration e The environment should be of non condensing humidity e The ambient temperature should be between 0 C and 50 C 32 F to 122 F e The relative humidity should be between 10 to 90 43 TV 25 30 Iss 7
43. When Auto clear is switched on the recorder will automatically detect if something has been done to rectify the problem and the message will disappear Eg if the removable external storage media being used for a scheduled export is full and is replaced with media that has sufficient memory available then the error alert box will disappear If Auto Clear is switched off you will be required to press OK on the screen error alert message Enable Reflash If Reflash is enabled and a time set the error alert message will appear again at the time specified until the error is resolved With Reflash enabled pressing the OK button on the screen message will only make the message disappear until the next reflash time occurs e Reflash Time Set this to how often you want the error alert message to repeat until the problem is solved When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Display alert as an event effect This feature is available from within the event system where the Alert Display can be used as an event effect to display a preset or user defined marker See Event Effects contin ued on page 92 100 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Factory Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Factory The Factory menu contains information on the Firmware Credit System Upgrading the re corder Firmware CJC and Ana
44. connector Ethernet Slots A F Figure 2 4 SX Rear panel Card and Slot positions Table 2 1 Card priority positions Cards QX SX QXe Analogue Input card A B A B C D E F A B option Analogue Output card B E F Pulse Input card A B A B C D E F Alarm Relay or Digital I O card G G H G QXe Analogue Input Standard card on page 19 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 16 Electrical Installation Wire seal provision Earth screw ground Analogue Input card option Slot B CJC Sensor 24Vde TX r f E 24V TX Power Supply Output RS485 port USB Host card 20 to 30VDC 20 to 25VAC Input Instrument power option AC supply 100 250 VAC Alarm Relay or Digital I O Slot G option ETHERNETO z Analogue Input Ethernet connection card std Slot A Figure 2 5 QXe Rear panel Analogue Input Card Each Analogue Input card has up to 8 input channels for the QX and the SX and up to 6 channels for the QXe Connections are made via 2 x 12 way screw terminal plugs that fit into a PCB header on the rear of the unit The 2 way CJC sensor should remain fitted in the cen tral 2 way header The QX can have two analogue input cards fitted giving up to 16 input channels 2 x 8 chan nel cards The slot
45. 24V relay Common relay output is not available for the QXe recorder e Latched A latched alarm will maintain in its active state until the trigger source has returned to a non alarm state and the alarm has been acknowledged A latched alarm will continue to flash if an alarm marker or pen pointer is displayed until it is acknowl edged and in a non alarm state See Acknowledging Alarms on page 289 A Reflash option is available to keep the alarm flashing whilst in an alarm state even after it has been acknowledged See Reflash Change Log Toggles On and Off Select this to change the Log speed when an alarm occurs The Log rate changes when alarm is active and stays at the alarm rate for as long as the alarm is active then returns to the normal logging rate Set up the new alarm logging rate in Alarm Rate in Logging Menu on page 64 Mark Chart Toggles On and Off Selecting On will place a Mark on the Chart with automated messages when the alarm becomes active From the position of the Mark on Chart the chart background colour will change to show it is in an alarm state Email Alarm Enable this to send an email when any alarm is triggered on this pen This function is a firmware option that is activated from the Factory menu gt Credits on page 1017 e Recipients Only available when email has been enabled Select your recipients from the list provided Email addresses and Server names must be entered in
46. 34 H 288mm 11 34 D 200mm 7 87 Additional 80mm 3 15 clearance recommended for a straight type power cable and signal connectors Cutout 281 x 281mm 11 06 x 11 06 Weight QX Recorder 2 7 Kg 6lb max SX Recorder 10 Kg 22 Ib max QXe Recorder 2 4 Kg 5 3lb max Colour Bezel Black Wiring Connections IEC Power Plug Removable terminal strip for input and alarm connections 262 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Specification Tables Input Range Performance Accuracy Table Analogue Input standard and expansion cards Input Actuation Range Accuracy Temp Stability Input Impedance Linear Millivolts DC 5 to 5 10 to 10 0 2 F S 0 01 C gt 10M ohms 25 to 25 50 to 50 100 to 100 0 1 F S 0 01 C gt 10M ohms 250 to 250 500 to 500 0 1 F S 0 01 C gt 10M ohms 1000 to 1000 0 1 F S 0 01 C gt 10M ohms Volts DC 0 3 to 0 3 0 6 to 0 6 1 5 to 1 5 0 1 F S 0 01 C gt 1M ohms 3 to 3 6 to 6 12 to 12 0 1 F S 0 01 C gt 1M ohms 25 to 25 50 to 50 0 1 F S 0 01 C gt 1M ohms Milliamps 4 to 20 0 to 20 0 2 F S 0 01 C Ohms 200 0 to 200 0 1 F S 0 01 C Ohms 500 0 to 500 0 1 F S 0 01 C Ohms 1000 0 to 1000 0 1 F S 0 01 C Ohms 4000 0 to 4000 0 1 F S 0 01 C Input Actuation Ra
47. 4GB to ensure that it fits onto a DVD for long term storage This would provide good PC performance make ar chiving of the data easier and limit the risk of data loss between archives As with any rec ommendation you need to evaluate this relative to your needs this is your data and it is important that a suitable process is put in place to ensure that it remains protected and se cure while achieving adequate process performance Comms Server Setup The comms server software can be run independently to the main application software by creating a shortcut to the Startup folder If over writing a previous version of X Series com ms server only the local server will retain the database information and load all the devices and settings from the databases Any other remote database servers will have to be added manually Comms Server new user Using the comms server from scratch requires 1 Add a new device to a Communications port Devices will appear under the Communi cations Port when selected in the left window and will appear in the initial database on the local comms server See Add a Device on page 220 2 Click on Communication Ports in the left window to display a list of the ports in the main window Tick the port that the device has been added to See Comms ports on page 218 3 For a realtime connection check device connection status by clicking on the device under its comms port in the left window to d
48. 8 Relay 2 Digital In 1to8 8 Digital Input Output 1to8 16 Digital Input Output 1 to 16 Slot H 4 Relay Output 17 to 20 8 Relay 2 Digital In 17 to 24 8 Digital Input Output 17 to 24 16 Digital Input Output 17 to 32 Slot 4 Relay Output 33 to 36 8 Relay 2 Digital In 33 to 40 8 Digital Input Output 33 to 40 16 Digital Input Output 33 to 48 51 QXe a Channel Slot position Card type Aumbers Slot A 3 Analogue Inputs 1to3 6 Analogue Inputs 1to6 Slot B option card 6 Analogue Inputs 9 to 14 Slot G 4 Relay Output 1 to 4 8 Relay 2 Digital In 1to8 8 Digital Input Output 1 to 8 To fit the Analogue Input option card Slot B into the QXe recorder you will require an ex pansion card to interface to the recorder QXe Analogue Input Standard card on page 19 Analogue In Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Field IO gt Analogue In Press the Analogue In button to display all the analogue inputs available Click on individual Analogue In number to set up each channel profile Each channel has a list of menu items to be configured Refer to connection details and Analogue Input Channel Numbers on page 17 Edit Setup J Analog In dg Menu path to current menu Analog In 9 A9 Volts 124 5 AnalogIni0 v A10 Amps 0 20mA 2H2 gt The Analogue In screen displays all the available Analog In 11 A11 Ohms 1K 2Hz Analogue Input channels Each channel dis
49. Bezel Touch Screen Assy Includes Bezel Touch NEMA 4X IP66 Screen and Display 50006809 503 SX Display Bezel Touch Screen Assy NEMA 3 IP54 246 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Table 10 2 SX Spares 31 50004352 501 SX 12 1 Display 36 51453098 501 SX Case and Back Plate 39 50004348 501 SX Inverter and Cable kit 42 50005458 501 SX Rear Terminal Cover kit Not shown 46 51453095 501 SX Chassis kit 50 50000871 501 SX Panel Gasket 51 50004292 501 SX Panel Clamp Assy Qty 2 Not shown 52 51453038 501 Stylus Kit Black pack of 5 53 50013947 501 Connector kit 2 of each connector Not shown type 55 50017180 501 SX 12 1 Backlight Not shown 50017290 502 SX Screen Protector Kit of 5 Not shown 46184161 502 Carrying Handle kit Not shown 51452129 501 10 Ohm Resistors Pack of 8 Not shown 50017181 501 QX SX Blanking Plate for I O Slots 2 Not shown 50001249 501 SX Portable Case Not shown 51453051 501 QX SX and QXe Power cord 125V Not shown SX Portable Case Dimensions A Height 336 6 13 25 Y Width Depth 336 6 336 6 13 25 13 25 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 248 QXe Recorder 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Wire seal Earth screw ground 20 to 30VDC 20 to 25VAC Input Instrument power 24V TX Power Power Supply
50. COM ports 1 to 8 This may already be entered depending on how you have chosen to add the device A Comms option card and expansion card are required for the QXe recorder IP Address Go to Main Menu gt Status gt System gt General In this list is the recorder IP Address The comms server uses IP Addresses to locate devices on local and remote serv ers X Series recorders can also be located using their network ID Network ID X Series recorders will automatically register a unique Network ID using the serial number The format is xs nnnnnn where nnnnnn is the serial number of the 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 221 Communications Server recorder This allows you to browse the recorder if you are using DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol e Slave ID This is a unique Modbus ID Address used by the recorder to identify Modbus messages Applications that talk to the recorder with Modbus will need to know this number to return messages to the device Comms Server must the same number must match e Recorder Name This is the name displayed in the top right any process screen on the recorder or found in Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Ident gt Name The entered name will be used within comms server to reference the recorder Serial Number This is a read only box displaying the serial number for devices already on the network This will display as Not Available when adding
51. Ceiling ceil x Round up x to the nearest whole number Clear Event CLRE x Where x is the event number to be cleared 1 to 20 Cos cos x Returns the COSINE of x CosH cosh x Returns the Hyperbolic COSINE of x Damp damp x y Z x input y Pen pen variable being used and z damping limit in engineering units See Damping examples on page 276 Divide Returns the result of the division Eval eval x Returns 1 if x is non zero otherwise returns zero Exponent exp x Returns the Exponential of x Floating point Absolute fabs x Returns the Floating Point Absolute value of x Floor floor x Round down x to the nearest whole number Global Alarm Status ATOTt x ATOT O will return the total number of alarms that are currently enabled in the recorder ATOT 1 will return the total number of alarms in Alarm state in the recorder E g P1 ATOT 1 ATOT O 100 would set P1 to give alarm state percentage for the recorder Ln In x Returns the Natural Log of x 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Full Maths amp Script Processing Table 14 2 Maths Function Table Maths Functions Syntax Description Log log x Returns the Base 10 Log of x Modulus X Y Returns the value of x with a modulus of y Multiply is Returns the result of the multiplication Power pow x y Returns the value of x raised to the power y Can also be r
52. DPMs The chart is vertical or horizontal depending on the orientation of the screen you have come from The replay screen has DPMs that display max min readings for each pen these values are taken from where the cursor is positioned on the screen The replay screen has many features and functions so go to Replay on page 190 Screen List Main Menu gt Screen gt Screen List The Screen button produces a list of all available screens Select to make this the current screen active on the recorder To add a new screen go to Add Screen in Main Menu gt Configure gt Layout gt Edit Lay out on page 121 Clean Screen Main Menu gt Screen gt Clean Screen The Clean Screen function disables the touch screen for 30 seconds so that the screen can be cleaned A dialog box will appear informing you You have 30 seconds to clean the screen Press escape if you wish to close this dialog early The escape key option would only be available if a USB keyboard was plugged in The box will also display a time bar to show the 30 seconds of time lapsing See Cleaning Instructions on page 253 Calibrate Main Menu gt Screen gt Calibrate Your touch screen on the recorder is calibrated before leaving the factory If when you use the recorder the screen does not match where you are touching it then calibration will be required Select the Calibrate button and follow the on screen instructions to calibrate the touch scr
53. Delayed Event Script Timers Play Sounds Display Alert and Batch Depending on the Type of effect selected the menus will change as follows Mark on Chart Is an effect if a pen goes into an alarm state a mark will be placed ona chart and will display for example Pen 2 Alm 1 Into Alarm 37 Select Marker Type as Preset to display a list of all available markers that have been previously added to the recorder To add Preset Markers go to Preset Markers page 96 Select the Marker Type as User Defined to add pen information using Embedded Proc ess Variable Embedded Process Values Adding Embedded Process Values in a Mark on Chart means you can display information such as 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 89 Table 4 3 Embedded Process Variables Variable Description V Value T Tag Z Zero range S Span range U Unit Text time v Time in HH MM SS format date v Date in DD MM YY format td v Time and Date in HH MM SS and DD MM YY format name v recorder name id v recorder ID serial v serial number Table 4 4 Embedded examples Text Entry Function Examples P1 V will embed the current Value of P1 lt lt 16 233 gt gt P1 T will embed the current Tag of P1 lt lt Pen 1 gt gt P1 Z will embed the Zero point of P1 lt lt 0 gt gt P1 S will embed the span point of P1 lt lt 100 gt gt P1 U will
54. For use with X Series recorders only System Requirements Minimum System requirements for Trend Viewer Trend Manager and X Series Screen Designer Minimum System requirements for Trend Server 1GHz Pentium processor or higher 1GHz Pentium processor or higher CD ROM drive CD ROM drive Monitor screen resolution 1024 x 768 recommended minimum high colour Monitor screen resolution 1024 x 768 recommended minimum high colour Windows 2000 XP only Windows 2000 XP only 512 Mbyte of RAM 512 Mbyte of RAM 16 bit colour graphics 24 bit recommended Screen Designer only TCP IP installed 50 Mbyte free hard disk space 2 Gbyte Hard drive free disk space A mouse A mouse Flash card reader or USB port Flash card reader or USB port 238 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK QX Recorder gt oo oe COAOIO O amp 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 239 Ethernet a 23 USB host 24X TX Power h l j Common Supply Relay Output Analogue Input 20 to 55VDC 20 Va or Pulse Input to 30VAC Input Instrument power CJC Sensor Analogue Input Analogue Output RS485 Alarm Digital IO 240 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Table 10 1 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 QX Spares 1 51453012 502 QX Processor Board Assy 2 51453006 501 QX Analogue Input 4CH
55. GLO Feb 08 UK 5 Mechanical Installation NOTICE The QXe recorder is an Emissions Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Mechanical Installation Mounting and Viewing Angles Mounting The QX SX and QXe recorders have an unlimited mounting angle Viewing For the best view of the display the viewing angle should not exceed QX 55 from the left or right 40 looking down and 50 looking up at the recorder display SX 70 from the left or right 45 looking down and 55 looking up at the recorder display QXe 45 from the left or right 10 looking down and 30 looking up at the recorder display Panel cut out size for the QX and QXe recorders 138 00 5 43 J a Panel Panel 138 00 1 Cut out Cut out 5 43 0 gt 7 00 gt 6 00 0 28 0 237 Panel Cut out Please note the recommended spacing for adjacent mounting Figure 2 1 QX and QXe Panel cut out 6 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Mechanical Installation Panel cut out size for the SX recorder 281 00 ais 06 a Panel il 281 00 Cut out Wen 11 06 gt 20 00 0 787 Panel Cut out Please note the recommended spacing for adjacent mounting Figure 2 2 SX Panel cut out The QX SX and QXe recorders are DIN Standard sizes and should be panel mounted 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Mechanical Install
56. Humidity with y as the dry bulb temperature in degrees F and x the wet bulb tem perature in degrees F Cat c2f x Converts a temperature in C to one in F F2c f2c x Converts a temperature in F to one in C Hi hi x y Returns the larger value of x amp y Hi4 hi4 x y x1 y1 Returns the larger value of x y x1 y1 Inside inside x y Z Returns x if between y amp z otherwise returns 0 Lo lo x y Returns the lower value of x amp y Lo4 lo4 x y x1 y1 Returns the lower value of x y x1 y1 Outside outside x y Z Returns x if outside of y amp z otherwise returns 0 Over over x y Returns x if it s larger than y otherwise returns 0 Under under x y Returns x if it s less than y otherwise returns 0 Table 14 4 Script Timers Timers Syntax Description Tget tget x Returns the elapsed time of timer x since start Tpause tpause x Pauses the timer x Treset treset x Resets the timer x Trun trun x y Starts the timer x in y mode Mode 1 reset to 0 and run Mode 0 resume from previous value Timers must return a value All timer commands must have BLKV1 the variable e g BLKV1 tpause 1 Value returned is the same as tget 1 Timers count in seconds Maximum of 20 timers available 276 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Full Maths amp Script Processing Table 14 5 Accessors Syntax Description Ai Ai x Get the value of Analogue Input
57. Iss 7 Feb08 UK 115 116 Log Chart Coverage Control Total Available Space 69MB Sees b 2 n nnn enna nen ne nee ee eee ed hart Total 16 Pens Running Fast 6 9d Medium 3 6w Slow 10 7w Log Total 12 Pens Logging Shortest Pen 2 SHz 14 3h 1 0MB Longest Pen 1 10Hz 14 8h 2 2MB The Total Available Space bar also contains minimum chart and log memory allocation this is shown in the hatched areas at both ends of the bar You cannot use this reserved internal flash memory The Reset button will return the slider and the memory allocation to its original position when you entered the Storage Bias screen The screen also shows chart information regarding how many pens are currently enabled and how much time it will take to fill the chart memory depending on the chart speeds se lected When you move the slider to increase the chart memory the amount of time to fill the chart memory will also increase If you decrease the chart memory thus increasing the log memory the amount of time to fill the chart memory ie chart history will decrease accord ingly Note that as you allocate more chart memory the recorder gives preference to medium and slower chart speeds The log information displays how many pens are currently set for logging recording The shortest pen means the pen that will take the shortest amount of time to fill it s part of the log memory before it starts recycling that is overwriting the oldest data wit
58. Last powered up Total On time Total Off time Longest off time Battery life left Backlight life left at 100 brightness Compact Flash insertions Hi Lo CJC value Hi amp Lo temps Analogue In last factory user cal Relay operations Print Support 2 Enables the printer option to print text from various screens using a standard PCL Printer Com mand Language printer connected to the USB port or to the network Batch Groups 5 The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis The Batch function manages sections of data Concurrent batches are now associated with a group of pens The pens with in each group will belong to the batch that is controlled by that group Batches can be controlled through the event system and batch markers are setup by the user and are used to identify and analyse batches of data Supports up to 6 concurrent batches 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 201 Firmware Credit System Table 7 1 Firmware Options Firmware option Credit Description value Counters 3 User Counters can be set up and used as a part of the Events system to count an occurrence Other counters are available depending on hardware availability Eg Alarm Event Digital Input Relay Output and Pulse counters Modbus Master 10 Modbus master enables the recorder to communicate with up to 32 Slave devices on both Ether net and RS485 The recorder itself can also act as a slav
59. Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt The Configure screen gives access to the Setup Layout Password menus and Settings Time and Date The majority of the recorder configuration is done in the Setup menus Setup In the Setup menu the user can configure how the recorder acquires stores and actions data The Edit Setup gives access to sub menus for Field IO Pens Comms Events Counters General Screen and Recording set up See Edit Setup on page 49 e Layout The user can configure how the data is presented on the screen From the Layouts screen choose to Edit Saved or Load layouts in the recorder See Layout on page 121 e Passwords Manages the security and access to full password configuration that allows restricted access within the recorder providing password protection at different levels Administrate Load and Save passwords from this menu See Passwords on page 126 Settings Recorder settings such as Set Time to configure the recorder s time and date See Settings on page 135 Select a button to take you to the next menu 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 47 48 Setup Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup In the Setup menu the user can configure how the recorder acquires stores and actions da ta The Setup screen gives access to the Edit menu where the majority of the recorder con figuration is done also Save and Load setups from this screen Edit Setup Main Menu gt
60. Normal to run reports on specific pens all pens or groups Selection Type This will be set to Group if Batch is selected for the Style select which group of pens the report will be run on If the Style is set to Normal the following options will be available Multiple Pens This allows you to select which pens to run a report on including Total iser pens e Pen Group Allows you to select which group of pens to run a report on All Pens This will run a report on all the currently enabled pens Group only available when Pen Group is selected for Selection Type Select the Pen Group you wish to run a report on from the available groups list To have groups of pens available in this list individual pens must be allocated to a group see Group in the Pens Menu on page 62 Current Pen Value Select whether to include the Current Pen Values of enabled pens in your report Max Mins Select this to include the Maximum and Minimum values of each selected pen All pens or Group of pens depending what has been chosen in the Selection Type option The report can give you the pen Max Min value for every Hour Day Week Month the Cur rent max min pen value or Do Not Include Max Min values Averages Select this to include the Average values of each selected pen All pens or group of pens depending what has been chosen in the Selection Type option The report can give you the pen Average value for every Hour Day Week Mo
61. SK 8806 with USB hubs Keyboard and Mouse Combination Barcode Reader Most USB barcode readers emulate keyboards and cause no recognition problems Exam ples of tested barcode readers are e Peninsula Phoenix 2 e Wasp WWR 2905 Pen Scanner Quick Scan QS2500 e Barcode Traders LC4400 Series USB Keys Below are a list of USB keys known to save and load data to and from the recorders There will be many others that will function correctly so please test your USB key before using it for recording and transferring data Table 2 8 Flash Drive 512MB Audio Partnership MP3 256 Corsair Flash Voyager 126MB Intelligent Stick 128MB Kingston Data Traveller 128Mb Leadtek USB2 0 128MB Lexar 128mb Jump Drive Lexar Jump Drive 64MB Lexar Jump Drive Trio SD Reader Grey with 1GB SD Memorex Travel Drive 256MB and 512MB MFlash 128MB Mobile Disk 128MB Netac 16MB NewLink 64MB PNY 512MB PQI Cooldisk 128MB SanDisk Micro Cruzer 1GB SanDisk Mini Cruzer 128MB and 1GB SanDisk Titanium 512MB SanDisk Ultra II Plus 1GB Simpletech 128MB and Newlink 128 512 and 1GB SumVision 64MB Super Flash drive 256MB Varta 128MB 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Section 3 Overview Functions and Features Up to 16 Analogue Inputs for the QX 48 for the SX and up to 12 for the QXe mA external shunt ohms Volts mV Thermocouple RTD Q
62. Simulation Demo traces are deactivated and no simulation traces are available e Simulate if board not fitted Simulation is activated when an Analogue In card is not fitted in one of the top two slot positions Configure the Demo Setup in Analogue In Menu on page 52 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 105 106 Resets Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Factory gt Resets Setup This will remove the current setup from the recorder and return to the default setup When you select this button the Reset Setup Warning box will appear with a message Are you sure you want to clear your current setup This is irreversible and will restart the re corder Select OK to reset the setup or Cancel to ignore and return to the Factory menu Layout This will remove the current layouts from the recorder and return to the default layout When you select this button the Reset Layout Warning box will appear with a message Are you sure you want to clear your current layouts This is irreversible and will restart the recorder Select OK to reset the layouts or Cancel to ignore and return to the Factory menu Data This will remove all log and chart data from the recorder When you select this button the Reset Data Warning box will appear with a message This will delete ALL log and chart data taking approx 80s to complete and will restart during the process Select OK to res
63. T measurement Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Electrical Installation A CAUTION CONTROL UNIT DAMAGE Do not apply a hazardous live voltage between and pins within a channel e g 60V maximum on voltage ranges 5V maximum on millivolts ranges The pin should be connected only as part of ohms or R T measurements Ohms and R T measurements share a common connection pin with all channels in the same bank the inputs are divided into two banks inputs 1 to 3 are one bank and inputs 4 to 6 if fitted are another bank To avoid damage ensure that a channel selected as ohms or R T remains floating i e the sensor is not connected to any external voltage Alternatively if an ohms or R T sensor must be biased to an external voltage ensure that the other two channels within the same input bank are floating or are biased to the same voltage i e inputs of all three channels connected to the same voltage Failure to comply with these instructions may result in product damage Analogue Output Card Not available on the QXe recorder The Analogue Output card connections are made via 1 x 12 way screw terminal plug that fits into a PCB header on the rear of the unit The Analogue Output card position for the QX is shown in Figure 2 3 on page 14 and Figure 2 4 on page 15 for the SX A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES Insulation from cha
64. The message body may be omitted for very short messages or where the message is to be sent to a paging system The e mail subject may be either one of the existing event markers or one of the two e mail subjects The e mail message body may be either one of the existing event markers or one of the two e mail message blocks Event markers are restricted to 80 characters each The two e mail message blocks are restricted to just over 1000 characters each Both the message subject and body may contain embedded marker tags as used in the event markers When the recorder sends an e mail message that includes a message body the recorder name recorder number and the time date will be appended to the end of the message body text This is to allow easy identification of when the message was send and by which recorder Any e mail message is sent as an action within the recorder events system so anything that can be configured to act as an event cause may be configured to send an e mail message Any e mail message may be sent to up to 12 of the recipients If the e mail server supports named groups of e mail addresses an e mail message may be sent to a combination of e mail addresses and e mail group Mail Server ____ p Ethernet Recorder lag LAN Local Area Network 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Appendix F Fuzzy Logging What is Fuzzy Logging Fuzzy Logging is a real time Data Compression technique Pate
65. UK 3 Local Settings Go from the Main Menu to Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt General gt Localisation All text is displayed in the currently selected language Help system language can be select ed independently currently English only available To configure local settings languages time zones daylight saving temperature units and mains frequency for input filtering see Localisation on page 106 section Default Time Zone Go from the Main Menu to Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt General gt Localisation gt Time Zone The recorder is set to the default Time Zone for Eastern Time US Canada GMT 5 00 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit 4 Time and Date Settings Go from the Main Menu to Configure gt Settings gt Set Time Set the Recorder Time and Date settings see Set Time on page 135 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit 5 Firmware Options Go from the Main Menu to Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt General gt Factory gt Credits Check your recorder has been set up with the correct amount of credits displayed as a number against the Credits item in the menu Then select the Options item in the Credits menu and enable the firmware options you require by changing the cross to a tick check symbol When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return t
66. UK Figure 4 2 Password Network Synchronisation setup Pwd NetSync Type Password Group Turbine Station Associated Slaves Turbine Station 5 100015 XS 1 Pump Station If Master is selected a keypad will be displayed to enter the new password group name If Slave is selected a list of existing password groups will be displayed This screen is available for a Master recorder so associated slaves can S 100023 5 199991 S 100061 S 100015 be added to its password group 0001 0005 0666 0354 f EE ne Only recorders with Pwd NetSync enabled will be displayed here xS 100018 S 100062 5 123456 xS 100009 pode pots anni Recorders in red do not belong to any password group and are availa ble to be added to a group 5 100005 5 100255 UK22SW JLP 0270 0711 Touch the screen to select from the available recorders shown in red Recorders that are enabled for KS 123412 X5 100075 password net sync and that already au a belong to this password group will be displayed in green 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 133 Pwd Net Sync Messages Certain selections may cause the recorder to display specific messages when an entry or action has been exicuted Here are some examples of some messages that may appaer during Pwd Net Sync setup Examples of messages that may appear during Password NetSync set up Pwd NetSync Pwd NetSync Type Type Change of Type Warning Update Failure The type has b
67. a new device Status This will automatically enable the designated port and the device will become active This can be activated later from the main Comms Server screen Socket This number should not need to be changed only by advanced users for network ing When every thing has been entered use the Test button to make sure that everything is set up correctly The Test Profile button enables the Add Device settings to be validated It can be used to determine whether the recorder is configured for Modbus or Modbus X Because we are using Modbus X the Modbus X column gives correct readings the Modbus column returns wrong readings Vice versa if using Modbus If the column shows the correct reading the recorder must be communicating correctly Press Done Test modbus device communications The goal of this test is to help determine which Modbus protocol variant Modbus or Modbus x the device being added has been configured to use The slave address and COM port IP address from the setup dialog are used to get data from the first input register in the modbus device profile selected for the device The data is retrieved using both Modbus and Modbus X By programming a set value on the First channel of the device it is possible to confirm the specific protocol that the device is using Modbus slave address 1 IP Address 160 221 36 31 Modbus profile Recorder ID 1 64 628510 25 532473 0 000028 24 15230
68. amp Action Rev Fwd In Out Cursor Exit About Replay The replay screen facility enables the user to Show greater coverage of elapsed time display more history Zoom in and out further Display data on a chart and DPM screen Display Max Min readings on DPMs Display pens on a chart replay screen that are currently displayed on a DPM screen Add any enabled pen on to a process screen All enabled pens have history even if not dis played on a process screen These can be added onto a process screen at any time to view and replay data There is a Replay Screen time out feature so if the recorder is in replay mode and there has not been any user activity for a defined amount of time then the replay screen will return to the process screen See Settings on page 122 Zooming When the recorder switches to the replay screen it will represent the chart speed that is on your current process screen the one you ve just left This will affect how far you can zoom in and out For example if you are using the Medium chart speed what ever it may be set to the screen can zoom in 5 more times to see detail over a shorter time span and can zoom out a further 4 times to view more data over a longer period of time The amount of data displayed on the replay screen is dependant on what chart speed is se lected and how many pens are enabled in the recorder 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Chart Logged data Slider An adjustable s
69. analysis quick and efficient Navigation through the menus and text entry are direct and intuitive Example of a recorder menu path from the Main Menu to change the Pen Scale configuration with clear rapid navigation Fa Configure Events gt Recording LIELA g Enabled Ea Maths Type Basic Maths x Pen 4 10E1 to 10E6 J gt Edit Maths gt y Pen 5 0 00 5000 00 p gt C Scale 0 00 to 100 00 a a iv Logging 10sec Cont Linear Divs Select Auto Major Divs None 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK 33 34 Functions and Features Features Display 5 5 Colour Active TFT for the QX and 12 1 Colour Active TFT for the SX and 5 Colour Active TFT for the QXe with more than 256 000 colours makes it easy to interpret process data and take action with the intuitive bar charts digital values trends or customised dis plays A screen saver function can be set from 1 to 720 minutes to extend the life of the back light Touch Screen the heavy duty durable touch screen provides easy data entry and rapid navigation though the menus Help Files A complete contextual help system can be accessed and visualised on the screen of the recorder Communications Ethernet Connectivity the Ethernet DHCP standard connection with support for various p
70. and enter the login and it will give you a message that you password has expired and would you like the enter an other you click yes If the first user is not entered and changed to administrator defaults to operator and saved you will be denied access as an operator because an operator level will not allow you to get back in the passwords The first time the system is used a default user name and password is available the user name is Admin and will have no password this is known as the first time user Access to the first time user is removed once the password system has been configured The first time user is reinstated if the password system is reset For recorders with Extended Security System ESS see First Time Password System Setup on page 170 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Administrator This is the top level access to all menus Only the Administrator has access to the password setup The Administrator is responsible for adding users and assigning their levels of access throughout the recorder menu system More than one Administrator can be set up User Administration Main Menu gt Configure gt Passwords gt User Admin The Administrator can set up the recorder s password policies permission levels of access in the menu system and can add delete and unlock users and assign their permission lev els Passwords can be Reset from this screen The recorder will display a default setup t
71. are sure you wish to continue Figure 4 7 Email Report example 19 189 dag C Invalid Hourly Max Mins between 22h 00m 00s and 22h 59m 59s 24 01 2008 3 66 deeC 2 56 degC 22h07m35s 22h26m42s 1799 deeC 17 1lldegC 22h04m04s 22h34m55s Hourly Averages between 22h 00m 00s and 22h 59m 59s 24 01 2008 Average 3 10 degC 17 61 daz C 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 153 Status Menu Main Menu gt Status Use the Status menus to easily check on the current configuration of the recorder A number of status information screens are available to the user these will provide information for re porting and diagnostic purposes Recording Diagnostics lt q The following Status screens are available System Contains general information about the recorder setup such as Device infor mation software and firmware versions and the recorder s IP address Plus a list of Firmware options and I O cards in the recorder See System on page 155 e Pen Overview Each pen is displayed with full configuration details including Pen Value Name Maths Scale In Alarm Pen Rate Alarm Total and Group See Pen Overview on page 157 e Maintenance The recorder keeps track of important life actions for improved diag nostics and preventative maintenance notification Health Watch Maintenance is availa ble as a firmware option See Maintenance on page 158
72. at which data is required to be logged If the Millisecond option is selected as the Rate Units for the logging then a drop down menu of options will appear When all other Rate Units are selected a keypad will appear for user entry Fastest rate is 20mS and slowest is 60 hours Alarm Rate Units Only available if the logging Type is set to Continuous Set the Units for the Alarm logging rate to be displayed Select and choose the alarm logging rate units from the drop down menu e Alarm Rate Only available if the logging Type is set to Continuous This is the new logging rate used when this pen goes into an active alarm state To enable this feature to change the logging rate in an alarm state see Change Log in the Alarms menu If the Millisecond option is selected as the Alarm Rate Units for the logging then a drop down menu of options will appear When all other Alarm Rate Units are selected a keypad will appear for user entry Method Only available if the logging Type is set to Continuous Select from a list of Methods Sample logs the last sampled reading Average logs the average of all the samples taken since the last log Max Min logs the highest and the lowest of the sampled readings since the last log Align Only available if the logging Type is set to Continuous Select and enter a value from the list to align the logging at specified intervals This will hold the start of logging until the aligned time selected oc
73. button to scroll through the screens Loading a Layout into a Recorder One or more Layouts can be loaded into a Recorder and displayed To save a Layout in Screen Designer onto removable media refer to the Screen Designer manual Fit the removable media into the recorder and go to Main Menu gt Configure gt Layout and select Load The Device selection menu will appear to select the correct media Select the desired layout and press the Load button Go to Main Menu gt Configure gt Layout gt Edit and the new layout will be loaded into the list of Screens If the Custom Screens option is disabled the screens will not display To display the new Layout go to the Screen button in the Main menu bar at the top of any process screen and select the next button to scroll through the screens 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 199 Bitmaps Bitmaps can be inserted into a layout in Screen Designer and then loaded into the recorder just like any other layout lay m E Template 1 TIN 2 Screen 22 Aug 06 14 03 25 200 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Section 7 Firmware Options Firmware Credit System The credits system is a flexible way of changing the recorder features without having to up grade the firmware Simply purchase a number of credits to cover your current and possibly future requirements and the recorder is delivered with the credits loaded The credit value in each recorder is displayed in the F
74. by the user to be either Latched or Single Pulse Latched A latched relay will maintain in its active state until the trigger source has returned to a non alarmed state or a second Event has been activated to disable the relay Single Pulse The relay will go active for a period of time specified by the user then return to a non active state The time out period remains independent of the length of time the active state re mains Single Pulse Relay Settings User can specify Pulse length in seconds from 0 1 100ms to 6480 108 minutes in 0 1 sec ond increments Fail Safe Each relay channel can be independently selected with the fail safe option This will invert the state of the relay output With Failsafe Off normally open NO relays have open contacts when the power is off and open contacts when there is no active alarm The contacts will close when an associated alarm goes active With Failsafe On normally open relays have closed contacts when the recorder is powered on and there are no open active alarms and the contacts open with an alarm active or when the power is removed See Failsafe Relay Positions on page 258 Relay Output Specification The QX recorder will provide the ability to have at least 1 relay output for each analogue input i e 16 SX recorder will also provide at least one relay output for each analogue input i e 48 there are three available slots for Digital inputs Relay Outputs Up to 8 relay ou
75. e Recording Shows the current logging status of all pens within the system Pen Value Recording Log Rate Alarm Rate and Group See Recording on page 159 e Diagnostics Complete diagnostics is shown for each of the following categories Hardware including Analogue In Analogue Out Digital IO and Pulse Inputs Events Comms and Media This is an option and requires firmware credits to be activated See Diagnostics on page 160 154 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Printing Screens All the Status screens have a Print button to execute this the printer must first be configured in Network Admin on page 73 and in the Printer Menu on page 110 For details on suitable printer types see Print Support on page 29 The Printer function is a firmware option that is selectable from the Factory menu gt Cred its on page 107 System Main Menu gt Status gt System The System status menu is divided into three more sub sections General Options and IO Cards Each one will display the current status of the recorder for each category General Main Menu gt Status gt System gt General Displays the version status for the different types of firmware hardware and current recorder information Table 4 9 Example System Version Status Options Version ID 0001 Name QX Serial No ee Processor MHZz Firmware i Firmware Data 16 33 33 Oct 11 2006 Bridge Fir
76. each device for logging using the comms server When the devices are in place and connected check the IP address for Ethernet devices only and the device ID is correct 2 For larger networks Set up the hardware first noting each devices ID and IP address Use the comms server software to set up the devices on a database and configure log ging for each device The devices will need to be set up on the Trend Server soft ware before the connections can be tested and become active 1 The Comms Server is a Modbus master It has no slave capability 2 The maximum speed of data transfer over Modbus is 1 one reading per second per channel 3 The maximum speed of data logging of realtime Modbus data is 1 one reading per second per channel 4 The maximum number of devices depends on whether the connection is serial or ether net This is the database icon which will appear in the bottom right of the screen to show that the Trend Server software is running with the Database server On the serial port there is a physical limit of 31 devices The Modbus comms can sup port anywhere between 4 and 10 devices at a rate of 1 reading per second depending on the complexity of the recorder configurations As the rate is decreased from 1 one reading per second the number of supported devices increases On the Ethernet connection the current physical limit is 247 recorders talking Modbus due to a requirement that the Comms Server must
77. each scale profile per pen Units Scale measurement Units Select this and enter the units Up to 16 characters Span This is the highest value of the scale Select to enter the Span value e Zero This is the bottom of the scale Select to enter the Zero value Scale Type Toggle between Linear or Logarithmic Log Divs Select Only available with Linear Scale Type Toggle between Auto or User Defined e Major Divs Only available when Divs Select is set to User Defined Select and enter the major division position 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 63 e Minor Divs Only available when Divs Select is set to User Defined Select and enter the minor division position Start Decade Only available when the Scale Type is set to Log Select and enter the start value of the first decade e No Decades Only available when the Scale Type is set to Log Select and enter the number of decades required Max 99 decades although not all will be displayed on the recorder Numb Format Displays the Notation of the number format Scientific or Normal Notation Toggle between Scientific or Normal number format The scientific format displays the Pon 2a 0 Pane ii value to the power of 10 shown here Notice the 36 fa value has been rounded up Normal Scientific e Auto Toggle Between Automatic number for matting and User Defined e After Decimal Only available when User Defined is selected Select an
78. embed the Unit text of P1 lt lt deg C gt gt time v will embed the current time lt lt 11 51 23 gt gt date v will embed the current date lt lt 10 11 06 gt gt td v will embed the current time and date lt lt 11 51 23 10 11 0 gt gt name v will embed the current recorder name lt lt Furnace1 gt gt id v will embed the current recorder ID lt lt 21 gt gt serial v will embed the recorder serial number lt lt 200034 gt gt IBATMD1 v will embed the batch mode 1 Running lt lt Batch 1 0001234 2 Stopped 3 Paused Stopped gt gt IBATMD1 t will embed the batch name lt lt Batch 1 0001234 Group 1 gt gt Batch mode is for each group BATMD1 to BATMD6 Used in embedded variables as BATMD1 v will also allow the current batch name to be embedded using BATMD t 90 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Maths variables as embedded variables Other information can be accessed by exchanging the Pn with the following variables see Figure 4 5 Table 4 5 more embeded variables Syntax Syntax Syntax An GLBVn HPULn BATMDn HPC1 LPULn BLKVn INTHRS RAn CFFREE IOC1 RTCOMPn CJCn LPC1 RTCALn CJCnC Pn Tn CVn PnAnL UC1 Dn PnMINU USB1FREE DlOn PnMAXU USB1FREE EC1 PSTVn UV1 FTPHRS PRC In Figure 4 10 is an example that shows pen information can be used as an emebedded varaible An example for pen information in Mark on Chart enter n
79. for first time login 4 From the Main menu press the following buttons Configure gt Passwords gt User Admin gt Add User Select Blank User and type in your new administrator user name e Default User name minimum length is 4 characters Allows the use of alpha symbol and numeric characters no spaces e Default User name maximum length is 20 characters 5 In the Add User menu your new user name will be displayed select this default Opera tor and change the User Level to Administrator Select Finish and Commit 6 A box will appear when you have successfully added a user press OK 7 The recorder will return to the process screen You have now added an Administrator User Level to the password system You must now give the new user a password Administrator Password 1 From the process screen press the Menu button in the top left of the ayy screen and select the Log In icon in the top right as shown here Ba 170 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 2 A box will appear and you will be prompted for your Administrator user name which you have just created in items 1 to 7 listed above 3 The Password dialog box will appear The recorder enters a default password when a user is added so select Yes to change it e Default Password minimum length is 6 characters requires a minimum of 5 alpha char acters Allows the use of symbols and numeric characters no spaces e Default Password maximum length is 20 char
80. give the lowest integer such that Number of Addresses 2 Byte Count For example if Byte Count 4 then Number of Addresses 2 but if Byte Count 5 Number of Addresses 3 As an example to send the 5 character message Start to a slave address 02 the com plete message would be 7 Start Start No No feret eri Addr Addr Addr Addr Hak Data CRC CRC High Low High Lo 02 10 00 04 00 03 05 53 74 61 72 74 CRC CRC The response follows the normal response for function code 16 and so to the above message the response would be 02 10 00 04 00 03 CRC CRC 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 303 304 Modbus Memory Map Supplement Analogue Input Value Analogue readings in engineering units 4byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading Communications Input Values can be sent to the recorder for inclusion in the Maths Block using command 16 up to 32 IEEE floats can be sent to the recorder Using CV1 to CV32 in the Maths Block these values can be displayed on the pens i e P1 CV1 will set Pen 1 to the engineering value set address 1880 with the function code 16 Once again these are 4 byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading Pen Values Pen values in engineering units 4 byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading Figure 22 1 Comms variables Modbus registers Comms variable to be ee CV1
81. grading to the new version existing users need to add pens to a group to use the batch func tionality 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 109 110 Batch process screen To show a batch related process screen the screen must be configured to display the group being used for that batch Under the message count icon it will show the current status for the batch related to that group The message list status bar will also show the Batch name state and group name in rotation with the date time display An extra button is now available within the message button on the status bar to show the current status of the batches for all groups ae 2 bm f u Group 3 Me i gt S Aay 07 15 14 01 13 10 Batches Detail Mark Msg Exit Select Options for Group 3 lay Note on non batch screens the message list icon no longer shows the batch state as there are potentially 6 batches running in different states Printer Menu Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Printer The Printer function is a firmware option that is selectable from the Factory menu gt Cred its on page 101 The screens that currently can be printed are all Status screens Mes sage lists Process screens and Replay screens The printer network information should be entered prior to printing see Network Admin on page 73 If the information is not entered in the Network Admin menu a dialog box will appear prompting you to enter Username Password and
82. in death or serious injury A CAUTION This CAUTION symbol may indicates a potential ly hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in property damage NOTICE A NOTICE symbol indicates important informa tion that must be remembered and aids in job performance Warnings and Safety Precautions Do s and Don ts 1 Before any connections are made to the recorder ensure the protective earth terminal is connected to a protective conductor before applying power or any other connections WN WARNING IMPROPER INTERRUPTION OF CONNECTIONS Any interruption of the protective conductor outside the recorder or disconnection of the protective earth terminal is likely to make the recorder dangerous under some fault conditions Intentional interruption of the protective conductor is dangerous Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury In order to comply with the requirements of safety standard EN 61010 1 2001 the recorder should have one of the following as a disconnecting device located within easy reach of the operator and be clearly labelled as the disconnecting safety device e A switch or circuit breaker which complies with the requirements of IEC 60947 1 and IEC 60947 3 e A separable coupler which can be disconnected without the use of a tool e A separable plug without a locking device to mate with a socket outlet in the building 2
83. is fitted below the power sup ply card within the unit Connection is made via two 10 way connectors see Figure 2 4 on page 15 mating halves supplied with this option The SX transmitter power supply is iso lated from the recorder A red LED light will illuminate when there is voltage on the connectors The LED is situated between the two connectors at the back of the unit Figure 2 4 on page 15 The QXe has a 24V DC 130mA Transmitter Power Supply card that can be fitted as an op tion Connection is made via a 2 way connector at the rear of the unit the mating half is sup plied with this option For connector position see Figure 2 3 on page 14 The 24V transmitter power supply is not isolated from the recorder and is not referenced to ground The option card also has an RS485 Modbus port and a USB port Recommended wire size for termination connector 22 12 AWG 22 14 SWG 123456789 10 111213141516 1718 19 20 go go Gdaoaoagadajyaqaaaqaaqagadaqdaqadada 24V LED OV Figure 2 9 Transmitter Power Supply card for the SX recorder Alarm Relay Cards amp Digital Input Output Cards The Alarm Relay Cards and the Digital Input Output Cards are both options available for the QX SX and the QXe recorders To fit these option cards into the QXe recorder it requires an expansion card to interface to the recorder See QXe Analogue Input Standard card on page 19 All Alarm Relay card outputs provide 240V AC isolation channel to cha
84. is used to linearise certain sensors that have a non lin ear output for example in the calculation of flow So when you check the Square root extraction in the Analogue input section it carries out the following calculation It ratios the analogue input range that you set to 0 to 1 So any sensor input is represented by a number from 0 to 1 We then take the square root We then re ratio the result back to the user set range Sensor Comp Sensor Compensation may be required to improve accuracy on a sub range This is an adjustment to the value of the signal input on each channel based on the Engineering units settings See Sensor Compensation on page 299 High Limit Available when Range is User Defined Select and enter the high limit value Lower Limit Available when Range is User Defined Select and enter the lower limit value RT Type Only available when Type is set to RT Resistance Thermometer Select this for a list of available RT types Burnout Type Only available when Type is set to TC Thermocouple Toggle between Active and Passive Active means it will send out a current to the TC Set to Passive means it takes a reading without sending out a current The T C is wired differ ently for Active and Passive Burnout see Figure 2 7 Input signal wiring on page 19 Active Burnout is not available for the QXe recorder Active Burnout checks the health of the thermocouples every 30 seconds if your proc ess
85. maximumu of 6 alarms per pen are allowed Select the first available alarm eg Alarm 1 and configure each alarm ee oe ital Menu path to current menu Hi 90 00 P1 Alm 1 Alarm 2 Lo 10 00 P1 Alm 2 Alarm 3 None I Alarm 5 None an re ee aa ay Alarm 6 None The Pen Alarms screen displays up to alarm set points per pen 90 0 ee Pi Alm 1 Allow Change Relays Out None Comal Each alarm displays its individual alarm setting Select an alarm number to edit the setup of each alarm When an alarm has been configured an Alarm Marker or Pen Pointer will appear for each alarm depending on the type of process screen See Alarm Markers on page 196 e Enabled Select Enable to see a list of ways to enable or disable the alarm Disable Enabled Always or Dig Enabled e Enabled by Digital Only available when Enabled is set to Dig Enabled Select and choose which digital signal s will enable this alarm on this pen only e Type Select this to display a list of different types of Alarms High Low Deviation Rate Up or Rate Down Set a High alarm to activate when the signal goes above the Alarm Level or set a Low alarm to activate when the signal goes below the Alarm Level Deviation is the how far this pen can deviate from the Ref Pen before triggering an alarm See Deviation Level and Ref Pen Rate Up and Rate Down Alarms are used to trigger an alarm when
86. mode The replay screen con sists of a chart and DPMs For standard screens the replay chart is vertical or horizontal de pending on the orientation of the screen you have come from The replay screen has DPMs that display max min readings for each pen these values are taken from where the cursor is positioned on the screen Use the print button on the replay bar to print the replay screen Cursor On the right hand side of the replay screen DPMs can display max min readings for each pen these values are taken from where the cursor is positioned on the screen Note You can do replay on Bar Charts and Digital Panel Meter process screens and this will jump into a trend replay screen with the DPM s showing the Min Max values When using Custom Screens you can only replay 8 Pens on the QX and 12 on the recorder even though you can have more pens than this on the custom screen Custom Screens are not available on the QXe Figure 6 3 Replay screens Single Cursor Dual Cursors 39 00 10 40 00 m4i 00 10 42 00 Jan 06 10 Jan 06 0 Jan 06 10 Jan 06 23 884 w 4 1e 04 w 5 8e 01 thes w 49 82 3 74 09 ren i 100 00 A G RA A BB Action Swap Link In Out Cursor Exit 22 Print Single Dual Jump Exit Action Rev Fwd In Out Cursor Exit Replay toolbar Switch between the Cursor moving on the chart or the Chart scrolling behind the cursor The Action button produces the Ac
87. no alarmed state and the alarm has been acknowledged A latched alarm will continue to flash if an alarm marker is displayed until it is acknowl edged and in a non alarm state See Alarm Markers on page 196 for flash colour iden tification Ack Alarm All Select this button to acknowledge all active alarms latched and normal alarms By Group Select this button to acknowledge any alarms in a group of pens Pen groups can be set up in the Pens menu By Pen Select this option to acknowledge any alarms for individual pens Configure This will display all available Pens with alarms set up To change the configuration select the desired pen this will display the alarm details Select the Edit button to change the alarm level If the Edit button is greyed out go to the Alarms Menu on page 66 menu and select the alarm then activate Allow Change View This will display all available Pens with alarms set up To view the configuration select the desired pen this will display the alarm details When complete go to Finish to commit the new set up 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 289 290 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Appendix E Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet is a local area network LAN technology that transmits information between com puters and other devices at speeds of 10 or 100 million bits per second Mbps Each Ether net equipped device operates independently of all other devices on the network
88. number x Alamct Almct x y Get the current alarm count for Pen x Alarm y the alarm number as identified in alarm mes sages Alamrt Almrt x y Get the current alarm number for Pen x Alarm y Alamsl Alms x y Z Get the current alarm level set Pen x 1 96 Alarm y 1 6 New level to set z Eg P3 almsl 1 1 A3 will set Pen 1 alarm1 and show A3 pen P3 Alamst Almst x y Get the current alarm state for Pen x Alarm y I active 0 inactive Di Di x Get the state of Digital input number x Glbv Glbv x Get the value of global variable number x Locv Locv x Get the value of local variable number x Pen Pen x Get the value of Pen number x Tot TOT x Get the current value of totaliser x Table 14 6 Boolean Operators Syntax Description AND amp amp Returns a true or false result from testing if two tests are both true e g IF A1 GLBV1 amp amp A2 GLBV2 Assign Assigns one variable to another e g GLBV1 A1 GLBV1 becomes the value of A1 Equal to Returns a true or false result from testing if two variables are equal to each other e g IF A1 GLBV1 Greater than gt Returns a true or false result from testing if one variable is greater than another Greater than or equal to gt Returns a true or false result from testing if one variable is greater or equal to than another Less than lt Returns a true or false result from testing if one variable is less than another Less than and equal to lt Returns a true or
89. on page 164 e OPC See OPC Status on page 165 e SMTP See SMTP Status on page 166 e FTP See FTP Status on page 166 e Peers See Peers Status on page 166 This screen contains a description of the type of comms currently being used and its status General Status Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnostics gt Comms gt General e Description and Status of comms on the recorder Displays Ethernet or RS485 in an Active or inactive state and the recorder s IP address Modbus Status Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnostics gt Comms gt Modbus oa ModBus Status Description Status Transport Ethernet Address Dynamic 160 221 36 31 1 Device ID Protocol ModBus Good Messages Bad Messages Internal Errors Description and Status of Modbus Transport Ethernet or RS485 e Transport Ethernet or RS485 e Address the IP address of your recorder and if it is fixed or Dynamic e Device ID Recorder ID number 164 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Protocol Modbus or Modbus X Good Messages Number of messages being transferred successfully Bad Messages Number of corrupt or rejected messages eg a checksum failure Internal Errors Number of Hardware errors J OPC Status Description Status OPC Server Status OPCDA Min Update Rate OPCDA Rec Conn OPCDA Clients OPCDA4 Max Groups OCPDA Max Supp Items OPCDA Groups Requested OPCDA Items Requested OPCAE Rec Conn OPCAE Cli
90. oo esesesesssecesestesseens Maths Credit Options Maths Error Messages sso 284 Maths Expressions Full Maths ssesesecisasstvsevesssessiccarerssesvavricassavierceararcavsass Full Maths amp Script Processing ou ee 271 Maths Variable and Function Tables 272 Script Function Application Examples 280 Maths Variable and Function Tables 272 Max Mins Reset Event Causes u 86 Max Mins Reset Event Effects suririnte Max Min Reset sssi Mechanical Installation Installation Instructions Mounting and Viewing Angles sass Panel Mounting ou eceeceeseseteseeeeneeeneneneeeees Panel Mounting Clamp Installation Panel CUt Out SIZE 2 5 cscescciadechastatccetctovaieltiabscanel aari aAa Media Diagnostics scccccssssscscccsiiessseeissesesiieee Memory Maps and Function Codes 303 Men Bar ies sccavcsgnctcncesatancnceaa seas MS CICGM cieslettestsaseschyestessscaciiubesathcaessstsie Menu Path eee ne rere ere Message Format occ Message List wees JUMP azena e Message Types ssis Alarms Papanui oan Aneng Diagnostics SCULLY seora A E EE SYSTEM o RGE E RO a USET sen RERE Message list printing Messages Ment u Alarm Messages c ccssseseseseteeeeee All Messages o c ccecsessseteseteteteteeees Diagnostics Messages Message TY pes scscssssaucaneniierssasccraaaneicarness Messages Format Messages List nsnsi Security Messages System Messages User M
91. or rear of the recorder If the recorder is powered off and on again the USB keys will have to be refitted in order to know which is 1 and which is 2 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Export busy light When data is about to be exported to a device the transfer busy light starts flashing The flashing LED is a warning that the recorder is about to export to media DO NOT remove the media whilst the LED is flashing After a few seconds the flashing LED goes to Full On LED Whilst the LED is fully on data is being written to the media DO NOT remove the media whilst the LED is on When the transfer is complete the LED goes off and the media may now be removed Messages Menu Main Menu gt Messages The messages screen will display message from many different areas Specific types of messages have been put into categories or All messages can be viewed The number of new messages to view are displayed on each button as a number in brackets after the label Messages T E All 31 System Finish Message Types All Select this to view a list of All types of messages The messages screen will hold the latest 200 messages Alarms This is a list of active alarms that have occurred The screen will display the Type of alarm the Time and Date that the activity occurred and Message details of the activity System This will list a history of system messages The screen will display the Type of messages and warnings an
92. positions are A amp B these are identified on the rear panel on the back of the unit Either slot can be used it is recommended that slot A is used if only one card is fitted The SX can have up to 6 analogue input cards fitted up to 48 input channels The slot po sitions A B C D E or F these are identified on the rear panel PC boards are fitted in order slot A starts from the top The QXe can use this card as an additional Analogue Input card fitted in Slot B providing up to 6 more channels This card would be used after using the 3 or 6 channel standard QXe Analogue Input card which is fitted in Slot A see QXe Analogue Input Standard card on page 19 To fit this option card into the QXe recorder you will require an expansion card to interface to the recorder See QXe Analogue Input Standard card on page 19 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Electrical Installation A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES Insulation from channel to channel Normally a channel can be safely connected to a hazardous voltage up to 300V AC common mode with respect to earth However where a channel is connected to a safety low voltage circuit an immediately adjacent channel must be adequately insulated from hazardous voltages between 150V AC and 300V AC max This insulation should comprise of at least 1 5mm air gap or a bar rier rated greater than 1400V AC This is to ensure that protection of the safety low voltage circuit is f
93. recorder Each recorder is capable of supporting analogue output function The AO card is available as a 2 or 4 channel option and will plug into any of the analogue input slots Analogue Outputs are used to support Re transmission of Analogue Input values e Re transmission of Math Results e Re transmission of Process values e Control Outputs Analogue Output Specifications e Resolution 0 002 or better e Accuracy 0 1 0 500ohm load 0 25 500o0hm 1Kohm load e Maximum load resistance 1Kohm e Isolation 300V AC e Outputting 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA over range capability to 21mA e Update rate 250mSec per channel Pulse Input Card The Pulse Card is available as an option and will fit in slots normally allocated to Al cards The frequency output from the card can be used in a Maths block and is represented by HPULn where n is from 1 to 4 when the card is fitted in the top slot e Frequency 1 Hz to 25kHz this will update once per second e Inputs 4 x isolated inputs A separate Pulse input card is not available for the QXe recorder however the first 4 inputs on the Digital I O card option can be used as pulse inputs 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 255 Analogue Input Analogue Input User Defined Maximum Input Ranges For values entered for the Range Type in the Analogue In Menu on page 52 Table 12 1 Analogue In Ranges Preset Ranges serve Preset Ra
94. requirements you need to assign pens to the batch group General General Batch Properties p D Pause Chart v Group 3 Group 1 BATCH 1 GC p Start Log 5 i Group 2 BATCH 2 GC v Stop Log Fi y BATCH 3 GC v p Allow Direct I y Group 4 BATCH 4 GC v gt Name Props Batch 1 Name BATCH 5 GC v gt v User ID Props Operator ID CA Dn Group 5 Ctr Reset button will produce a warning dialog asking if you want to reset all counters When a group is selected then Field 2 Props Meat Field 3 Props y Dairy the counters can be reset by group General Batch Properties e Pause Chart Finish Enable this if you require the chart to be paused at the end of the batch The chart will restart when another batch is started for that group Start Log Start Enable this if you require logging to start when the batch starts Batch logging control Pen logging can be controlled by batch start and stop the stop and start logging can be independently controlled so a batch could start the pens log ging but choose not to stop them logging when the batch stops or start logging inde pendently of a batch but have all pens stop logging when a batch stops Only pens within the group of the associated batch will be controlled 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 107 e Stop Log Finish Enable this if you require logging to stop whe
95. requires continuous check of the thermocouples to see if they are in burnout you should use Passive Burnout Active burnout is an implementation of thermocouple health and provides error warning messages for a range of thermocouple activity failure conditions Passive burnout does not provide any error warning messages If the thermocouple wiring changes and the channel is set to Active select Passive and Commit the change Then return to the menu and select Active and Commit the change to update burnout settings Show Burnout Only available when Type is set to TC Toggle between Upscale and Downscale Burnout TC Type Only available when Type is set to TC Select this for a list of available TC types CJ Comp Only available when Type is set to TC Select this for a list of available CJ Compensation See Thermocouple CUC Compensation on page 286 Int Automatic Uses the cold junction sensor in the recorder as a variable ref erence temperature Ext 0 Deg C Assumes the cold junction is held at 0 C to provide a OmV refer ence external to the recorder Ext with Spec Temp Uses a reference junction held at a constant tempera ture Specify the temperature that the cold junction sensor is to be set at e Ext Input Use a thermocouple or resistance thermometer from another chan nel to measure the cold junction sensor 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK e External Input Only available when CJ Compensation is set
96. retained for use with the new package as long as it is installed into the same directory 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Start Up The Trend Analysis Software has been installed on the Hard drive of your computer in program files unless during set up you have changed the destination folder To re start the software click on Start go to Programs and select Trend Analysis Soft ware then select either Trend Server Trend Manager or Trend Viewer according to which version of software has been installed A shortcut for your desktop is automatically created Start up Trend Server by double clicking the desktop shortcut or from the pro H grams menu It is advisable to ensure that each recorder has a unique Recorder ID number this will make identifying individual recorders in Trend Server much easier This is set in the recorder Ident menu see recorder user manual The first thing to do is to get the recorders setup into Trend Server This may be achieved by saving the setup at the recorder to Compact Flash or USB memory then putting it into the PC and using the Import button This method has to be used for a recorder on an RS 485 network and can be used for a recorder on Ethernet Figure 8 4 Import recorders Recorders Databases a gt Add New Recorder External Import EE Select type of import A Pen data and events C Setup only Import m Source Location From Directory From Network FTP
97. returned to Stand alone recorders and the password group is dis solved 12 As soon as confirmation is made in the Password Net Sync screen using the tick then the information will be passed on to all recorders in that password group 13 When a password is changed or recorders are added or removed from a password group a password synchronisation occurs automatically 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK 14 A password group can be set up from the Master recorder without assigning all the slaves required You may not know the names of the recorders for the password group at that time When the password group is established each recorder you want to add to the password group can be visited and added as a slave to the password group 15 A login failure on any recorder in a password group after 3 tries or whatever is set up in the Master will lock that user from all recorders in that password group Contact your Password Administrator to reset the password from the master recorder only 16 Slave recorders have limited access to the Password Net Sync system a user pass word can be changed and sent out to update all the other recorders Slaves can also leave a group or promote themselves to Master All the password Admin configuration must be executed through the Master recorder 17 Maximum slaves in any one password group are 31 18 Maximum size of any peer to peers network is 32 recorders 19 Stand alone recorders tha
98. screen Select the Settings 1 50400 button to change the chart speeds Permission Area 43 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 185 186 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Section 6 Screen Configuration Process Screen Overview Figure 6 1 QX Process Screen Standard Screen example Chart and DPM Recording menu allows _ Message List icon allows quick access to Batches Batch Detail User Mark on Chart and Messages e stop start recording e immediate download of recorded data b amp amp Batches Detail _Mark _Msg__ Exit Select Options for Group 3 This grey area will appear if you are viewing a batch related screen View Alarms Alarm Status Print Modify Replay List of View Acknowledge Configure process screen chart available available all Alarms Individual Alarm screen layouts history screens screens Acknowledge bs 4ck View Detail Exit ME Next sA Print Edit Replay Exit Enter recorder Setup menu 0001 Turbine 1 Recorder ID No amp Name alternates to display the Screen Name Pen 1 61 26 kaan r Time and Date ene 69 00 Pen 3 26 00 hart A Yellow area shows Chart Area when Pen 1 was in alarm state Realtime Pen Pointers Alarm Marker marks the chart to show when Pen 1 was out of its alarm state Pen Digital Read out Touch the screen t
99. successful communications Read about the different Comms interfaces used by the recorders See Standard Communication Interfaces on page 205 Setup your PC Network connections See Hardware Installation on page 207 Configure the Trend Server software See Comms and Trend Analysis soft ware on page 211 Comms Server software set up See Communications Server on page 216 Standard Communication Interfaces Before we start here is some information about the comms interfaces that are used in the setup of the Trend Server software and Communications Server Rear Ethernet Communication port The rear of the device is fitted with an Ethernet 10 100 port which supports Modbus TCP IP See Modbus on page 206 e OPC Server connectivity to third party software OPC Server connection must be enabled by selecting the OPC option in Credits on page 101 Setup the OPC Server informa tion required OPC Interface Open Process Control on page 233 Web browser See Web Browser on page 234 Rear RS485 port For the QXe recorder a Comms option card is available with RS485 Modbus port and USB device connections The card can be purchased and fitted at any time The RS485 connec tion uses a 3 way connector The card also has connection for 24V DC Transmitter Power Supply see Transmitter Power Supply Card on page 24 For the QX and the SX recorders RS 485 2 wire half duplex to
100. that password group as slaves The master will ensure all passwords and password policies are synchronised with all re corders in its password group Limited changes can be made on slave recorders eg the user may change passwords and this will be propagated to all the other devices in the pass word group Password Net Sync Rules Before starting read through this check list 1 To enable a recorder to use Password Net Sync the firmware option needs to be acti vated in the Credit system see Section 7 Firmware Options on page 201 Only recorders with the Password Net Sync option enabled in the Firmware options will be available to the designated Master or Slave and be accessible in the password group Ensure that the networked recorders to be included in the password groups are on the same IP subrange of A B C lt x gt such that A B C is fixed and only lt x gt is variable Ensure that all recorders to be included in the same password group are configured to be in the same Set with the same Start Port and have Peer Services enabled This can be checked from the Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt Comms gt Services gt Peers menu Unless the network administrator states otherwise there is no reason to change the default Start Port value of 8955 For more information see Peers on page 81 Ensure that passwords are enabled from Menu gt Configure gt Passwords gt User Admin gt Policy on a
101. the configuration has been Committed When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit When a new user is added a default password password is set When a new user first logs on they are prompted to change the password The new user is responsible for remem bering their own password The Administrator will not be able to access this information But the Administrator is able to reset the password for any user 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Users Main Menu gt Configure gt Passwords gt User Admin gt Users This will list all the current users that have been entered into the password system and their access details Select a user to produce the following e User Name Displays the user name e Level Select a permission level from the drop down list e Custom Activate this to allow customisation of the permission area access for this user only The custom settings will reflect the original Level set when the user was first added Edit Allows customisation of the permission areas The Administrator can re assign the permission areas for individual users at any level Login Days Select the days on which this user can Login Delete User Main Menu gt Configure gt Passwords gt User Admin gt Delete User This will list all the current users that have been entered into the password system The Ad ministrator can delete users from a drop down list Note Administrator cannot be
102. the more free space on the hard disk is required This is not required with Trend Viewer 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 211 212 Comms and Trend Analysis software Software Installation The Comms server is only available with the Trend Server software The comms server will auto install with the Trend Server software Ensure the same communications information is entered into the hardware and the software in order for the communications link to work e g Device name and ID IP address of the device etc Install Trend Server from the Trend Analysis software folder and the comms server and database servers install automatically Before installing the software on to your PC it is recommended to close down all other ap plications including any programs that automatically load during the start up procedure It is not recommended to load multiple installations on the same PC Load the CD into the drive and wait for the autorun sequence to start If autorun does not commence follow these instructions go to My Computer select CD ROM drive select Launch exe Follow the instructions on the screen During installation you will be asked to select or confirm the following e Which language variant where applicable e Destination folder for the software A destination folder and file path will be designated but this can be changed if required by using the browse button Select which version of the application software
103. the signal changes a defined amount over a specified time See Deviation Level and Time Period e Level Select and enter a figure at which the alarm is to be triggered e Deviation Level Only available when Alarm Type is set to Deviation Rate Up or Rate Down Select and use the numeric keypad to enter the amount of deviation in engi neering units For Deviation enter the amount of deviation allowed on a designated pen Ref Pen before an alarm is triggered For Rate Up and Rate Down enter as a percentage how far the signal can deflect before an alarm is triggered e Ref Pen Only available when the Alarm Type is set to Deviation Select and enter the pen that this alarm is referenced to This works like an actual pen that dynamically tracks a designated pen 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Time Period Only available when the Alarm Type is set to Rate Up or Rate Down Enter in seconds how long the signal is allowed to deviate at the specified deviation level before an alarm is triggered Tag Enter a tag or name to identify this alarm Up to 17 characters Allow Change If activated this will allow quick configuration changes to this alarm level from the Alarms gt Configure button on the Main Menu This does not change the original setup e Relays Out Select and choose which Relay Output s is triggered by this alarm on this pen only The Fixed button will use the common relay output on the power board
104. this would read OmA 0 and 20mA 50 e Output Select either 4 20mA or 0 20mA e Label Select and enter an identification label Select and use the on screen keyboard Up to 16 characters When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Alarm Digital IO Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Field IO gt Alarm Digital IO The Alarm Digital IO button will display all the digital inputs outputs available Click on each individual Alarm IO or Digital IO number to set up each channel profile Cards available are 2 types of Alarm Relay cards 4 Alarm Relay Output e 8 Alarm Relay Output with 2 Digital Inputs 2 types of Digital IO cards e 8 Digital Inputs or Outputs e 16 Digital Inputs or Outputs Not available for the QXe recorder Alarm Relay Card 4 Alarm relay output card or 8 Alarm relay Output with 2 Digital Inputs 6 fixed outputs and 2 configurable Digital Input or output cards Digital IO Card There are 8 or 16 Digital channels per card that can be setup as inputs or outputs The Dig ital I O card also has 4 channels that can be set as pulse inputs channels 1 to 4 The op erating frequency for pulse inputs on the Digital I O card is 1kHz max Input Low lt 1V High gt 4 5V to lt 10V DC 9V to 20V p p AC or Volt free input Low short circuit High open circuit To view and lo
105. tl k f 10R i ve ve ve ve ve ve ve ve Chins 4 wire R T 3 wire R T 2 wire R T ve optional connection Recorder setup will be required if wiring changes are made for Active Burnout Thermocou ples See Thermocouple Wiring Changes on page 55 Thermocouple Active Burnout status can be viewed in the Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnostics gt Analogue Input screen Input column The Health Watch Maintenance firmware option must be active to access the Maintenance and Diagnostic buttons See Diagnostics on page 160 For the QXe recorder Active Burnout is not available Ohms measurements must have the link be tween positive and negative CJC Connectors The CJC connector resides between channel 4 and channel 5 on the Analogue Input card For information on connecting the CJC sensor see Figure 2 6 on page 18 For the QXe recorder this is available on the Analogue Input card option QXe Analogue Input Standard card The QXe is fitted with a standard Analogue Input card in Slot A with up to 6 channels The card is also fitted with an Ethernet port as standard Connection is made via 1 x 18 way screw terminal plugs that fit into a PCB header on the rear of the unit To fit up to a further 6 analogue input channels see Analogue Input Card on page 16 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 19 20 Electrical Installation Figure 2 8 QXe Analogue Input card std Slot A 1
106. to Ext Input Select the input required as an external input Eng Span Ohms Volts and Amps only Only available when not using Use Pen Scale option This is the highest value of the engineering range and corresponds to the top of the input range Select and enter a value using the on screen keyboard e Eng Zero Ohms Volts and Amps only Only available when not using Use Pen Scale option This is the bottom of the engineering scale and represents the bottom of the input scale Select and enter a value using the on screen keyboard Demo Setup Only available if there is no Analogue Input card fitted Examples of var ious inputs are available without having an actual signal input coming into the recorder ee Demo Type Select this for a list of available Demo Type inputs ee Cycle Time Enter the Cycle Time in seconds of the Demo Input Select and use the on screen keyboard Add Noise This is to Add Noise to the Demo Input as a percentage value Select and use the on screen keyboard When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Thermocouple Wiring Changes If the recorder is set to Active select Passive and Commit the change Then return to the menu and select Active and Commit the change Analogue Out Menu Not available for the QXe recorder Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit
107. used for all signal wiring Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury 7 Ifthe equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be inadequate 8 The protective earth terminal must remain connected even if the recorder is isolated from the mains supply if any of the measuring communications or relay terminals are connected to hazardous voltages Hazardous Voltage Hazardous Voltages are defined by EN61010 1 as follows A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE LEVELS Voltage levels above 30V rms and 42 4V peak or 60V dc are deemed to be Hazardous Live Ensure operators are not exposed to hazardous voltage levels Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury 43 TV 25 30 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Section 2 Installation Damage checks Any damage caused to the recorder or the contents should be reported immediately to your shipper Unpacking Remove the contents check the packaging and remove all documentation and accessories supplied Retain the box and any packaging for future transportation Contents Check that the contents and accessories are correct against the order or Model Selection Guide using the model number on the recorder Contact your supplier immediately should there be any query The contents are based on Unit Model Number ordered and will vary from unit to unit
108. value where x Pen Number 1 to 96 y period 1 Hour 2 Day 3 Week 4 Month z report set 1 Current 2 Previous completed e g P1 prmax 23 2 1 Max value so far for current day for Pen 23 Pen Report Syntax the syntax for the embedded variables is as follows PRPtttxynn v ttt is the type of variables required and can be MAX Max value MAT Time max value was recorded MIN Min Value MIT Time min value was recorded AVE Average Value TOT Totaliser value STM Start time of the reports set x is the report set and can be C Current working hour day week month L Last completed hour day week month y is the period and can be H Hour D Day W Week M Month nn is the pen number from 1 to 96 e g of some embedded variables PRPTOTLM1 v Total for last complete month for pen 1 PRPMAXCD23 v Max so far for current day for pen 23 PRPMATCD23 v Time max was recorded for current day for P23 PRPSTMCD23 v Start time of report for current day for pen 23 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Layout Main Menu gt Configure gt Layout gt The user can configure how the data is presented on the screen From the Layouts screen choose to Edit Save or Load layouts in the recorder we Edit Layout wA a Finish Edit Layout Main Menu gt Configure gt Layout gt Edit The Edit Layout menu displays a Screen button to enable and display Standard and Custom scree
109. version files on the external device are copied into the recorder If there is no external media fitted or the file is corrupt a Firmware installation dialog will ap pear If this occurs check the file is the correct format xsu Secondly download the file to another Compact flash card or USB key See Storage Media Format on page 145 for formatting information of Compact Flash cards and USB keys Compact Flash not available for the QXe To check the firmware upgrade has been successful see the Status Menu General on page 155 Calibration Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Factory gt Calibration Cards will be calibrated in the factory All ranges are factory calibrated and set to the default range of 12V Table 4 7 Calibration Input range table on page 104 Date amp Type of last calibration is stored in Maintenance on page 158 Analogue In and CJC Calibration can be performed per slot card Select the Al or CJC cal ibration button to go to the next menu Al Calibration In this menu there is a button for each Analogue Input card fitted in the recorder Calibration is done per channel Cards may be reset to original factory cal i e a card holds two sets of calibration constants factory amp user for all ranges Table 4 7 Calibration Input range table on page 104 Factory Cal The recorder is calibrated in the factory These are pre stored calibration val
110. 0 120 temperature can be counted Reference The reference temperature for sterilisation normally 121 11 C Temperature 121 11 C can be altered if required If TRUE contributions to Fg can be included after the target FALSE Include value has been reached and while the temperature is still cooling phase above the start temperature If FALSE these contributions are not included The maximum Fo totaliser value can be set if Include 15 1 999 Completion l as cooling phase is not selected the totaliser will stop at Value this value of Fo For setting up the Fo calculation refer to the Totaliser Menu on page 68 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Appendix H Calibration Al Calibration and CJC Calibration For Al and CJC Factory and User Calibration see Calibration on page 102 Sensor Compensation Sensor Compensation may be required to improve accuracy on a sub range This is an ad justment to the value of the signal input on each channel based on the Engineering units To set this up in the recorder see Sensor Comp in the menu for Analogue In Menu on page 52 Single Point Set the Comp Type to Single Point to adjust the signal input reading by an offset amount determined by the user Enter the Offset adjustment required and this is added or subtract ed for all future readings Dual Point Select Dual Point to change two points on the signal input reading The Dual Point adjust ment
111. 00 56 550 0 000 5 000 10 000 15 000 20 000Pen 4 000 20 00 40 00 60 00 80 00 100 09 29 000 eT n5 0 00 20 00 40 00 60 00 80 00 100 00 34 93 5 000 ae fF10 000 y 2 Fsb 03 11 533 _ 000 Food i Penz 000 a i ld k 22 77 v i A gt en 8 J ay DPMs and Scales Vertical Chart 8 Horizontal Bars and 8 DPMs 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK 39 Functions and Features QXe Standard Screens The QXe recorder has up to 10 screens available for displaying combinations of charts scales and DPMs can be configured 6 examples below ta e Menu 1 09 28 00 09 30 00 293J 06 29 Jun 06 Abu E Om Standard Screen 1 Screen 29 Jun 06 09 33 43 Pen 1 23 294 Horizontal Chart and 6 DPMs a 2 be g Menu 15 24 422 _ Max 54 413 tn 5 319 9 Zerl3 Max 4444 win 2 0e 00 2499 04 Max 49 92 Min 2499 12 Wl Standard Screen 2 Screen 29 Jun 09 47 33 Pen 2 1 200 Max 52 000 Min 233 067 Pen 4 Jeet Max 4444 Min _0 0e 00 89 95 Max 182936 0 Min 99 96 6 Digital Panel Meters Poad Om 19 20 000 30 000 Wl Standard Screen 4 Screen 29 Jun 06 09 56 04 40 000 50 000 20 881 9 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 32 352 9 DOO E3 E4 Pes s00 2499 04 Pen 6 156 00 200 00 89 95 O O O A 24 00 68 00 112 00 ez 9 9e 13 E6 3 2e 03 Horizontal Bars and DPMs 40 2 Apu Wl Chart n 3 Vert bars Menu 1 Om
112. 1 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Control and Labo ratory Use and UL 61010C 1 and CSA 22 2 1010 1 as options If the equipment is used in a manner not specified the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired The QX and SX range of instruments is compliant to the requirements for Class 1 Div 2 Hazardous Classified Locations Symbols One or more of the following symbols may appear on the recorder labelling Table 1 2 Safety Symbols Symbol Meaning Caution refer to manual for instructions Caution risk of electric shock Direct Current D D Protective conductor terminal Earth ground terminal Static Electricity Directive 2002 96 EC WEEE Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment D 1 A pi Static Electricity All circuit boards and electronic modules associated with this recorder contain components which are susceptible to damage caused by electrostatic discharge Should it be necessary to handle such components appropriate precautions in accordance with ANSI ESD 20 20 Electrostatic Discharge Control Program Standard should be observed 43 TV 25 30 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Protocols used in this manual Protocols used in this manual Safety and Symbol Identification Table 1 3 Symbol Description A WARNING The WARNING symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result
113. 10 different replay screens covering the full zoom in zoom out capabilities When the screen is switched to replay the chart speed is set to Fast 600mm hr and the replay screen displays a 4 hour chart The replay chart can be zoomed out two more times to 10 hours then to 12 hours It can be zoomed in from 4 hours to 2hrs 1hr 1hr with bigger divisions 20 mins 10 mins 5 mins 2 mins and 1 min The Medium chart speed 20mm hr and the Slow chart speed 5mm hr are also shown in the example 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 193 12 hour div replay chart 10 hour div replay chart 4 hour div replay chart Fast chart speed 600mm hr 2 hour div replay chart 1 hour div replay chart Medium chart speed 20mm hr 194 00 00 00 07 Jul 06 Figure 6 4 Zooming on a Replay screen Hiui 29 236 26 4151 20 00 00 07 Jul 06 Hiui 29 236 26 876 07 00 00 Y 07 Jul 06 08 00 00 07 Jul 06 Hiui m 29 043 27309 ER Print Rev 04 00 00 07 Jul 06 Hiui 28 006 26 576 7 00 00 07 10 00 7 Jul 06 07 Jul 06 07 20 00 07 30 00 07 Jul 06 07 Jul 06 25 995 26 513 Rev 06 0000 07 Jul 06 ot 00300 07 14 00 07 Jul 06 Exit Hiui mm 29 043 27 309 amp Print 07 10 00 07 Jul 06 7 15800 07 20 00 ug 06 07 Jul 06 07 14 55 07 Jul 06 07 07 Hiui m 28 995 28 803 A Print Rev 06 00 00 07 Jul 06 2 Out Chart 07 Jul
114. 2 6 706206E 016 4 714286 0 000000 37 500000 0 000000 25 000010 1 203979E 011 45 204956 5 910645E 022 86 447815 0 000000 0 000000 222 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Communications Server Find Device button This can be used to find X Series recorders on the network It uses Locate Device the recorder s unique Network ID to identify them and populate this list Select device to connect to from the list below Select your device from the list and Recorder Name IP Address F Pump Station 1 xs 100061 160 221 36 22 press the Use Selection button to Pump Station 12 xs 100062 160 221 36 56 insert the recorder details into the Avon Creek west xs 100075 160 221 36 76 i Avon Creek north 100022 Add Device box Furnace 1 xs 100089 160 221 36 33 When you get back to the Add De vice Detail Box press OK The recorder you have set up will now be added to the device list TA zan Modbus profile tool data update Trend Server software will generate a modbus profile when data is imported from USB key or Compact Flash card or when itis manually imported via FTP This applies to FTP of setup and FTP of pen data The automatic or scheduled FTP import of data from a recorder does not result in an up dated modbus profile being generated Once a modbus profile has been generated it is im mediately available to the Comms Server but will not be automatically used by the Comms Server Any new connections creat
115. 23 37 2 will respond sending a packet with the Ethernet address of device Y back to device X Now device X and Y have each others Ether net addresses to which data can be sent 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 291 292 Email General operation of the e mail system The recorder sends messages for distribution by an e mail server The e mail server is located by its IP address or it s name as set up in the communications set up options When the recorder sends an e mail message it locates the e mail server and uses SMTP Simple Message Transfer Protocol to send the message to the e mail server SMTP allows the recorder to send messages to an e mail server without having its own e mail address because of this the e mail server will not be able to send any reply back to the recorder When setting up the e mail address list it is important to include the e mail administrator address The Administrator e mail address is the e mail address to where the e mail server will respond in the event of any problems with the delivery of e mail messages The Administrator will also appear to be the source of any e mail messages sent by the recorder Most e mail systems require a Reply To address as part of an e mail message since the recorder does not have its own e mail address it uses the e mail administrator as the Reply To address Any e mail message will consist of a delivery list recipients a subject and an optional message body
116. 23 45 6 78 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1718 A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES Insulation from channel to channel Normally a channel can be safely connected to a hazardous voltage up to 150V AC common mode with respect to earth However where a channel is connected to a safety low voltage circuit i e is accessible for op erators to touch any channel within the same input bank must be limited at all times to a maximum of 55Vac or 140Vdc This is to ensure that protection of the safety low voltage circuit is fully maintained The inputs are divided into two banks inputs 1 to 3 are one bank and inputs 4 to 6 if fitted are another bank A voltage of up to 150V AC common mode can be applied on one bank as long as any safety low voltage circuits are on the other bank The recorder is protected against accidental connection of a voltage up to 240V AC common mode which might occur as a temporary fault condition provided there are no safety low volt age circuits connected to the same input bank as the channel with the fault Common Mode voltage is a voltage applied between the whole channel and earth not between pins on a channel this reduces to 33Vrms or 70Vdc if any channel within the input bank is configured as an ohms or R
117. 3 50 24 5132 6 cycles O cyclefs O cycles O cycles 0 cyclefs Ww e Relay cycle s Displays the amount of relay cycles per relay listed Fixed reports common relay output cycles Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen Recording Main Menu gt Status gt Recording gt Recording Status 14 46 25 36 49 92 Overrange Overrange Overrange 49 92 Yo 49 92 o 3 48 Yo 70 96 Recording Fuzzy Continuous Sample Continuous Sample Continuous Sample Continuous Sample Continuous Sample Continuous Sample Continuous Sample Continuous Sample Continuous Sample lt q Shows the current logging status of all pens within the system e Pen Displays the Pen number and will display a tick when recording and a cross when recording has stopped e Value Displays the current pen value Log Rate Alarm Rate No Group No Group No Group No Group No Group No Group No Group No Group No Group No Group e Recording Displays either Continuous or Fuzzy logging e Log Rate Displays the Log rate set in Hertz A tick denotes if it is enabled and a star will indicate the current log rate 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 159 Alarm Rate Displays the alarm rate in Hertz if this has been set up to change when the pen goes into an active alarm state A tick denotes if it is enabled and a star will indi cate the current log rate Group
118. 41 Screen 29 Jun06 12 37 46 37310 12 12 37 30 12 37 40 1 3 Juh 06 29 Jun 06 29 Jun Eao 000 50 000 100 00 000 0296 wey 7 Horizontal Chart 3 Vertical Bars Apu ww 3 vert bars Om 48 Screen 29 Jun 06 13 34 34 Pen 2 50 000 0 000 30 000 20 000 10 000 000 34 193 3 Horizontal Bars 2 Apu Wl Chart n 3 Horiz bars 0 Om 42 Screen 29 Jun 06 12 38 25 7 000 14 000 28 000 35 000 50 000 21 000 10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 20 00 40 00 60 00 30 00 1 eee 100 00 b9 Jun 06 12 i 29 Jun O 06 P2 Alm 1 Out of alarm 9620 12 38 00 Vertical Chart 3 Horizontal Bars and 3 DPMs 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Functions and Features QX Rear Connections Earth screw ground Wire seal 20 to 55VDC 20 to 30VAC Input 24 48V Instrument power option AC supply 100 250VAC Common Relay Analogue Input Output SPNC Analogue Output or Pulse Input 24V TX Power Slot A supp y Output Slot B Uppy utpu Alarm or CJC Sensor Digital I O Slot G Ethernet pene USB Host 100 250VAC Rear Panel AC power is connected via the standard configuration IEC chassis plug on the rear panel QXe Rear Connections Wire seal AC supply 100 250VAC Earth screw ground Analogue Input card 20 to 30VDC Slot B option 20 to 25VAC Input 24V Instrument power option Alarm or Digital I O 24V TX Power Slot G option Supply Output RS485 port and USB Host
119. 410 1 4 0 8 0 72 0 4 N Nicosil Nisil 328 to 212 200 to 100 5 8 3 2 0 01 C 5 8 3 2 212 to 2372 100 to 1300 2 0 1 1 1 0 0 56 Chromel Copel 58 to 1112 50 to 600 1 1 0 6 0 01 C 0 54 0 3 P Platinel 32 to 2534 0 to 1390 2 5 1 4 0 01 C 1 4 0 78 D 32 to 356 0 to 180 6 3 3 5 0 01 C 6 3 3 5 356 to 3344 180 to 1840 4 2 2 4 2 2 3344 to 4515 1840 to 2490 11 7 6 5 11 7 6 5 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 263 Specification Tables PT100 a 0 00385 328 to 1562 200 to 850 1 1 0 6 0 01 C PT200 a 0 00385 328 to 1562 200 to 850 1 1 0 6 0 01 C PT500 a 0 00385 328 to 1562 200 to 850 1 1 0 6 0 01 C PT1000 a 0 00385 328 to 1562 200 to 850 1 1 0 6 0 01 C 100 ohm Nickel 76 to 356 60 to 180 0 9 0 5 0 01 C 120 ohm Nickel 112 to 500 80 to 260 0 5 0 3 0 01 C Cu10 328 to 500 200 to 260 5 5 sls 0 01 C Cu53 32 to 302 0 to 150 0 5 0 3 0 01 C Reference Temperature 22 C Reference Sample Rate 2Hz 500msec Reference Humidity 65 RH 15 Long term stability 0 2 year Does not includes reference junction calibration of 1 0 C using the standard ice bath method of calibration Factory accuracy can be im proved by performing a field calibration Also does not include any error on the sensor Tolerance for these input types includes that of the external shunt resistors 0 1 tolerance Reference Ac
120. 6 2 Screen Markers on page 198 shows different types of markers that may appear on the screen during normal data activity and where they would appear The markers change depending on if the signal goes High or Low outside the Pen Scale or outside the Input Range Note It is recommended to display DPMs on a chart to identify over range and under range activity Table 6 2 Screen Markers Pointer DPM Bar horizontal Chart chart Upscale Burnout A A A Outside Range High A A A A Trace at Max InputRange Top ee a l M a A 1234 567 Trace at Max Penocale TOR gom i SS SS Se Bar Trace Displays as normal 1234 567 Valid Es m S Data Pen Scale Bottom 1234 567 p Trace at Min Input Range Bottom Outside Range Low y y y 9 Trace at Min Down scale Burnout y y Invalid Reading KKK KKKK p Trace at Min 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Screen Designer Screens not available on the QXe Screen Designer screens known as Layouts file type lay can be created in the Screen Designer software on your PC and then loaded onto the recorder This can be done via Compact Flash or USB transfer Templates created in Screen Designer can also be loaded into the recorder added to a recorder screen or screen
121. 6 501 QXe Case and Back Plate Assy 27 50015474 501 QXe Back Plate 28 50006787 501 QXe QX SX Battery Kit of 5 Not shown 43 50012896 502 QXe Case Handle and Terminal Cover Not shown 44 50012915 501 QXe Rear Terminal Cover Not shown 45 50020664 501 QXe Left amp Right Hand Chassis kit 250 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Table 10 3 QXe Spares 48 30755050 502 QXe Mounting Hardware kit 2 Mount Not shown ing Brackets 49 51453083 501 QXe Panel Gasket 52 51453038 501 Stylus Kit Black pack of 5 53 50021404 501 Connector kit 2 of each connector Not shown type 50017290 503 Touch Screen Protector kit of 5 Not shown 46184161 502 Carrying Handle kit Not shown 50017181 501 QXe QX SX Blanking Plates Not shown 51452129 501 10 Ohm Resistors Pack of 8 Not shown 50001251 501 QXe Portable Case Not shown 51453051 501 QX SX and QXe Power cord 125V Not shown QX and QXe Portable Case Dimensions A Height 165 1 6 50 Y Width Depth 165 1 235 6 50 p 9 25 j 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 251 252 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Section 11 Instrument Care and Maintenance Instrument Care and Manintenance The X Series range of recorders contains no parts serviceable by the user except for a fuse on the DC power supply see Fuses on page 13 In the event of a recorder
122. 8 27 88 0 30 28 17 58 70 27 88 0 20 28 08 59 33 27 88 0 10 27 98 In this menu there is a button for each slot for Cold Junction Calibration Calibration is per formed per slot card e Select the desired slot button If a CJC connector is not fitted a message box will appear e The CJC temperature reading is displayed in the CJ Temp column e If the known temperature is different to the recorder s reading an Offset can be entered to make an adjustment to future values The Cold Junction temperature should be measured at the point where the thermocouple is connected in the terminal block Ensure the measured temperature is accurate to within 0 1 C e Enter the difference between the CJ Temp on the recorder and the measured reading as the Offset Value The offset is added to all future readings and displayed in the Cal ibrated CJ Temp column e The Measured Temp column will display the actual temperature using the Calibrated CJC Temp on channels with T C fitted For more details of how a thermocouple works refer to Appendix C Thermocouple Connections on page 285 e Select the tick box to go back and the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Demo Traces Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Factory gt Demo Traces A set of demo traces available for demonstration or simulation purposes when no Analogue cards are fitted Options for each demo trace are e No
123. Assy 51453006 502 QX Analogue Input 6CH Assy 51453006 503 QX Analogue Input 8CH Assy 2 51453027 501 QX Analogue Output 2CH Assy 51453027 502 QX Analogue Output 4CH Assy 2 50001017 502 QX Pulse Input 4CH Assy 3 51453009 501 QX Mother Board Assy 4 51453018 501 QX Digital I O 8CH Assy 51453018 502 QX Digital I O 16CH Assy 4 51453021 501 QX Relay Alarm 4CH Assy 51453021 502 QX Relay Alarm 8CH Assy 5 51453015 501 QX Power Supply AC Mains 51453015 502 QX Power Supply AC TX 51453015 503 QX Power Supply 20V 55VDC 20 30VAC 50013945 503 QX Bezel Touch Screen and Std Nema Includes Bezel Touch 3 IP54 Door Assy Screen and Door Assy 50013945 504 QX Bezel Touch Screen and Nema 4X IP66 Door Assy 9 50003508 501 QX Nema 4X IP66 Door 10 50009118 501 QX Std Nema 3 IP54 Door 16 50006685 504 QX Bezel Touch Screen Display As Includes Bezel Touch sembly NEMA 4X IP66 Screen Assy Door Display Speaker In 50006685 504 QX Bezel Touch Screen Display As verter cables and sembly NEMA 3 IP54 Mounting Bracket 19 51453076 501 QX 5 5 Display 23 50001782 501 QX SX Speaker 24 51453071 501 QX Case and Back Plate Assy 27 51453077 501 QX Inverter and Cable Assy 28 50006787 501 QX SX Battery Kit of 5 Feb 08 UK 241 242 Table 10 1 QX Spares 29 50001011 503 Compact Flash card 128Mb Not s
124. Barcode reader or external mass storage device Rear USB Host is available as an option on the Comms card for the QXe Standard Screens and Custom Fully programmable display values in engineering units Time amp date stamp on every division pro Screens viding the current time and date Sets of Standard screens are available to display data on a chart digital reading bargraphs or numerous combinations thereof Screen properties can be modified on the recorder and custom ised to suit Custom screens created in the Screen Designer software can be imported into the recorder for specialist applications Custom Screen firmware option is required Digital values displayed include alarms on bars engineering units pen name tag time and date 20 character description and totalised values Custom Screens are not available as an option for the QXe 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 259 Specification Tables Specification Design Attributes Data Storage Removable Media Compact Flash card supports up to 4 0 Giga bytes Compact Flash is not avail able as an option for the QXe Local Mass Storage Options USB memory key no size restriction but must be formatted FAT FAT16 TFAT FAT32 USB hard drive up to 120Gb Internal Data Buffer QX and SX Recorder Non volatile 70MB 16 million acquisition values upwards to 1850MB up to 400 million points Internal Data Buffer QXe Recorder Non volatile 70MB 16 millio
125. Batch Process screen See below Show id List Enable this to allow any addition list item id s to appear in a drop down list in the Batch Process screen See below Show Field 1 List Enable this to allow any addition list item for Field 1 to appear ina drop down list in the Batch Process screen See below e Show Field 2 List Enable this to allow any addition list item for Field 2 to appear ina drop down list in the Batch Process screen See below Show Field 3 List Enable this to allow any addition list item for Field 3 to appear ina drop down list in the Batch Process screen See below Additional list items are entered in General Batch Properties on page 107 Ensure you have the pens you require assigned to a group see Pens Menu on page 62 When the Batch Menu set up is complete and you want to start a batch go to Batch Setup Batch Control on page 141 At the bottom of the screen is the Ctr Reset button this will produce a warning dialog asking if you want to reset group counters When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Batch mode state and count in scripts see Maths Variable and Function Tables on page 272 Batch mode state and count in embedded variables see Table 4 4 on page 90 Note batch mode no longer operates on pens that do not belong in a group so when up
126. Batteries should be disposed of in accordance with local regulations they must not be dis posed of with normal refuse 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 301 302 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Appendix J Function Codes and Memory Maps Modbus Memory Map Supplement Start End Address Address Description Hex Hex 1800 185F Analogue Input Value 48 inputs max 1880 18BF Communications Inputs 32 comms values max 2400 24BF Extended Comms Inputs 96 comms values max 18C0 197F Pen Values 96 pens max 1B00 1B7F Totalisers 64 totalisers max NOTE Some Modbus masters may require an offset of 1 for example instead of entering 1800 enter 1801 Totalisers Totaliser values in engineering units 4 byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading Input Text message This facility allows a text message to be passed to the recorder to be annotated on the chart and added to the message log The maximum length of the message is 32 bytes of ASCII characters which need not be null terminated It operates by utilising modbus function code 16 0x10 Preset Multiple registers and the unique address 0x0004 in the modbus global register map The Start Address will be 00 04 and the Byte Count of the number of bytes in the follow ing text message As 2 modbus registers are used to pass an address to function 16 the Number of Addresses has to be back calculated from the required Byte Count to
127. CE Mark X Series recorders are compliant with Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC and the Electromagnetic Capability Directive 89 336 EEC as amended by 92 31 EEC and 93 68 EEC Safety The product range of instruments is compliant with the requirements of BS EN 61010 1 2001 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Control and labo ratory Use and UL 61010C 1 and CSA 22 2 1010 1 If the equipment is used in a manner not specified the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 269 270 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Appendix B Maths Expressions Full Maths amp Script Processing The X Series recorders are supplied with Basic Maths functions Add Subtract Divide and Multiply There are two further options that can be added Full Maths and an extremely powerful Scripting processing module Scripting delivers an additional level of enhanced capabilities with multi line script processing Full and Scripting Maths must be activated in the recorder as a Firmware credit option Scripting is not available on the QXe When a recorder setup is loaded into the Trend Analysis software the Maths capabilities will be transferred with the setup If you are creating a new recorder in Trend Analysis software to be transferred to a recorder the Maths capabilities will be available but will only become active if the recorder has the same Maths functions enabled
128. Calibration oo eee 299 Server Name Email wiccceccccccccsccssessseseseseeseees Server Name SNTP oi Services oo Settings Time and Date Setup Ment sss AI Calibration Alarm Relay asccteianeatssciacina Qasveseviasinteaan Alarm Digital IO o ecceceeeecceeseeseseseeeeseseeeeteseeeetens Alarms Menu an Analogue In Menu Analogue Out we Batch Ment eis CJC Calibration Calibration Charts s scdscestessseeedtsvess Comms Services Counters Credits wees Daylight Saving Digital IO we Edit Recording Edit Setup ieee Email ameron n aA Brot Alert ace cciecsessicdsvesdecessdatesdassasieadesstveescovksstaskades Events Menu Events Counters Menu bE bi Carmenere earn renee epee nara Factory ass si sesstitiessss tstescissaaveaciitiaanariaaseieees Field IO ee ed eek ees ee tt Firmware Upgrade General Groups IP Address Identity oe Language oseese Line HZ Load Menu Localisation Logging Modbus 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Save Setup on eseeeeeeerseneers Scale Menu ssesseseessessessessesseose Screen Saver Screen Setup SELVICES sroeane lenea TCP IP neeem ens Aa Temp UNitS sises caiscsjsacisesssissidescgesi isviiespaztsarateasievtas a WAMOZONGE domana pe Eae TOtAlISET csscssssesesesdscvasstecescsscaseaas Web Enable sisses Signal Wiring OV ID spittin thtnienndtnatatidtedaue DOWATE
129. Chart Batch Start Stop Pause The Event Effects include Mark Chart Logging Start Stop Totaliser Start Stop Reset Reset amp Start Digital Output ON OFF Alarm Acknowledge Emails Screen Change Print Screen Counters Reset Increment Max Min Reset Chart Control Pause Stop Resume Clear Prefil Clear All Messages Delayed Event Script Timers Start Stop Reset Reset amp Start Play Sound Start Stop Display Alert Reports Batch Start Stop Pause Each event marker can be recorded for analysis using the Trend Analysis Software Fast Scanning mode For fast processes the scan rate and recording of the data can be set for up to 50 times per second 20ms for up to 8 inputs for the QX and 16 inputs for the SX Totaliser Sterilisation optional One totaliser per pen Totaliser value must be assigned to a pen for display and storage Multiple totalisa tions Maths option are possible with the use of extra pens option Reset may be manual or pro grammed Event option Totalisation values are ten digits plus exponent Each pen can be totalised according to the Fo or Po sterilisation function at 250 F 121 11 C The Standard Reference Temperature and Thermal Resistance Z Value are fully adjustable values of X Y W and V Start temp Reference temp and Z factor are all user defined allowing support for many different types of sterilisation applications Custom Screens optional not available for the
130. Domain Entering this information into the dialog will not populate the Network Admin menu It is recommended that you fill in this information into the Network Admin menu as it will not be affected by Firmware up grades in the recorder Allow Printing Paper Size 44 Orientation Landscape Printer Name Wuk22nt2n jd2 Colour Printer fe kon ee 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK The Printer menu allows configuration for setting up a printer The printer option displays a Print button from various screens using a basic USB standard PCL Printer Command Lan guage printer For details on suitable printer types see Print Support on page 29 e Allow Printing Tick to enable On and Off Paper Size Toggles between A4 and Letter e Orientation Toggles between Landscape and Portrait Printer Name Enter the printer name as found on the network For a local printer that is connected directly to the recorder via USB ensure the printer name is set to the default LPT1 Shared printers on a domain or work group require the network path to be entered in the Printer name The file path will contain the server name this could be the PC the printer is connected to or a print server and the printer name Eg PC or print server name printer name Colour Printer Tick if a colour printer is being used for the screen capture facility Screen captures can be printed as an Effect of an Event See Events Cause and Effect on
131. E cerictccetssisonviscnsShasn aia tinct ciaaieeitn Layout Menu Add Screen Appearance Delete Screen Edit Layout Edit Settings Load Layout Save Layout sss Screens sesssssisrsessnsis Layout Settings Level Permissions Table 173 Levels P ss WOLS erino a E E 128 Linearisation Tables Analogue Input Load Layout Load Setup Local Area Network COMMS eeen e E Local Settings coca nacienneeenaiinieinie ate Default Time Zone Localisation Daylight Saving Language oo Line Hz Temp Units Time Zone Log OMO Beet nreme ea mre eet Ser eee R Logging bee Eyent Effects ssccccsiccscsscscsiessessstscsscsscasexbevedsckosaseszseases Look up Tables sicacnmandatinunemammasns M Main Ment viiceiccecccsscsscssssssssssssssssssssseseessevesensesenees Alarms Menu Batch Commands Batch Mark on Chart Batch Setup Control Configure we Layout oe as Messages Ment Passwords 0 ee Process Menu Recording Menu Screen Menu Setup Menu Status Menu Main Menu Access 311 Maintenance Back hts gissning sn Calibration o c cccceceeccseseseneseeteteseseseseseneneseseneneaeeees Cladina nanara ei Operating Temperature Touch Screen Maintenance Status Map DUON ssnansnnsne nn Mark Chart Alarms Mark on Chart sassarese Event Effects
132. Eleclss1 4 Febuary 14 MIIVECOII V IFC Installation amp Operation Instruction Manual QX SX and QXe Paperless Recorders Hycontrol Limited Larchwood House Orchard Street Redditch Worcestershire UK Tel 44 0 1527 406800 Fax 44 0 1527 406810 Email sales hycontrol com Web www hycontrol com 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Table of Contents Section 1 PREIAGCE siiccdciedtiscinsededaccsacemaniewssdeetanciiatrehnatnaanvarcuassaesmadiows 1 Preface cwecatsstsscsdsccusectacccivsocisesecssccaasccoscsssecsdsssdassescesssesuvcuseusasseanseadssetessessastecss 1 Thank you for choosing an X Series recordet oeoc 1 DO CUI ENTE OM Sesgsssssnke sds asset vest can ck ake lt i aE E E AN EAEE E 1 OA 6 a oa E E R EEE 1 Trademarks Safety seseseeseee Symbols Satie Plecticil rario eaaa Ea Eai a eTA OREU TEE TE TETERE G 2 Protocols used in this manual essseesseeessesssosesscossseossceessoesssoessseessoeesoosesooessese 3 Safety and Symbol Identification ccecccecccccssecevsssesseseeeeseesenseseeesseesenseseeeseeeeseesenteass 3 Warnings and Safety Precautions essesessesesseeoeseeoeseeseseesoroesoeoosoeooeseeoeseeoeeeeeeee 3 Dosana DOMS e EEA EEA R os Gus wines Gee nS EES 3 Hazardous VOUGBC oi ccscissississicecsacorceataveesanseessegscguesscavedbedbedhaces cea des EIKE RTE EEE 4 Section 2 Installation sissscstiesnecsnstancnencbecsaesesnoasuactmnnntuacadseaneubbensnepueusuawodenancwcnanains 5 Environment and Location
133. Engineer Supervisor Technician Operator irad Perm Area 22 Batch Setup v v v Perm Area 23 Configure v v v Settings Perm Area 24 Configure v v v Layout Perm Area 25 Screen v v v Setup Perm Area 26 Pens v v v Perm Area 27 Events v v v Counters Perm Area 28 General v v All Perm Area 29 Comms v v Services Peers amp Net work Admin Perm Area 30 Comms v v Modbus Perm Area 31 Comms v v Web FTP Perm Area 32 Comms v v SNTP Perm Area 33 Comms v v TCP IP Perm Area 34 Comms v v Email Perm Area 35 Field IO v v Perm Area 36 Passwords v Perm Area 37 View Status v v via Web Page Perm Area 39 Full Control v v via Web Page Perm Area 40 Calibrate v v Screen Perm Area 41 User v v v v v Variables 174 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Table 5 1 Default Level Permissions Default user levels of access to areas within the recorder menu system Bc A 5 adi No Login Permission Area Admin Engineer Supervisor Technician Operator souls d Perm Area 42 Clear Popup v v v v Alert Perm Area 43 Context v v v v Menu Perm Area 44 Clear v v Messages Perm Area 45 Reports Run v v v v v and View Perm Area 46 Reports v v Modify and Reset All Perm Area 47 Script v v v v v Timers 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 175 176 Default Password Access Default password access is set up within the recorder and can be change
134. Equipment with protective earthing grounding EN 61010 1 Front panel designed to NEMA3 IP54 Optional NEMA 4X IP66 Category Il Overvoltage EN 61010 1 Pollution Degree 2 EMC Standards Emissions EN61326 Class B QXe Class A radiated Immunity EN61326 Industrial Levels QXe Light Industrial Safety Complies with EN61010 1 2001 Panel Mounted Equipment Terminals must be enclosed within the panel Specification Analogue Inputs Number of Inputs QX recorder can have 4 6 8 12 or 16 input channels SX recorder can have 4 6 8 12 16 24 32 40 or 48 input channels QXe recorder can have 3 6 9 or 12 input channels Input Types mV V mA with external shunt provided as standard Thermocouple RTD and ohms Minimum Input Span Range is fully configurable with span limitation of the operating range selected with 4 under range to 4 over range capability 50V Range 2 Burnout T C Active High or Low Passive and Health watch Maintenance option Cold Junction Compensation Internal compensation with the ability to manually adjust values External Input for compensation External CJC value specified Input Resolution 0 0015 16 Bit ADC Input Impedance Current loop resistance 10 ohms use 0 1 external resistor Volts gt 1MQ all other gt 10MQ Source Impedance T C and RTD 100 ohms per lead maximum CU10 15 ohms not available for the QXe A single po
135. Hi Lo Deviation latched or unlatched for alarm acknowledgement Alarm Damping 1 sec to 24 Hours Hysteresis 100 of pen scale Common relay output 1A 24V can be activated on any alarm Not available for the Q Xe 260 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Specification Tables Specification Design Attributes Data Replay Mode Data replay facility on chart displays at normal fast or slow speeds with zoom and cursor Display Chart Speeds Chart rates 1 mm hour 5 mm hour 10 mm hour 20 mm hour 30 mm hour 60 mm hour 120 mm hour 600 mm hour 1200 mm hour 6000 mm hour Combinations of rates can be mixed and chart speeds can be set independently for each chart Display speeds are independent of logging rate Messages Screen The message screen displays system information and records any setup activity that has been changed It also provides warning and error message updates lists alarm activity and will display user defined marks on a chart CE Conformity CE Mark Immunity Product Classification Enclosure Rating Installation Requirements This product conforms with the protection requirements of the following European Council Direc tives 73 23 EEC the Low Voltage Directive and 89 336 EEC the EMC Directive Conformity of this product with any other CE Mark Directive s shall not be assumed Complies with EN61326 Class Cord Connected Panel Mounted Industrial Control
136. O Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Figure 5 6 Default password access from the Alarms Menu Alarms menu No Login Ack Alarm Operator Configure Operator View Alarms No Login Configure Alarms requires Operator access Permission Area 9 View Alarms requires No Login Permission Area 5 a Ack Alarm menu Operator access Permission Area 8 By Pen All of the Acknowledge Alarm buttons require lt P Back Frish Operator access Figure 5 7 Default password access from the Screen Menu and Edit layout menu 5 J HE g 0001 Q ge Edit Layout Saul Hi R A 11 May 06 14 54 10 i 7100 00 Pen 1 i 25 18 S 04 Pen 2 Screens Settings Appearance Ta 24 071 Screen Edit Edit layout Supervisor access All of the Edit functions in the status bar re S amp YB Clean Screen Calibrate J Touch Test 4 Screen menu No Login required Permission Area 2 quire Supervisor access Custom Screens are not available for the QXe Edit Supervisor access Replay No Login required List No Login required Clean Screen No Login required Calibrate Engineer Access Touch Test Engineer Access Calibrate and Touch Test Engineer access Used to cal ibrate the touch screen Premission area 40 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 181 182 Figure 5 8 Default password access from the Process Menu Process Menu No Login required Max Min No L
137. OOO After connection select the RS485 port from the Comms menu and select the required protocol from the Protocol menu eg Modbus Diagram shows a view looking from the rear of A B GND the unit See Comms Services Menu on page 73 SPNC Relay QX and SX recorders Single Pole Normally Closed 2 way connector This is a fail safe relay which means if the power goes off the relay closes and can be 6 E set to trigger an alarm So should the power fail the relay is in a fail safe condition Diagram shows a view looking from the rear of the unit Either pins can be Common or Normally closed NOTE Once the recorder is powered up if there are no active alarms associated with the Fixed Relay the contacts will open When the alarm is on they will close QXe Expansion Card This is an interface card that is required when fitting the following option cards Analogue Input card in Slot B up to 6 channels Four Relay output card 8 Relay 2 Digital Inputs card 6 fixed Outputs 2 Configurable DI DO 8 Configurable Digital Inputs Discrete 24V Output card Comms card 24Vdc Transmitter Power Supply Rear USB Port RS485 Comms Port USB Devices Print Support Print Support is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit system refer to the Options item in Credits on page 1017 Not all printers will be compatible with the print support feature on the recorder The guide li
138. Out Menu on page 55 Not available for the QXe recorder Alarm Digital IO Select this to configure Relay Alarm Output card or Digital Input Out put card See Alarm Digital IO on page 56 e Pulse Inputs Select this to configure each Pulse Input channel See Pulse Input on page 58 Not available for the QXe recorder e Linearisation Tables To be used with Analogue Input type Volts Amps or Ohms These are user defined tables that can be set up to allow a non linear input sig nal to be used See Linearisation Tables on page 59 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Table 4 1 Card Positions and Channel Numbers QX i Channel Slot position Card type n mbers Slot A 8 Analogue In 1to8 Pulse Inputs 1to4 Slot B 8 Analogue In 9to 16 Pulse Inputs 9to 12 4 Analogue Out 9to12 Slot G 4 Relay Output 1 to 4 8 Relay 2 Digital In 1 to 8 8 Digital Input Output 1to8 16 Digital Input Output 1 to 16 SX r Channel Slot position Card type n mbers Slot A 8 Analogue In 1to8 Pulse Input 1to4 Slot B 8 Analogue In 9 to 16 Pulse Input 9 to 12 Slot C 8 Analogue In 17 to 24 Pulse Input 17 to 20 Slot D 8 Analogue In 25 to 32 Pulse Input 25 to 28 Slot E 8 Analogue In 33 to 40 Pulse Input 33 to 36 4 Analogue Out 33 to 36 Slot F 8 Analogue In 41 to 48 Pulse Input 41 to 44 4 Analogue Out 41 to 44 Slot G 4 Relay Output 1to4
139. PC1 to LPC48 LPC1 Low Pulse count using Digital IO cards in pulse count mode Pen Pn Get the value of Pen n 1 to 96 Pen Minimum Value PnMINU Gets the Pen Minimum value n 1 to 96 Pen Maximum Value PnMAXU Gets the Pen Maximum value n 1 to 96 Pen report Maximum Value prmax x y Z Gets the Pen Maximum value for a report x pen number 1 to 96 y period 1 hour 2 day 3 week 4 month z report set 1 current 2 previous completed Pen report Minimum Value prmin x y Z Gets the Pen Minimum value for a report x pen number 1 to 96 y period 1 hour 2 day 3 week 4 month z report set 1 current 2 previous completed Pen report Average Value prave x y Z Gets the Pen Average value for a report x pen number 1 to 96 y period 1 hour 2 day 3 week 4 month z report set 1 current 2 previous completed Pen report Totaliser Value prtot x y Z Gets the Pen Totaliser value for a report x pen number 1 to 96 y period 1 hour 2 day 3 week 4 month z report set 1 current 2 previous completed Power Relay PWRREL Returns the status of the fixed power relay Pstv PSTVx Get the persisted Global variable x Persisted global variables maintain their value through a power cycle There is a maximum of 50 per sisted global variables PRC PRC Power Relay Counter Pulse Inputs Al slots HPULn Get the P
140. Permission Area 26 v Pen 1 0 00 to 100 00 B gt Pen 2 50 00 to 500 00 p gt LJ v Pen 3 10E9 to 10E22 F s Pen 4 10E1 to 10E6 P gt v Pen 5 0 00 5000 00 gt Pen 6 20 00 200 00 gt v lt Back Bl Finish id Field 10 Events Counters e Ident Localisation E Factory Grou ta General a P amp Batch Printer General menu Supervisor Access See Figure 5 9 for General menu access Permission Area 20 Reports menu Engineer Access Permission Area 46 Comms Menu Engineer Access See Figure 5 11 for Comms access All of the Comms menu buttons require Engineer access Permission Area 29 comms a eS Services B Network Admin Finish IE TCP IP Edit Setup Menu Supervisor access Permission Area 19 Field I O Engineer Pens Supervisor Comms Engineer Events Counters Supervisor General Supervisor Screen Supervisor Recording Supervisor Reports Engineer E Screen Setup a FA Screen Saver Charts Brightness Screen Setup Menu Supervisor Access Permission Area 25 Edit Setup group 1 report oven 2 batch report Report 4 Report 5 x v K Report 3 x x x Report 6 4 Bak Ba BL Finish m 43 TV 25 33 GL
141. Q Xe Provides the capability in the recorder to accept custom screen designs from the Screen Designer Reports Generate reports manually or using the event system to show daily weekly monthly Totals Max Mins Averages Current Value Messages Message Lists Alarm System Diagnostic Security amp User Counters Digital Inputs and Digital Outputs Reports can be printed e mailed as an attachment or exported to external media in RTF format Health Watch Maintenance Capability optional The recorder keeps track of important life actions for improved diagnostics and preventative mainte nance notification Including Powered On Last powered On Time On since power up Total On time Total Off time Longest Off time Lithium cell life Backlight life left at 100 brightness Hi Lo CJC value Hi amp Lo temps Analogue In last factory user cal Relay operations last configuration change Print Support optional Enables the printer option to print from various Status screens using a basic USB standard PCL Printer Command Language printer Batch Groups The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis The Batch function manages sections of data Concurrent batches are now associated with a group of pens The pens within each group will belong to the batch that is controlled by that group Batches can be controlled through the event system and batch markers are setup by the user a
142. Screen printing v ececesccssecsseceseeereeeseeeeee 155 Process Menu Sa Counters View and Reset oaeee 151 Mak Min iia cicidiesiccadiniidisiitncshataidaies REPOT S siecssseissosisismssnia essesi Script Timers occ Totals Start Stop Reset n User Variables oo cccccccccccccsccscesscsssssssssssssssssesseens Process Screen Overview ieseecssccssssssvessessvesseens 187 Processor Board Battery Safety cp easssccssessciuesscessctatesctestesseseanereatie 301 Protocols o n 3 206 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Pulse Input Card Channel Numbers Connection Details Diagnostics oo eee Pulse Input Menu Q QX Rear CONNECTIONS sssrin 41 QX Standard Screens rccssccvissssvsssssissseesseies 39 OX and OXe Portable Case 242 251 QXe Rear Connections sn 41 QXe Standard Screens e 40 Quality and Safety CE Mark i esssiccctscetien anna nn E 269 Safety pioen nE A E 269 Quality and Safety Appendix A 269 R RS485 Connections oeeeeeceeeccccessesesesessseeeeseseseeseseseseeeeseseseees 29 Rear Port sascavisiivtinnsdiiaiiidiankiieiienkiads 74 Rate Up or Rate Down Alarms s 66 Realtime Chart Controls ccccccccccscsscsscssssssssvees 229 Recorder Functionality Overview 33 Recorder Setup ssis Default Time Zone Local Settings LogOn Off ay Main Menu 00 Main Menu Access oivecccccccccsccsscsscssssscsscsssssseseeeees 43 Menu Path woe ceccccsccsecsece
143. Setup gt Field IO gt Analogue Out Only available when an Analogue Out card is fitted as an option 2 or 4 outputs are available per card The outputs are factory calibrated to meet the published specification and cannot be field calibrated Refer to connection details and Analogue Output Channel Numbers on page 22 Field 1 0 AN J ana Out ana Out Menu path to current menu Ana Out 9 A09 Pen No 1 0 20m ana out10 Out 10 A010 Pen No 1 4 20m4 gt The Analogue Out screen displays all the available aon Ana Out 11 A011 Pen No 1 4 20m4 gt Analogue Output channels Ana Out12 4 A012 Pen No 1 4 20mA gt Each channel displays its individual settings Select a numbered channel to edit the configuration of each output ae ja 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 55 56 Press the Analogue Out button to display all the analogue outputs available Click on indi vidual Analogue Out number to set up each channel profile Enabled Toggle On and Off Allow Overrange Toggle On and Off Disabled as default this will allow the output sig nal to go overrange to 21mA if disabled the maximum is 20mA e Transmit Pen Eg Select a pen to output 4 20 mA loop This will take the scale value from the pen it is transmitting and convert to 4 20mA output signal eg if the scale is 0 50 this signal will fit the scale so 4mA 0 and 20mA 50 For 0 20mA output sig nal with the same 0 50 scale
144. TC Burnout on a specific Analogue Input channel Scheduled Events Once Interval Specific days Month End For more information on setting up events that will send emails see Event Effects on ServerName EN84EV402 global trains com Authentication y Username loc 541500 page 89 User Address phil d gap underground com Recipient Addr s Recipient Addr s p Server Name Enter your server name that will handle the transfer of the emails Ask your IT Admin for the server details One method of finding this information is to go to Microsoft Outlook Tools Email Accounts select View or change existing email accounts Select your email server from the box eg Microsoft Exchange Server and click on the Change button The server name you require is displayed in the Exchange Server Settings dialog Enter this name exactly using the on screen or USB keyboard 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Authentication Indicates whether a username or password is read by the server Check with your IT Admin For Network printers and drivers if you intend to connect the recorder on a Microsoft net work administered as a domain you may have to authenticate the recorder as a user with sufficient permissions to use the resources that you want network printer network drive Usually several devices computers or recorders can be authenticated on the same net work with the same name Username Your netw
145. The Communication Ports is a list of ports available COM1 to COM8 and Ethernet As de vices are added they are displayed under the port name Click on Communication Ports to display a list of all the ports in the main window tick the required port to enable Click on a port and the main window splits into two windows top and bottom The top window displays details of the devices using that port including device D No de vice Name Mode and Status show if the device is connected how many Channels the device has enabled an Active button to activate the device and the device s IP Address As devices get added to each port they will display in the list for that particular port The default is N 8 1 which means no parity 8 data bits and 1 stop bit This is currently the only byte option supported by Comms Server Database Servers The Database Server will list databases and display the devices within each database as they are added Click on any of the database servers or the database within and details of that item are displayed in the main window The main window will split to give additional in formation for databases showing comms port and device details Devices are added to the comms server through the Communications port the device can then be configured for logging The devices appear in the database and these databases are held within database servers Figure 8 5 Comms Server Overview on page 216 shows the comms status scr
146. This button displays a sub menu containing general recorder information including recorder Ident Error Alert Factory Batch Printer set up and Groups Pens menus See General Menu on page 98 Screen This button displays a sub menu containing Screen Saver Chart speed and screen Brightness set up See Screen Saver on page 112 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 49 50 e Recording Set up Scheduled recording and specify the Storage Bias for recording logged and chart data Edit Recording on page 114 e Reports Reports can be generated manually or on a periodical basis using event sys tem to show daily weekly monthly totals max mins averages etc the reports can be printed e mailed as attachments or exported to external media The report details must be set up first before a report can be run see Reports menu on page 117 Torunareport see Reports Process on page 152 Field IO Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Field IO Select which type of Field Inputs Outputs are required for configuration depending on what type of cards are fitted in the recorder BS BS gg e lo EN Analogue In Analogue Out Alarm Digital 10 Be uL TA Pulse Inputs Linearisation Finish e Analogue In Select this to configure each Analogue Input channel See Analogue In Menu on page 52 e Analogue Out Select this to configure each Analogue Output channel See Ana logue
147. This is how often you want this to occur The recorder will carry on with this schedule for the amount entered in the count Eg If 24 is entered into the count the scheduled event will occur at the specified time for 24 hours A count of zero will carry on indefinitely e Days of the Week Only available when Specific Days is selected as a Sub Type Select the days of the week when this scheduled event is to occur e Time of Day Only available when Specific Days is selected as a Sub Type Select the Time Of Day when this scheduled event is to occur User Counters User Counters are quite simply counters that are set up by the user User Counters can be used as a Cause to trigger an Event Effect The User Counter information must be setup in the before it can be used as a part of the event system See Counters Menu on page 96 For a User Counter to be used as a Cause a User Counter must already be set up and be counting something eg a User Counter as an Effect of another Event An example of this could be First setup your counter in the Counters menu Enable it Name it enter the number the count will Start At and enter at what number it will Rollover and start again See Counters Menu on page 96 Event 1 has been set up with Cause 1 as a Scheduled interval every 30 seconds The Effect is that User Counter 1 is set to increment by 1 When the scheduled interval occurs every 30 seconds Counter 1 will increment by 1 o
148. To find your re corder IP address see TCP IP on page 71 The recorder will automatically register a unique Network ID using the serial number The format is xs nnnnnn where nnnnnn is the serial number of the recorder This allows you to browse the recorder if you are using DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol On recorders with password security enabled further login will be required to access Full Re mote Control of the recorder from the web page and to enable a keyboard and mouse For users with Password functionality enabled Login is required Enter your User name and Password in the box to gain access to the recorder web page For Users without Password security just choose a language option to access the web page Select Remote Viewer to enable a desktop user interface This will allow you to view and control your recorder in realtime 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Internet Security Settings IP Address Troubleshooting If your recorder s IP address begins 169 this means there is no DHCP Server Dy namic Host Configuration Protocol available to create a dynamic IP address Either make a DHCP server available or allocate a Static IP address see TCP IP on page 71 The recorders IP address can be viewed in the Status menu see General on page 155 Internet Security Settings E tit Internet Options Types of web browser for use with the Remote Viewer include Internet Explorer 5 and ab
149. Up to 6 Analogue option Inputs and Ethernet std 100 250VAC Rear Panel AC power is connected via the standard configuration IEC chassis plug on the rear panel 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 41 SX Rear Connections AC supply Wire seal 100 250VAC pia eee Analogue Input Earth screw Te oo d o ground Slot B Slot C 20 to 55VDC Slot D 20 to 30VAC Analogue Input 24 48V Instrument Pulse Input power option Analogue Output Slot E lot F Common Relay di Output SPNC Alarm or Digital I O 24V TX Power Slot G Supply Output Slot H Slot CJC Sensor Slots A to F Ethernet RS485 USB Host 100 250VAC Rear Panel AC power is connected via the standard configuration IEC chassis plug on the rear panel 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Section 4 Recorder Setup Power up Configuration of the recorder is performed in the Menu screens and the data is displayed in the Process screens This section takes you through the Menu system and how to set up your recorder See Section 6 Screen Configuration on page 187 for information on setting up screens to display the data User Interface Control All user actions can be performed via the touch screen using the stylus All on screen selec tion and navigation areas are large enough so the unit can be operated without falsely se lecting an adjacent option using the stylus provided The stylus is to be used to operate the touch screen It has
150. Whenever it is likely that protection has been impaired the recorder should be made inoperative and secured against operation The manufacturer s service centre should be contacted 3 Repair is not to be attempted by a customer Any adjustment or maintenance expected of an operator as part of the normal operation of the product is referred to as Opera tional Maintenance Any maintenance not expected of the operator is referred to as 43 TV 25 30 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Warnings and Safety Precautions Corrective Maintenance and is to be carried out only by authorized service personnel or returned to an authorized repair centre 4 Where conductive pollution such as condensation or conductive dust is present ade quate air conditioning filtering and or sealing must be installed 5 This recorder contains one battery on the Processor board which must be treated and disposed of with care Batteries must not be short circuited Batteries should be dis posed of in accordance with local regulations they must not be disposed of with normal refuse 6 Improper signal and supply wiring WARNING A WARNING IMPROPER SIGNAL AND SUPPLY WIRING Signal and supply wiring should be kept separate Where this is impractical shielded cables should be used for the signal wiring Where signal wiring is carrying or could carry under fault conditions hazardous voltage defined as gt 30 V rms and 42 4 V peak or gt 60 Vd c double insulation must be
151. X Up to 4 Analogue Outputs SX Up to 8 Analogue Outputs QX Up to 8 Pulse Inputs SX Up to 24 Pulse Inputs Data Storage media QX SX Compact Flash up to 4Gb e USB ports for keyboard mouse and storage QX Up to 8 Relay Alarm Outputs SX Up to 24 Relay Alarm Outputs QXe Up to 8 Relay Alarm Outputs QX Up to 16 Digital Inputs 24V Outputs SX Up to 48 Digital Inputs 24V Outputs QXe Up to 8 Digital Inputs 24V Outputs y QX Up to 192 soft alarms 6 per pen SX Up to 576 soft alarms 6 per pen QXe Up to 144 soft alarms 6 per pen QX Up to 32 Totalisers 1 per pen QXe Up to 24 Totalisers 1 per pen SX Up to 96 Totalisers 1 per pen Fast Scanning Mode QX 8 Inputs SX 16 inputs 24V Power Supply 24V Transmitter Power Supply QX SX Common Relay Output Communications FTP TCP IP RS485 Modbus slave QX SX 10 100 Ethernet Web and Email e USB ports for keyboard and mouse e OPC Server e RS485 Modbus slave QXe Crystal Clear Display Key Standard QX has a 5 5 Digital Colour LCD TFT QVGA Resolution 320 x 240 pixels e SX has a 12 1 Digital Colour LCD TFT SVGA Resolution 800 x 600 pixels QXe has a5 Digital Colour LCD TFT
152. X SX 32 6d 15d 34d 75d 155d SX 48 4 10d 22d 50d 103d SX 96 2 5d 11d 25d 51d 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Functions and Features Data Export Removable compact flash and USB flash storage device provides multiple data storage alternatives Data is stored in a secure binary encrypted format with the recorder s configurations pro viding added security of the data files Compact Flash is not available for the QXerecorder Removable Compact flash and USB flash storage devices os a External USB Devices The QX and the SX recorders have two USB host ports one front and one at the rear The QXe recorder has one front USB Host and another USB port available as an option at the rear The USB ports can be used for attaching external USB devices such as a keyboard mouse or a USB data storage key The keyboard and mouse can be used to navigate the recorder s screen along with text entry Remote Viewer This is a firmware option that extends the user interface of the recorder onto the desktop PC Providing remote viewing of the unit launched from a web browser Full remote control is available as an option which is password protected to prevent unauthorized access Compatible with Microsoft Internet explorer 6 and higher Security Total Data Integrity data is stored in secure encrypted files making it easy to retrieve the data dependent on process information Data is automatically recog
153. a rounded end to avoid damage to the screen Only a light touch is required to activate the screen Two styluses are provided and there is a special slot at the top of the recorder to slide the stylus in from the right If the touch screen does not match correctly to where you are touching it with the stylus the screen may need calibrating See Calibrate on page 140 Other User Interface Control All user actions can be performed using a mouse or keyboard attached to a USB host port 1 Menu Access When the recorder is powered up the display will show a splash screen followed by an ini tialisation screen displaying the default language flag The first screen to appear on the recorder is a default process screen with the menu bar at the top Select the Menu button to access the menu system to configure the recorder The Menu button takes you to the Main Menu From the Main Menu you may be required to Log In if the Password function is active see 2 Log On Off on page 44 If not the next configuration required is to set the recorder to the correct local settings see 3 Local Settings on page 45 Figure 4 1 Default process screen Access to a m 0001 Main Menu Oo 1y 4 Screen 20 FebO6 10 49 21 10 47 00 10 48 00 10 49 00 100 00 Pen i 20 Jan 06 20 Jan 06 20 Jan 06 Pen 2 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 43 2 Log On Off If Password ESS Extended Security System 21CFR security is active on your r
154. abase Servers Local Server Initial Database June FTP Saved Data Andy FIP Junes 2 1D No Name Mode A Status _ Channels Active IP Address 1 Furnace Realtime ee 20 xs 100089 Communication Ports 7 s comi List of Database Servers x com2 a com3 se com4 x coms Destination Source Type we com Local Client 1 Pen 1 Temp lsec Sample a COM Local Client 1 Pen 2 1sec Sample io COMS Local Client 1 Pen 3 1sec Sample r Local Client 1 Pen 4 1 sec Sample Ethernet Local Client 1 Pen 5 1sec Sample in i Local Client 1 Pen 6 1sec Local Client 1 Pen 7 lsec Local Client 1 Pen 8 1sec Client connection Database logging se Local Server Pen 1 Temp Local Server Pen 2 1sec Sample Local Server Pen 3 lsec Sample Local Server Pen 4 lsec Sample Local Server PenS 1sec Sample Local Server Pen 6 i sec Sample Local Server Pen 7 lsec Sample Local Server Pen 8 1sec Sample Client Connections tab displays any Pens being graphed N Database Logging tab displays any Pens being logged Database logging Comms Server can be minimised now it will continue to run in the background Client connections Client Connections Realtime comms data from the device will only display on the comms server communica tions status screen when realtime data is active on either the server software or by using an OPC client On
155. acters 4 Enter your new password then repeat to confirm 5 The password dialog will appear confirming the change has been successful 6 You have now completed creating an Administrator You can now enter the password system to check and reset the default Policies eg Pass word Expiry Time Main Menu gt Configure gt Passwords gt User Admin gt Policy Refer to the Password section in the User manual for more information User Name Description User names are case dependent however duplicate user names will not be allowed even if case does not match The user name and password cannot be the same Minimum Access Level A feature to allow the minimum level access is available For example when a batch starts the recorder will block access to all users of access level Technician and under so techni cians and operators would not be able to log on after a batch start When a batch ends then the minimum access level can be reverted to including operator Calendar Function Day of week restriction is required for all levels apart from Administrator this will consist of any combinations of 7 days An everyday selection is available Password Policy See Policy on page 127 Duplicate Passwords Duplicate passwords are allowed for different users otherwise this would alert a user that the same password is available on another user login The User name and password cannot be the same Retry Lockout A password retry lock
156. actory menu Select the Options button and by activating and de activating the options in the credit list the recorder will change its functionality Go from Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt General gt Factory gt Credits Table 7 1 Firmware Options Firmware option Credit Description value Full Maths Note 1 4 Full Maths this can handle math expressions that can consist of expressions up to 100 charac ters in length Full Maths with 6 A powerful multi line scripting ability available to solve complex state based applications Eg Scripting Notes 1 amp 4 building an application for If X happens then Y will happen else Z will occur Events Note 3 6 Events are certain conditions or operations that can be set up and logged according to the time and date of an occurrence Subsequently events can be reviewed or displayed on a graph The Event Causes currently include Alarms Into Out of and Alarm Ack Totals Start Stop Reset Reset and Start Digital Input ON OFF State Change T C Burnout Scheduled Once Interval Specific Days Month End User Counters Max Mins Reset System Power ON Setup Change Internal Memory Low Export Memory Low FTP Memory Low User Action Mark Chart Batch Start Stop Pause The Event Effects currently include Mark Chart Logging Start Stop Totaliser Start Stop Reset Reset amp Start Digital Output ON OFF Alarm Ac
157. added to the list will always be selected Preferences The Timing Setups tab displays the current timings for the current com munications setup These entries should be configured correctly and not require any changes by the user Contents Enables the Help files About Communications Server Gives the version of the software Add a new Device to a communications port Use this icon button as one way of adding a device to Communications port Other ways of adding a device are to right click on the desired port in the left window ie Ethernet and select the Add Device option Or select a comms port in the left window right click in a clear space in the top window and select Add Device See Add a Device on page 220 Configure Database Logging Use this icon button to configure a device for logging channels to a database Other ways to configure logging are to right click on a comms port or a device in the left window or a device in the top window displaying the device for that port Connect to a new Database Server ui Use this icon button to connect to a database server either a Local or Remote Server that has been added to the database servers list Connection can be made by selecting Database Servers in the left window and then right clicking in a clear space in the top window displaying the database servers list 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 217 218 Communications Server Comms ports
158. ages 1 18 2006 1 18 2006 1 18 2006 1 18 2006 1 18 2006 1 18 2006 1 18 2006 Message iD Test batch run HI June IS start new batch When the batch is stopped the Batch Control screen reverts back to the Batch Setup screen so the user can start a new batch Batch Setup screens on page 142 As well as a Mark on Chart for every command applied to the batch you can check the Mes sages screen for details of the batch activity Batch Commands e S Start Batch E End or Stop Batch this will complete the batch run e P Pause the batch in progress R Resume batch Only available when a batch has been paused A Abort batch If the batch is aborted it is incomplete and the batch will be cancelled e User ID Displays the user entered ID or User ID entered automatically by the Pass word function e D Description User entered description of the batch in progress e L Lot No User entered Lot number for the batch in progress e C Comment Extra comment field of additional information for the batch in progress 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 143 144 Barcodes for Batch Batch markers can be created using independent barcode software The barcodes can then be read using a barcode wand or reader Any type of Batch marker can be encoded into a barcode using the same control characters used to build up a batch marker S8 216 I FRED This example shows a barcode e
159. ame v P1 T P1 V P1 U Figure 4 10 Embedded variables for pen information Cx IL LIL Mark Chart Text name v P1 T P1 P1 0 CE aD This will display the marker as Furnace1 Temperature is 14 81 Deg C If Pen 1 name is Furnace1 Tag is Temperature the current value is 14 81 and the Unit text is Deg C 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 91 92 Embedded process variables can be used for Pen reports See Pen Report Syntax on page 120 Embedded variable are not case sensitive and spaces are allowed 0001 Furnace1 125 Screen 15 Nov 06 11 45 56 30 Term ai 14 806 Pen 2 24 858 Pen 3 3 2e 01 Pen 4 8 2e 01 Pen 5 20 333 Pen 6 46 61 Pen 7 4 11 Pen 8 0 00 Event Effects continued Logging Is an event effect that can Start or Stop logging enter which one in Sub Type From Selection Type choose either Multiple pens Pen group or All Pens and select the relevant pen s below Totaliser Is an event effect that can Start Stop Reset or Reset and Start a Totaliser in Sub Type From Selection Type choose either Multiple pens Pen group or All Pens and select the relevant pen s below Digital Outputs Is an event effect that can switch a Digital Output On or Off Enter which one in Sub Type and select the relevant relay output s Alarm Acknowledge this is an effect of an event that can acknowledge a latched alarm on a Single Pen Pen Group or All pe
160. an 2 3 and 4 GLBV1 1 If yes then set display indicator to meter 1 return A1 And return the current flow reading elseif A2 gt A1 amp amp A2 gt A3 amp amp A2 gt A4 This tests if flow meter 2 is more than 1 3 and 4 GLBV1 2 If yes then set display indicator to meter 2 return A2 And return the current flow reading elseif A8 gt A1 amp amp A3 gt A2 amp amp A3 gt A4 This tests if flow meter 3 is more than 1 2 and 4 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Full Maths amp Script Processing GLBV1 3 If yes then set display indicator to meter 3 return A3 And return the current flow reading else If none of the above are true then 4 is biggest GLBV1 4 So set display indicator to meter 4 return A4 And return the current flow reading In this application the flow meters are connected to inputs 1 2 3 and 4 at the rear of the recorder and these are recorded on Pens 1 to 4 P1 A1 P2 A2 P3 A3 P4 A4 Pen 5 has the script above which records and displays the highest flow rate of the four Pen 6 is set to record and display the input between 1 and 4 that is the highest rate P6 GLBV1 NOTICE Please note Pn is not entered in the Maths Block and is assumed by the Recorder e g To enter the equation P2 A2 the user would just type A2 Example 2 In the same application as above the user has noticed that whilst flow meter 2 normally has the highest flow rate on occasion a sur
161. ance schedule of exchanging backlights should be every 5 years to maintain the optimal screen clarity Operating Temperature Operating temperatures are described in Specification Tables on page 259 Prolonged operation at temperatures over 50 C will accelerate degradation of the display backlight If the unit has been moved from a cold environment into a warm one ensure that the unit has reached a minimum temperature of 12 C or is left to stand for 1 hour at room temper ature before applying power to ensure no condensation remains in the unit Touch Screen 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 253 254 Instrument Care and Manintenance Care should be taken with the touch screen when handling the unit Sharp and hard objects may pierce the touch screen and damage the display Only use the stylus provided for screen selection Clean the screen using a suitable touch screen cleaner Abrasive materials will damage the touch screen Protective Screen covers are available to provide additional protection against abrasive ma terials See Section 10 Spares List on page 239 Calibration It is recommended that Recorder calibration is checked at least every year or in accord ance with your industry regulations to ensure maximum accuracy See Calibration on page 102 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Section 12 Technical Data amp Specifications Field IO Specification Analogue Output Not available for the QXe
162. and Remaining are dependant of the pen logging speed how many pens are logging and will be affected by Storage bias allocation of chart and logged data Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Printing Screens All the Status screens have a Print button to execute this the printer must first be configured in Network Admin on page 73 and in the Printer Menu on page 110 For details on suitable printer types see Print Support on page 29 The Printer function is a firmware option that is selectable from the Factory menu gt Cred its on page 107 Finish When the Finish button is pressed at the end of a new set up or a change to a setup the following options are available Commit This will save the new setup or changes to an existing setup over writing the existing one and implement them into the recorder Field validation is performed when a change has been made if a problem is identified an error message is shown and the field in question clearly marked Discard This will ignore the new setup or the changes that have been made to the existing setup and not implement them into the recorder Commit Later This gives the user the option for a configuration to be partially completed but to be commit ted at a later date This will retain the new set up or the changes to the existing setup until they are required A partially completed
163. and slave mode Web and E mail over Ethernet DHCP standard communications port and Modbus RTU master and slave mode via an RS485 port USB ports allow the use of an ASCII barcode reader RS485 port is an option for the QXe recorder Email sent to your network con nected PC triggered by an Alarm or an Event Independent Display Chart Speeds and Logging rates logging rates can be pro grammed completely separate from the chart display speed allowing the data to be dis played and stored at the rates that best suit the application Language Support standard language prompts for English UK amp US French German Italian Spanish Brazilian Polish Hungarian Slovakian Czech Turkish Romanian Rus sian Greek Portuguese and Bulgarian Logarithmic Scales all displayed scales can be set as linear or logarithmic max 99 decades Enclosure rating standard NEMA 3 IP54 type front face protection NEMA 4X IP66 available as an option Fuzzy Logging this standard feature provides a unique method to increase the storage capacity of the recorder The data is monitored to determine changes in process data if no changes are observed data is logged periodically If data is changing rapidly it is recorded normally at the programmed rate By not logging data that is static data compression of up to 100 1 or more can be achieved saving valuable memory 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Functions and Features e Security tag wi
164. are made up from items called Widgets and Objects A widget is a con tainer for one or many objects Objects display data in graphical forms such as Bar Scale DPM Text The Expert button toggles to Non Expert mode displayed with a red cross Ex pert mode allows objects to be selected and Non Expert allows widgets to be selected 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 137 138 To select a widget the Expert button must be disabled displaying a red cross A widget has green resize handles that appear when it is selected To select an object the Expert button must be active with no red cross showing Objects have blue resize handles when selected When a widget or object is selected it can be moved and resized Figure 4 3 Expert and Non Expert selection Standard Screen 1 0001 MiniTrend Expert Exit 20 Jul06 14 16 42 Pen 4 5 0e 00 Non Expert mode selects the Expert mode selects the Object Widget with green resize handles with blue resize handles part the whole DPM of the DPM Map Button Map button The Map button in the Screen Menu bar enables the user to associated channels to pens so the pen being displayed on the object or widget will display the actual signal on that chan nel Channel Mapping Widgets Channel configuration can be done per widget or per object Configure the widget if all the objects on the widget are to be mapped to the same channel Select the widget and go to the Map in the Screen menu toolbar Widge
165. aster device Setup each Slave in turn starting with number 1 ee Enabled Toggle On to enable Slave e Friendly name Enter a name to easily identify this slave device ee ID This is to connect to slave ID Port Select this for a list of available ports either Ethernet or RS485 For port configuration see Ports on page 72 e Network Name Ethernet only Enter the recorders IP address or the Network name eg xS nnnnnn where nnnnnn is the recorder s 6 digit Serial number See System on page 155 for the recorder s IP address and serial number ee Protocol Select this for a list of available protocols Modbus or Modbus xX Modbus and Modbus X can both use Ethernet or RS485 Ports Protocols define the format in which the data is transferred from the recorder to a PC or transfer between other devices and peripherals FPLB Floating Point Little Endian Byte Swapped Format amp FP B Floating Point Big Endian Format are standard notations Transaction 1 8 A request for a register or set of contiguous registers Enabled Toggle On to enable the first transaction request Direction Direction for the data to flow In to or Out from the recorder Command This is the type of Registers used by the slave device Refer to the individual memory map for the register type used for each type of device Data Type Refer to individual memory maps for each type of device to deter mine the type of data Eg si
166. ation QX Dimension details 300000 Onaga ooaneds 0000004 9890000 OBA AOON NA ANNNNS Ho oo 156 92 oe Ay E in A F 4 Mounting clamp positions For standard units fit only two brackets on opposite sides of the unit either top and bottom or left and right slots NEMA 4X rated recorders require all four mounting brackets to be fitted Figure 2 3 QX Recorder dimensions 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Mechanical Installation SX Dimension details 280 00 11 024 000000000000000 o 00000000000000 300 00 47 00 200 00 q0 00 i p Tl 8111 T 1 850 7 874 3 15 4 Mounting clamp positions For standard units fit only two brackets on opposite sides of the unit either top and bottom or left and right slots NEMA 4X rated re corders require all four mounting brackets to be fitted Figure 2 4 SX recorder dimensions Installation Instructions e Minimum panel thickness 2mm 0 078 max 20mm 0 78 e Both recorders must be inserted from the front of the panel Two mounting clamps are supplied and can be fixed either on the top and bottom sides or on the left and right sides of the case 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK QXe Dimension details 000000 ORRIA 0000000 0008000 BB00000 6006000 4 Mounting clamp positions For standard units fit only two brack
167. ay card has 2 digital inputs available on the last 2 channels There are no Digital Inputs available on the 4 channels Alarm Relay card Table 2 6 Alarm Relay card 4 channel Alarm Relay card 8 channel Card Channel Digital Card Channel Digital position number Inputs position number Inputs Slot G 1to4 N A Slot G 1to8 7 amp 8 Slot H 17 to 20 N A Slot H 17 to 24 23 amp 24 Slot 33 to 36 N A Slot 33 to 40 39 amp 40 Figure 2 10 Alarm Relay Card connector details CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 NCCNO NCCNO NCCNO NCCNO NCCNO NCCNO NCCNO NCC NO Relay contacts position gaanu Channels 7 and 8 can be set as Digital Inputs Use C and NO NC Normally Closed C Common NO Normally Open 8 and 16 Digital Input Output Card The 16 channel Digital I O card is not available on the QXe recorders The Digital Input Output Card has 1A 24V DC rated relays that are connected via two 16 way connectors the left connector for the first 8 channels and right connector for the second 8 channels The pin outs for 8 and 16 I O cards are labelled from left to right 1 to 16 on the left side and 17 to 32 on the right Each channel can be set up as an input or an output For output the relay is normally open type A Form A dry contacts relay is used for this type of card The inputs are designed to accept Dry contact no volt inputs 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Electrical Insta
168. b08 UK Firmware Credit System Serial No read only and cannot be edited e Credits read only and cannot be edited It displays the number of Credits available to activate additional firmware functionality including the total credit value Options Code the Options code is a unique coded number for this recorder that contains information that enables certain functionality including credit value Options Select the Options button e This displays how may credits are currently in use e Select Options to produce a list of Firmware options available with their credit values The number or credits required is shown in brackets Toggle each option On or Off to enable the feature within the recorder e More credits are available from your supplier cat setun Yoa Factay D eae soun 100089 Maths 4 6 Full Maths Credits g Events 6 Options Code 1000890302109 Fast Scan 5 25 Credits in Use Totals 4 Custom Sern 4 Maintenance 2 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 203 204 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Section 8 Communication Comms Configuration Once the recorder has been set up for Comms the Trend Server software and Communi cations Server requires configuring to allow the recorder to connect with your PC To set up Comms in the recorder go to Comms Services Menu on page 73 For Comms wiring details in the recorder see Communications Connections on page 28 Follow these stages for
169. be changed on all other recorders Trend Server and Comms Server If you experience and security issues using peers see nternet Security Settings on page 235 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 81 82 Events Counters Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Events Counters Events See Events Menu on page 82 Counters See Counters Menu on page 96 Preset Markers See Preset Markers on page 96 Time Sync See Time Sync on page 97 e Events Counters il B Counters Preset Markers 2O an ka Time Sync Events Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Events Counters gt Events Events is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit system All Event occurrences can be viewed in Events Status on page 163 Edit Setup Event 1 Eventi Enabled Event 2 amp Event2 Tag Event 1 Event 3 X Event 3 Cause 1 Alarms Event 4 X Event 4 Cause 2 Effect 1 Event 5 amp Event Event 6 X Event 6 gt M Effect 2 m d Events are certain conditions or operations which can be set up and logged according to the time and date of the occurrence Subsequently events can be reviewed in a list or represent ed on a graph 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK An event is made up from a Cause and an Effect For example set up a cause such as Pen 1 going into an alarm state and the effect of this could be to start a totaliser or acknow
170. ble 4 2 Events Cause and Effect T C Burn Out Analogue Input Scheduled Once Interval Specific Days Month End User Counters User Counter Max Mins Reset Reset Max Min values System Power On Setup Change Internal Mem Low Export Mem Low FTP Mem Low User Action Mark Chart Batch Start Batch Stop Batch Pause Batch Cause Effect Into Alarm Alarm Out of Alarm Acknowledge Alarm eo nena Start Logging Totalisers Stop Totaliser Reset Digital Outputs On Alarm Acknowledge Digital Inputs Off Email State Change Screen Change Print Screen Counters Max Mins Reset Chart Control Clear All Messages Delayed Event Script Timers Play Sound Display Alert Batch Reports For Maths variable for counters see Maths Variable page 272 and Function Tables on 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Figure 4 8 Event 1 example Event 1 example Adding Cause 1 i ms mDrerDrI en i E Into 4 Sarm Out of larm Event 1 example Adding Effect 1 T N N e a L Enabled Select which Pen number and which alarm on that pen will have the alarm acknowledged 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 85 Event Causes e Alarms Set to cause an event when a pen goes Into Alarm Out of Alarm or an Alarm is Acknowledged Set the pen number and the Alarm tha
171. ccess the same data e Reliable data as any number of OPC software applications can simultaneously read a device e Single industry standard data interface OPC Clients An OPC client can be used instead of the Trend Server software It is a user software ap plication for realtime interface between servers and clients Information from our comms server which is OPC compliant uses an industry standard method of uniform data inter change The OPC client can then export realtime communications to other applications eg Microsoft Excel OPC clients must be version 3 compatible For more information refer to Application Note 4 OPC Access Web Browser 234 The Web Browse function can be enabled disabled from the recorder This allows you to view the recorder information only The web button can be password protected if passwords are enabled See Web on page 78 This is a firmware option that first needs to be acti vated in Options see Credits on page 101 The Remote Viewer is a firmware option that can be added to allow access to the recorder from a web page The Remote viewer option needs to be activated in the Firmware options screen see Credits on page 1017 To access your recorder s web page type the device s IP address in to a web browser such as Internet Explorer If Microsoft WINS system Windows Internet Name Service is avail able then the device name can be used to search for the device web page
172. ce data is active on a client connection this window will display details of the device selected in the top window its Destination or where the information is going to Source or origin of the data channel or event Rate and Type of data sampling being com municated See OPC Interface Open Process Control on page 233 and OPC Cli ents on page 234 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Communications Server Database Logging This tab will display information on what is currently being logged to a database for the de vice that is selected in the top window its Destination or where the information is going to Source or origin of the data channel or event Rate and Type of data sampling being com municated A third tab Diagnostics can be enabled using the Administration button and selecting Preferences Send Recorder Events Comms Server has a set of chart controls that can control the chart on the recorder from your PC This can be done in Realtime chart controls on page 229 or can be setup as an Effect of an Event Furnace 1 Edit Device Configure Logging Delete Device Send Recorder Event Recorder Chart Functions Properties ast Prefill Chart Fast Prefill Chart Normal Chart Pause Chart Resume Chart Clear All Charts Clear All Messages Stop Chart Right click on an active recorder to produce the drop down menu Realtime chart controls Right click on an a
173. ch Pulse Counters you wish to reset View will display all the Pulse Counters that have been set up 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 151 152 User Variables Main Menu gt Process gt User Variables User variables provide the user the ability to set values for up to 32 variables to be used with in the maths and script e Modify allows the user to set and edit the variables e View the user can view the variables The User variable function allows a system to be setup where values can be altered to effect calculations without having to change the configuration The variables can be used within the Maths and script using UV1 to UV32 and can also be set within the maths using the func tion UVSET x y where x the user variable number 1 to 32 and y is the value The User variables are also non volatile See Appendix B Maths Expressions on page 271 Script Timers Main Menu gt Process gt Script Timers Script timers provide 20 independent timers to be used as desired Previously control and access of script timers was limited to maths functions for use in script but this has now been extended allowing the timers to be controlled using the event system Select a Timer that can be stopped started and reset y Access to timers via the script is still available in Maths Variable and Function Tables on page 272 Reports Process Main Menu gt Process gt Reports Reports can be generated manually or on a p
174. ck active and a cross inactive Pen Rate This displays the fastest of all dependencies Alarm Displays how many alarms are enabled on this pen Total This will be ticked if a totaliser has been enabled on this pen Group Displays the group number if this pen has been allocated to a group Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 157 Maintenance Main Menu gt Status gt Maintenance The recorder keeps track of important life actions for improved diagnostics and preventa tive maintenance notification The Maintenance button will become active when Health Watch Maintenance is selected as a firmware option To enable this go to Options on page 156 8 Maintenance e Item xr value Ja Powered on 14 times m Last powered up Tue ug 06 2006 10 27 46 Time on since powerup ih 45m 51s Last Setup Modified Tue 4ug 08 11 15 52 Total On time 146d 5h 59m 08s Total OFF time Sd 21h 08m 57s Longest OFF time 2d 22h 59m 03s Lithium cell life 29859 hours left Backlight Life 53060 hours left at full br Compact Flash 32 inserts Lowest temperature 23 3 Deg C Highest temperature 35 6 Deg C Back Print Once enabled this screen will keep the following information e Powered on How many times the recorder has had the power turned on e Last Power up The last time the recorder had been turned on Time On since power u
175. ck or change the screen Standard Screen 2 properties and set Layout Settings Standard Screen 3 Standard Screen 4 r gt RAZA F Action Rev Fwd In Out Cursor Exit Screen Menu Bar e Print Instantly prints the screen you are displaying To set up your printer see Printer Menu on page 110 Every pixel is sent to the printer Edit From a standard process screen this gives quick access to Screens Settings and Appearance View all available Screens and modify certain screen properties including Screen name Template Type Orientation and Pens being displayed See Edit Layout on page 121 for details Use Settings to set up screens for cycling Cycling screens will display specific screens for an allocated amount of time before switching to the next For Custom Screens this will enable the Edit tool bar go to the Edit Toolbar on page 137 This is for Pen Channel mapping and Expert mode for moving and resizing items on the screen Replay Gives quick access to the Replay Screen and the Replay toolbar See Replay on page 190 e List List of all available screens select to change the current screen e Prev Displays the previous enabled screen in current selection e Next Displays the next enabled screen in current selection Exit Exit this menu return to the current process screen 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 189 Replay The Replay button takes you to the process screen in replay
176. ckets Next step will be either elseif or else Must always finish with a return If x gt 5 return y Set Changed SETUPCHAN Returns true if the setup has been changed GED otherwise returns false Time Changed TIMECHANG Returns true if the time has been changed oth ED erwise returns false 278 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Full Maths amp Script Processing Full Maths Full Maths functions provides a simple and intuitive method for the user to carry out numer ous mathematical functions Some examples are shown below Table 14 8 Full Maths examples Full Maths examples P4 lo A1 A2 Pen 4 shows the result of the lowest of either A1 or A2 P3 A1 A2 SQRT A3 Pen 3 shows the result of Analogue input 1 added to Analogue input 2 all multiplied by the square root of Analogue input 3 P4 GLBV1 P4 shows the Global Variable 1 NOTICE Please note Pn is not entered in the Maths Block and is assumed by the Recorder e g To enter the equation P2 A2 the user would just type A2 erro J LL 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 279 280 Full Maths amp Script Processing Script Function Application Examples Scripting is not available on the QXe To enter a script for a Pen ensure that Maths Type in the Pen Menu is set to Scripting Example 1 4 flow meters are fed into the recorder to trend totalise and record daily flow The application requir
177. creen To Delete a screen just select Delete Screen to produce a list of current screens Select the screen to delete and it will be removed immediately When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Settings Main Menu gt Configure gt Layout gt Edit gt Settings Use this menu to set up the layout settings for the screens C Cycle Screens Tick this to cycle though each of the recorder s screens Cycle List Select which screens you wish to be cycled Cycle Interval Enter the amount of time in seconds that each of the cycle screens are displayed for range 5 to 3600 seconds Screen Hold If during cycling screens you wish to investigate a certain screen for a longer period than the cycle interval you can enter a time period here for the amount of time that screen will be displayed range 0 to 3600 seconds 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Alarm Screen Select which screen is to be displayed when any pen goes into an alarm state Only changes colour if Mark on Chart is enabled in the Alarms Menu on page 66 e Alarm Screen Name Only active if Alarm Screen is enabled Replay Screen TO TimeOut If the recorder is in replay mode and there has not been any user activity for a defined amount of time then the replay screen will return to the process screen Replay TimeOut only active if Replay Sc
178. creen using the instant brightness slider See Brightness on page 114 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Screen Saver Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Screen gt Screen Saver Configure the screen display and Screen Saver functions The default state for the Screen Saver is disabled The Screen Saver function helps to reduce backlight wear When active the back light is off and nothing on the display is visible The screen saver will not function in Setup Menus or in test mode e Enabled Toggle On and Off e Timeout Only available when the Screen Saver function is active This is how long the Screen Saver will display on the screen Programmable between 1 and 720 minutes in software when disabled the screen will remain on permanently enter 0 to disable Saver Type Only available when the Screen Saver function is active This is set to Normal Dim Saver Only available when the Screen Saver function is active Dim Saver will help to increase the life of the backlight and lower the screen brightness for night time use Use Saver Brightness or Off Always 112 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK e Saver Level Only available when the Dim Saver function is set to Use Saver Bright ness Select this to use the instant dimming slider which lowers the screen brightness Default screen br
179. csscssssssssseseeeseees Recording Menu Device Selection Export NOW dsccscspaisscicecarnivcraiacviacaianeiness Export busy light essssssscssessscesssssereesese 147 Recording Methodology ow 145 Recording Methodology ecrccccssssscssssssssvssessves 145 Recording Status tii Stendidcsacnuciae 159 Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification 256 Remote Control Viewer Overview i e 35 Remote Networks COMMIS 225 55 has ucides sce cc isd asteshdebachaatatideteatestuchlvvies eects Remote Viewer Reports Event Effects isitiiciisieseesapalaiciticiaiiits Pen Report Information Process Menu 0cccccee Reset All sa cs5cdsiscoschscescescessesvesesonsaveaseacesvapseascontenevseis MR E E a sii Sed soviet va Cats seticc FE EENE testes nveauseeeees View Archive ssresiisisiici isaka tr itana 313 Reports Menu sssri 117 Reset Setup Layout Data All oes 106 Reset Passwords sses 129 Resistance Thermometers ccecccccccsccccesseesseeseeeees 18 S SMTP Status caroceennerncsnns SNIP orin Client Server Network SPCO Relay scone tautiveaktednieasananwec SX Portable Case SX Rear Connections SX Standard Screens OVERVIEW sereo Sissies EEEE SAEY dh steaicseninciect nannies Battery Data oseese Hazardous Voltage Static Electricity oo eases SyMDOlS enn ne an gnarl eeteasiessaraeseiaayss Safety and Symbol Identification 0 3 Save Layout Save Setup Scale Menu Scheduled Events Event Causes vandeniniai e aE 86 Sch
180. ctive recorder in Comms Server Ethernet or RS485 either from the recorders listed in the left hand window or from recorders in the main window e From the list select Send Recorder Events and the Recorder Chart Functions box will appear If the option is not in the list go to Preferences in Administration on page 217 Select a chart control function for immediate effect on the recorder Because Trend Server is graphing the data that is being transferred in realtime the recorders running on Trend Server will not be affected 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 229 230 Communications Server Event chart controls The same set of chart controls can be activated using the event system in Trend Server Chart controls can be used as an effect of an event happening In the Events tab in Trend Server set up a cause to trigger the effect of a chart control ee Pause this will pause the chart until it is resumed Resuming a paused chart will display continuous chart data from when it had been paused The chart can be stopped if in a paused state ee Stop this will stop the chart and no chart data will be displayed for the length of time the chart is stopped If a stopped chart is resumed there will be a gap in the displayed chart data Resume this can be used after the chart has been stopped or paused The chart data will continue from where it has been paused with no gaps displayed But if the chart has been stopped the displa
181. curacy can be improved to 0 4 C 0 7 F using the single point compensation calibration not available on the QXe Including all Field Cal values Specification Options Pulse Input optional not available on the QXe 4 isolated inputs per board frequency 1Hz to 25kHz updated once per sec Input Low lt 1V High gt 4V to lt 50V or Volt free input Low short circuit High open circuit Alarm Outputs optional Programmable alarm set points 6 per pen can be configured to activate up to 16 outputs for the QX and 48 outputs for the SX Update rate 200 ms for all alarms Number Type e 4or 8 relay contacts SPDT 3A 240VAC 3A 24VAC DC 0 2A 240VDC non inductive internally suppressed e 8l Oor 16 I O SPNO 1A 24VDC non inductive internally suppressed 16 O not available for the QXe Activation Fully programmable internal alarm levels Assignable to any relay or discrete output Analogue Outputs Re transmission Outputs optional not available for the QXe 2 or 4 re transmission outputs available for the QX Recorder and 2 4 6 or 8 re transmission outputs avail able for the SX Recorder a pen drives each output Analog inputs totalised values or any mathematical result can be re transmitted Update Rate 250 msec all channels Type 0 to 20 4 to 20 mA Resolution 0 002 Accuracy 0 1 0 5000 load 0 25 5009 1KQ load Maximum Load Resistance 1000 Ohms Isolation 300VAC Di
182. curs based on the recorders real time clock e Auto Fit Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy Toggles On and Off AutoFit ensures that the last sampled data point is logged before the signal goes out of the tol erance set in Band 1 or Band 2 When displayed on a graph the input signal will auto matically fit to this last logged point This gives a better fit for stepped input changes Band 1 Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy This is where the toler ance is set for the input signal Specify as a percentage of the scale range the toler ance band allowed above and below the input signal Select and enter a value Fuzzy Band 2 Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy Toggles On and Off This is to enable a second tolerance to be set configure it to be On to activate Only used in conjunction with Autofit On to specify the Band 2 Band 2 Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy This is where a tighter tol erance can be specified which must be set within the limits of Band 1 Specify as a per centage of the scale range the tolerance band allowed above and below the input signal Select and enter a value When the setup is complete go back to the Pen menu and complete the pen setup 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 65 66 Alarms Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Pens gt Alarms This is for setting up alarms on this pen only a
183. d connects to 3 A 240 VAC SPCO relays The pin outs for 4 and 8 relay Alarm Relay cards are numbered from left to right and they read as follows for each channel NC normally closed C common NO normally open Devices driven by the relays are connected via two 12 way screw terminal plugs The last two channels 7 amp 8 23 amp 24 or 39 amp 40 can be used as digital inputs connect across Common C and Normally Open NO CAUTION IMPROPER MAINS SWITCHING For 8 channel Alarm Relay cards Switching mains on the normally open contact on channels 7 and 8 is not recommended as surges and spikes on the mains supply could cause damage to the input circuitry The normally closed contact is unaffected and can be used like all the other channels A Form C dry contact relay is used for this type of card The inputs are designed to accept Dry contact no volt inputs The relays should be used for non inductive loads only where a device requires a voltage to operate it such as a 12 Volt buzzer connect it to the normally open NO contacts unless the fail safe setting is activated The maximum voltage which may be used with the alarm relays is 240V 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 25 26 Electrical Installation Alarm Relay Channel Numbers The Alarm Relay cards are either 4 or 8 channels with a full length connector taking up 8 channels even though the cards only operate on 4 channels or 8 channels The 8 channels Alarm Rel
184. d enter the number of decimal places up to 15 decimal places When this pen setup is complete go back to the Pen menu and complete the pen setup for all other pens Logging Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Pens gt Logging Menu path to current menu Enabled Type Continuous Type Fuzzy Rate Units Seconds Rate Units Minutes Rate 10 Sec Alarm Rate Units Milliseconds Alarm Rate Units Seconds Alarm Rate 500ms 2Hz Ww Alarm Rate 10 Sec v a Ae jg T d Pen Logging can be set to log as Continuous or Fuzzy Click on Logging to set up each logging profile per pen Enabled Toggles On and Off to activate or de activate logging for this pen 64 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Type Toggles between Continuous or Fuzzy logging Continuous logs every value based on the Method chosen Sample Average or Max Min Fuzzy Logging has been developed as a secure data storage technique which has a self teaching data storage algorithm so the recorder stores data at a variable rate to match the process being monitored Fuzzy Logging has intelligent resources to enable the most effective and efficient way of using the scan rate storage capacity and record ing time See Appendix F Fuzzy Logging on page 293 e Rate Units Set the Units for the logging rate to be displayed Select and choose the logging rate units from the drop down menu e Rate This is the speed
185. d 48 extra pens for the SX recorder 202 Notes for Table 7 1 on page 201 Basic maths is standard in all recorders Basic Maths math comprises of Add Subtract Multiply and Divide 1 Additional pens Extra Pens can be used to display and store the results of calculations totalisers variables imported via communications or to store values 2 Custom Screens must be built using X Series Screen Designer lay Screens from other Screen Designer ver sions cannot be imported lyt not available for the QXe 3 Event markers are required to automatically reset the totalisers for example on a periodic basis or on an exter nal condition Not necessary if the totalisers are reset manually 4 Not available for the QXe Credits can be applied to the Firmware functions until the total number of credits purchased has been used up See Applying your Firmware credits on page 202 Additional credits can be purchased later if new features are to be activated and not enough credits are available to support these additional functions Firmware Options Applying your Firmware credits To activate the Firmware options follow this file path Main Menu gt Configue gt Setup gt Edit gt General gt Factory gt Credits The Credit menu contains the Serial No of the recorder how may credits are available dis plays the Options Code and lists what firmware Options are currently active 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Fe
186. d by the Adminis trator or the Administrator can assign another user to change the access permissions Default permissions e Administrator Access is for the Administrator level only e Engineer Access is for Engineers and above Administrator level e Supervisor Access is for Supervisors and above incl Engineer and Administrator levels e Technician Access is for Technicians and above incl Supervisor Engineer and Adminis trator levels Operator Access is for Operators and above incl Technicians Supervisors Engineers and Administrator levels e No Login gives access only to unrestricted areas Access levels can change for each menu for example Operator or above access is required to get to the Configure menu Once in the Configure menu the operator level can only ac cess the Passwords button Setup is Technician or above access and Layout and Settings are Supervisor or above access 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Figure 5 1 Default password access from the Main menu Configure Menu Operator Access See Figure 5 2 for Configure menu access Permission Area 13 a Configure a LZ JL Layout Passwords Batch a tal lalla Stop Pause Abort Batch Control Operator Access All of the Batch Control menu buttons require Operator access Permission Area 10 Process a L Totals Counters v1 ka Zz UVa 3 User Variables Script Timers Reports
187. d errors that have been generated by the unit The screen will also display the Time and Date that the activity occurred and the Message details Diagnostics Examine a complete list of the recorder s functionality and processes since it was last powered up The screen will display Type of message Time and Date that the activity occurred and the Message details Security Audit trail of entries made to secure areas such as Password setup includ ing Log on Log off what area has been accessed time date and the user name Users These are messages that have been entered by the user by entering a Mark on Chart The screen will display the Type of message Time and Date that the activity occurred and the Message details 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 147 Printing Screens All the Messages screens have a Print button to execute this the printer must first be con figured in Network Admin on page 73 and inthe Printer Menu on page 110 For de tails on suitable printer types see Print Support on page 29 The Printer function is a firmware option that is selectable from the Factory menu gt Cred its on page 107 Message List All messages will conform to the following format Type Time Date and Format 2 All Messages 1 23 2006 1 23 2006 1 23 2006 1 23 2006 1 23 2006 1 23 2006 1 23 2006 IEEJAS 1 23 2006 1 23 2006 1 23 2006 1 23 2006 a a a a 2 2 a a a a Message a
188. dard and uses a standard RJ45 Ethernet connection After connection select the Ethernet port from the Comms menu and select the required protocol from the Protocol menu eg Modbus 2 4 6 8 J OOOO 87654321 H i229 A dale OA BO or RJ45 Pin 1 is to the right from the rear of the unit 24V DC Instrument Power Input 24V DC instrument power is available on all X Series record ers as an option It is connected using 3 way connector mat ing half is supplied Diagram shows a view looking from the GND rear of the unit O ON O QXe Comms card An option card is available with RS485 Modbus port and USB device connections The card can be purchased and fitted at any time The RS485 connection uses a 3 way connector The card also has connection for 24V DC Transmitter Power Supply see Transmitter Power Supply Card on page 24 To fit this option card into the QXe recorder you will require an expansion card to interface to the recorder See QXe Analogue Input Standard card on page 19 Figure 2 12 QXe Comms card o mj m o o 24V DC TX RS485 USB Host Power Supply Modbus port 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 43 TV 25 33 GLO Electrical Installation RS485 QX and SX recorders The RS485 port is fitted as standard as a part of the processor card and uses a 3 way connection 1 2 3
189. deal scan rate is unknown Fuzzy Logging is ideal as it adapts the log rate to the input signal and can therefore find the opti mum logging rate for you Tolerance band widths Tolerance band width can be set as a percentage of the scale range allowed above and be low the input signal A second band width can be set this is where a tighter tolerance can be specified which must be set within the limits of Band 1 Specify as a percentage of the scale range the tol erance band allowed above and below the input signal See Logging Menu on page 64 Figure 18 1 Fuzzy logging tolerance settings q Band 1 q Band 2 c Trace Band 2 lt Band 1 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Appendix G F sub zero Sterilisation 121 1 TPC The significance of Fo The Fg value is used in the pharmaceutical and related industries in the sterilisation of items A brief summary is included here to give the essence of the meaning of the terms used When items are subjected to sterilisation by heating the rate at which micro organisms are killed is dependent on the temperature Traditionally items were sterilised by holding them at 250 F 121 11 C and the Fg value for a sterilisation is simply the equivalent time at this temperature that would produce the same effect For many average micro organisms each minute at 121 11 C reduces the number present by a factor of 10 so a 15 minute hold at this temperature wo
190. deleted When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit or Discard Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Unlock User Main Menu gt Configure gt Passwords gt User Admin gt Unlock User This will list the current users that have been entered into the password system The Admin istrator can unlock a user that has been timed out eg password expiry by selecting a user from a drop down list Select the user and choose Re enable Current or Reset to Default that will set it back to the original setting Reset Passwords Main Menu gt Configure gt Passwords gt User Admin gt Reset Password This will produce a text box warning that if you reset the passwords all the current settings will be lost and the password system will return to the factory default setting Select whether to Continue or Stop the reset procedure Change Passwords Main Menu gt Configure gt Passwords gt Change Passwords The Change Password function can be accessed by all users Select Change Password and enter your user name and old password you will then be prompted to enter your new pass word twice to confirm 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 129 130 Password Network Synchronisation PWD NetSync Main Menu gt Configure gt Passwords gt Pwd NetSync Passwords can be synchronised over the network a recorder can be designated as a mas ter of a password group and other recorders can be added to
191. dit Recording Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt Recording Scheduled Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt Edit Recording gt Scheduled Set up Scheduled exports to transfer data at timed intervals from internal flash memory to externally attached devices Compact Flash or USB storage key Compact Flash not avail able for the QXe See Recording Methodology on page 145 and Storage Media Format on page 145 gt gEdit Recording Scheduled Storage Bias Storage Alarm asa A Select the Scheduled button to reveal the scheduled menu 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Schedule Export Tick to enable Export Device Select the device you wish to export data to USB1 is the first USB device to be fitted and USB2 is the second one fitted front or rear of the recorder Compact Flash not available for the QXe and the rear USB port is only available as an option Update Period Select how often you wish data to be exported from the list provided 10 30 minutes 1 2 12 or 24 hours Log Messages Tick to add a message to the messages list when a scheduled export has been performed Mark Chart Only active when Log Messages is enabled Tick to mark the chart when a scheduled export has been performed When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu If a manual Export Now is in
192. dual drivers for each piece of equipment obso lete OPC enabled software include spread sheets databases virtual instruments and SCADA supervisory control and data acquisition interfaces These applications are known as OPC client software Each OPC server can simultaneously provide data for any number of OPC clients Likewise multiple clients can at the same moment access any server a robust method of communi cation With OPC measurement and control systems can share information and co operate with other installations across factories offices laboratories etc The same data is therefore readily available to engineering maintenance management in fact to anyone that requires up to the minute data on which to base their decisions OPC allows plug and play All OPC devices will connect together and immediately work with the OPC client software This has the potential to massively reduce installation and sys tem configuration time It also means that you can add devices without shutting down exist ing systems 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 233 Web Browser OPC offers the following Combine different devices from different manufacturers in one system e Reduce installation time e Add devices without stopping existing software and systems e Quickly replace a device from one vendor with one from another e Share information around networks e Device drivers rendered obsolete e Factory laboratory and office applications can all a
193. e Recorder powered 4 years life typical Recorder unpowered Password Protection Multiple Administrator control of password setup and management with four levels of password protection for Engineer Supervisor Technician and Operator Up to 50 different users are avail able Password protection restricts user entry to the recorder set up and specific screens Engineer Highest access to all levels Supervisor Technician and Operator Supervisor 2nd highest level including Technician and Operator access Technician 3rd level including Operator access Operator 4th and lowest level of access Languages English UK amp US French German Italian Spanish Brazilian Polish Hungarian Slovakian Czech Turkish Romanian Russian Greek Portuguese and Bulgarian Temperature Units c F K Recorder Identification Status bar Alternately displays Recorder ID and Recorder Screen Name Displays Time and Date Clock Accuracy 29ppm 1 minute month 25 C Summer Winter manual or automatic time adjustment or via communications SNTP Client and or Server included for synchronising over Ethernet Recorder Time Synchronisation on Digital Input Alarm Set Points 6 per pen integral soft alarm set points easily set by user to announce selected out of limit condi tions user can select if an alarm triggers a change in the screen background colour Alarm triggers can be set for
194. e thermocouple to give a displayed reading of 100 C The 4 methods of cold junction compensation are described below All diagrams show passive burnout for active burnout replace the for 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 285 Thermocouple CJC Compensation Thermocouple CJC Compensation The different methods for connecting thermocouples according to the type of reference are shown below Internal Automatic Input terminals on rear panel of Measuring recorder junction D Inputs Volts Look up table Qo added converts i C D voltage read ing to tem C perature Thermocouple CJC Reading aoe in volts A p Thermocouple Temperature Reading Table edate in C maths expression Internal Auto This is connected to the input terminals of the recorder and the temperature at this junction is being measured by a temperature sensor on the rear panel of the recorder The reading from this sensor is read off against a value taken from the thermocouple table which corresponds to the type of thermocouple being used The corresponding reading in volts for the temperature measured by the sensor is then used as a reference for the reading from the thermocouple Diagram shows passive burnout for active burnout replace the for 286 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Thermocouple CJC Compensation Ext 0 C Reference
195. e 5 5 for Edit Setup Field 10 menu access Permission Area 19 Figure 5 4 Default password access from the Password Menu Password Menu Operator access Permission Area 36 User Administration P User Admin Administrator a amp Change Password Operator access Users Delete User Unlock User A Reset Pwds Finish User Admin Administrator access only Password Net Sync Administrator access only Pwd NetSync 5 Type _ standalone Finish aie Change Password button requires Operator access Permission Area 12 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 179 Figure 5 5 Default password access from the Edit Menu Field I O Menu Engineer Ac cess All of the Field I O but ton require Engineer access Permission Area 35 faa Field 1 0 3 BS BS BS Analogue In Analogue Out Alarm Digital 10 al vats BE kz A Event 1 Event 2 Event 3 Event 4 Event 5 Event 6 P Finish m Events Counters menus Supervisor Access All of the Events and Counters menu buttons require Supervisor access Permission Area 27 gt gEdit Recording i P Scheduled Storage Alarm xm Back Finish Edit Recording Supervisor Access Permission Area 19 Storage Bias 180 Pens Menu Supervisor Access
196. e device has been configured and enabled data can be retrieved Data is logged to the internal memory This data can be exported to Trend Server via e Compact Flash USB removable media transfer setup and data e Modbus RS485 Ethernet transfer data only e FTP Ethernet transfer Setup and data 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 209 210 Hardware Installation Exporting does not remove the data from the device but when the internal memory buffer is full the latest data will start to over write the oldest data Data can be imported from devices and logged to a Database known as Stored and His toric data Databases are managed by a Database Server The data can be retrieved graphed exported to spread sheets e mailed or transferred from devices to other data bases located on Remote Database Servers Using the Comms Server actual current data can be sent from a device straight to the server using Ethernet or RS485 links This actual current data can then be logged to a database and viewed on a graph in real time this is known as Realtime data Different types of data realtime logged and historic data can be displayed next to each other on a split graph screen The comms server is used to configure logging and manage databases and reflect each devices status See Commu nications Server on page 216 Compact flash is not available for the QXe recorder Figure 8 3 Data Logging and Transfer Logged to Database
197. e device while also being a master Mod bus master can also be used in conjunction with OPC to enable the recorder to act as a communication bridge Remote Viewer 3 Extends the user interface of the recorder onto the desktop PC Providing full remote control of the recorder launched from a web browser Email 3 Setup email accounts to send the following When an Alarm is triggered or an Email can be sent as a part of an Event occurring such as Alarms In Out Ack Totaliser Start Stop or Reset Digital Inputs On Off or State change TC Burnout on a specific Analogue Input channel Scheduled Events Once Interval Specific days Month End OPC 8 OPC Server Open Process Control Software application for realtime interfacing between serv ers and clients OPC is a software standard that defines common interfaces for data exchange between devices such as recorders controllers PCL s and Windows based applications Pwd Net Sync 5 Password Network Synchronisation Password can be synchronised over the network a recorder can be designated as a master of a password group and other recorders can be added to that group as slaves the master will ensure all passwords are synchronised with all recorders in its group Extra Pens 4 pens 2 4 extra pens to store and display totalised values results of calculations etc Maximum is up to 16 extra pens for the QX 12 extra pens for the QXe recorders an
198. e server will be added Add databases to this server as above New Database Server Logging Configuration 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 225 226 Communications Server Logging Configuration This screen configures channels for logging from a device to a database It can be accessed in several ways Figure 8 7 Logging Configuration Logging Configuration Port Number Device ID Number Database Configuration Connected Database Servers Database Currently Logging To Initial Database v Channels available to be logged Pen 10 Pen 11 Pen 12 Add All Channels Pen 13 Pen 14 v Pen 15 Channels logging to the selected database Pen 1 Temp Pen 2 Pen 3 Pen 4 Pen 5 Samole lt Summary of all changes Apply OK This example of the logging configuration box was produced by right clicking on a specific recorder Some of the areas have been auto populated 1 Use the Configure Database Logging icon at the top left of the screen and select Con figure Logging from the resulting menu 2 Right click on Communication Ports in the left window and select Configure Logging from the resulting menu 3 Right click on the comms port and select Configure Logging from the resulting menu 4 Right click on the device and select Configure Logging from the resulting menu Any of these will display the Logging Configuration box If this screen is selected from either a comms port or a device then the comms p
199. e top window details of the device s activity is displayed here A device logging to a database will display details in the Database logging tab 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Communications Server Realtime data will display in the Client connections tab The Diagnostics tab can be activat ed by going to Administration Preferences and ticking the Show Diagnostics box this will display properties and vales of a selected device Database Size Management Although there is no fixed maximum size for a recorder database we recommend that they be limited to some practical limit rather than just letting it increase in size unchecked Large databases will impact the performance of your PC the larger the database the slower the performance of your PC will be eventually the PC would stop as the hard drive is filled up Another concern should be the protection of your database and archiving of the data in the event of a hard drive failure Larger databases increase the time and effort required to back up the data and increase the risk of unintended data loss if there is a PC failure and the data is not backed up The PC s performance is dependant on the size of the database and the PC characteristics e g Performance Memory Hard drive space along with how many recorders are connect ed to it An initial recommendation would be that if your process involves archiving to remov able media DVD for example then the Database should be kept to
200. e which scale is required to be displayed ee Charts DPMs and Scales Select which pen is displayed Select and activate which scale is required to be displayed Template If a template is being used it will appear here Select By This gives you the option of selecting Pens or a pre defined Group of pens that will be displayed on the screen Showing Pens Only available if Pens is selected in Select By Select pens from the on screen selection to be displayed on this screen Available pens will be in bold text on the selection screen and pens that are already selected will have a blue edge Group Name only available when Group is selected in Select By Select which group of pens is to be displayed on this screen To assign a pen to a group see Pens Menu on page 62 Orientation Not on the DPM screen Set the orientation to Vertical or Horizontal for Scales and Charts Cycle Scales active with chart and scale combination If ticked the recorder will cycle through each pen in the form of a scale or bar chart depending on which is selected for the Scale Indicator Scale Indicator active with chart and scale combination Select which indicator either bar or pen pointers will indicate on the scale Background Background colour can be set if no template is used Select and choose from the Colour palette Add Screen To add a new screen just select Add Screen and configure as required Delete S
201. ecorder a password is required to enter the menu system and process screens Limited access is available without logging on For ESS recorders only locate the First Time Password System Setup sheet included in with your recorder or see First Time Password System Setup on page 170 All Users When Log On is required the Log On button will appear in the top right of the Main Menu screen The Log On button can be set to switch to auto Log Off at a specified period of time To Log On select the Log On button at the top right of the Main Menu screen Log On Button WA Log Off Button e Log On User is presented with a user name and password entry box First time user login is Admin No password is required Access for the first time user is removed once the password system has been configured Log Off Once the user has logged on the option in the Main Menu will turn to Log Off once selected the user is logged off and returned to the current process screen First Time Log On The first time the system is used a default user name and password is available the user name is Admin and will have no password this is known as the first time user Access to the first time user is removed once the password system has been configured The first time user is reinstated if the password system is reset For more detailed information see Section 5 Password Security on page 169 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08
202. ed a Data Error box will appear saying Data line is invalid This will appear when you select the tick box at the bottom of the screen The error box will indicate which line has the error There may be more than one error in the table if so the data error message box will appear for each error starting from the top line down going to the next as each error is fixed Linearisation Table examples Figure 4 3 shows an example of a set of non linear signal inputs X and the required values in engineering units Y that have been entered into a linearisation table They would pro duce the following curve Figure 4 3 Example of a 0 10V non linear input signal 10 8 y 6 Eng Units 2 0 Signal Input A straight line is drawn between each point as shown by the continuous red line in Figure 4 3 For a more accurate curve as shown by the dotted line blue add more data points into the linearisation table 7 The Linearisation tables that you set up here can then be used in the Analogue In Menu on page 52 If the full input range is greater than the range used in the linearisation tables then the signal will carry on following the slope of the last two inputs For example if we had a 50 to 50V range and just used the 0 to 10V linearisation table then the signal would look like Figure 4 4 If the Analog input has been set to millivolts and that the span is greater or equal to 1000 mV th
203. ed as desired See Script Timers on page 152 Reports Reports can be generated manually or on a periodical basis using event system See Reports Process on page 152 Note on Groups Groups of pens need to be set up to use this feature see Pens Menu on page 62 Max Min Main Menu gt Process gt Max Min Reset Max Min Reset Max or Reset Min values by categories All By Groups of pens or by individual pens Use the View button to just display the Max Min values All Select this to reset all values By Groups If Groups of pens have been set up this can be used to reset the max min values for particular groups of pens To set up Groups see Pens Menu on page 62 By Pen Select this to reset max min values for individual pens Totals Main Menu gt Process gt Totals Select a button to Start Stop Reset and View Totals These can be controlled by the fol lowing categories 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK All Select this to start stop or reset all Totals By Group If Groups of pens have been set up this can be used to start stop or reset particular groups of pens To set up Groups see Pens Menu on page 62 e By Pen Select this to start stop or reset individual pens e View Use the View button to just display the Totals values for each totalising pen Counters Process Main Menu gt Process gt Counters BEA 74i it aes Digital Input Relay Output Finish
204. ed in the Comms Server will use the most recent modbus profile that has been generated when importing data on that PC For existing device connections go to the relevant device and press right mouse button for the context menu Select Edit Device and then press OK on the resulting dialog The updat ed modbus profile will now be in use and this should be evident if you graph the data a cou ple of minutes later give enough time for some data to be logged to the database using the updated modbus profile So in summary when updating an X Series recorder configuration import the setup or pen data that use the new setup into Trend Server software Do this either via USB Compact Flash or a manual FTP operation then go to Comms Server and bring up the Edit Device dialog as described above and press OK For more detailed information on the Modbus Profile tool refer to the Trend Analysis software manual Add a Device via RS485 Setting up the Comms Server for Modbus on RS 485 follows the same procedure but the PCs comm port that the 485 interface is connected to is selected in the Communications Port drop down list Everything else is the same there is no IP address to enter and test should still work the same 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 223 224 Communications Server Figure 8 6 New Device Status Y Communications Server Administration th Database Servers ID No Name Mode 9 Communication Ports 1 Furnace 1 Rea
205. eduled Export ss 114 Screen Activity Alarm Markers o cccccccccccccccccsssscescsssessssessseseeseeees Charts Speeds sssr Deviation Alarm Markers Mark on Chart eccess Pen Pointers ssssiisisisssssssisisssis Screen Markers ou ccccccecccecseeesseeeeee Screen Change Event Effects Screen Configuration ssis Menu B i iseiscdt hie hae Gura Process Screen Overview Screen Designer Screens Screen Menu Bat oeeesseesssrssererrrererererrrerrerse Screen Designer ie Loading a Layout into a Recorder Loading a Template into a Recorder SoftWare smenio aa ei a oie SETON LIST reire a AANER Screen Markers Screen Ment c Calibrate dcscasaiacindiicdieestcccdives Charts nanan TAIS Clean Screen eseese Replay csiniiiiinacausanieaunien Screen List Screen Saver siniosisrieinsiisiriieissa TONCA Tesi erenn n a a 314 Screen Menu BAF o 189 Edit Screen Properties seseeseeieeseeeeeseiesereeree 137 Replay ssscisssintacs stein Screen Saver Brightness Dim Sayer an RY 6 11 hE Script Function Application Examples 280 Script Timers Event Effects oo cccccccccccccsscsscsscssssssescsessssssesseseees Process Menu wu eeccceccccessescessescescesssssssscsscssessseseess Scripts Trigger Events Security Messages n Security Overview Send Recorder Events 7 Chart Controls wo ccccccccccccccccccessssscssssscsscssesseeseees Sensor Compensation Analogue Input
206. een Touch Test Main Menu gt Screen gt Touch Test Use the Touch test feature to see if your touch screen is calibrated correctly Select this but ton and touch the screen using the stylus If the centre of the cursor follows the stylus around the screen then the touch screen is calibrated correctly If the centre of the cursor is not where the stylus is touching the screen then go to the Calibrate button and recalibrate the screen 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Batch Setup Batch Control Main Menu gt Batch Batch is a firmware option which can be activated from Credits on page 107 The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis Batch mode has changed to allow for concurrent batches where each batch is associated with a group so all pens within Group 1 will belong to the batch that is controlled by Group 1 Setting up a batch requires information to identify where the batch starts and stops Batch data can also be paused for viewing and resumed A batch can be aborted at any time if so this will not register as a batch a batch is only complete when it has been stopped Screens can now be set to display groups in this mode only messages associated with that group i e pens within that group or batch messages for that group will be shown on the chart If the groups in Batch Control are greyed out you need to go to the Pens menu and assign individual pens to a group See Pe
207. een in the left window from the top is displayed Database Serv er Local and remote database and devices held on the Local database All Logging config uration for comms logging and logging to a database is set up from the Comms Server Connected databases are displayed with a green icon If the database is in red it is not con nected check the IP Address and Device ID are correct and a protocol has been selected on the device Un tick and then tick the active box on the comms server to restart the data base connection This section looks at the Comms Server s main elements displayed in the Status Screen Database Servers Local and Remote Servers Databases Communication Ports Data base logging and Client connections Remote database servers can be added to the list to enable access to devices held in other databases on a remote database server in another location To connect to a remote data base server the IP address must be known of the PC where the databases server is held Items with a sign signifies there are items listed within Click on the sign to activate expand e Listed under the Database Servers are a list of Servers e Listed under each Server are the Databases e Listed under each Database are the devices EL This is the Database Server icon fal This is the Database icon The bottom window has three actions Client connections Database logging and Diag nostics When a device is selected from th
208. een changed to standalone Are you sure you wish to Could not leave group please try continue again later This warns you you are changing the This may occur if someone is accessing recorder Type in the Group the same group of recorders Slave Master or Stand Alone Pwd NetSync d Pwd NetSync Info E W T m he password system will now rescan the network for available recorders Type Update Successful The password system was successfully This may take up to two minutes synchronised This message will appear when the All recorders in this group have had their recorder is scanning the network passwords synchronised successfully 134 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Settings Main Menu gt Configure gt Settings gt Set Time Set up the Time and Date for the recorder s real time clock Check that the correct Time Zone is set before setting the clock See Localisation on page 106 Date Select each button to set the day month and year This will automatically update and be displayed on the Menu bar at the top of the process screen Time HH MM SS Select each button to set the hours minutes and seconds The hours selection provides a list and the minutes and seconds require a numeric entry This will automatically update and be displayed on the Menu bar at the top of the process screen The recorder uses a 24 hour clock Tick to confirm the setup changes and return to the Settings men
209. electing the box under the Red Green and Blue sliders and the colour will be change accordingly in the New box When the desired shade has been chosen select the tick box to confirm you choice Each new colour will be saved and will appear in the Recent tab 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Save Layout Main Menu gt Configure gt Layout gt Save Layouts can be saved to Compact Flash or USB removable storage media Plug in a remov able storage media device and the corresponding button on the screen will become active select the relevant media button Enter the file name required in the File name box Maximum of 50 characters File format is ay click on the Save button The Compact Flash and the front USB device port are found under the front flap on the re corder There is another USB port at the rear of the recorder The first USB device fitted will be USB1 therefore the second USB device fitted is USB2 Compact Flash not available for the QXe Device Selection k CF Card Free 120 3 Free 200 9 MB MB Size 122 2MB Size 247 2 MB Load Layout Main Menu gt Configure gt Layout gt Load Layouts can be loaded from Compact Flash or USB removable storage media Plug in a re movable storage media device and the corresponding button on the screen will become ac tive Select the relevant media button to display the layout files available to load Select the file and click on the Load button All screens loaded on
210. en keyboard to type in an identifier for the pen Up to 48 characters Description Screen Designer screens only Enter a screen description in this field that will then be displayed on the Screen Designer screen Maths Type Analogue signals may have a mathematical calculation performed on them before they are represented as a pen Basic maths is standard in all recorders Full Maths or Math Scripting are options that must be activated See Options on page 156 Edit Maths Edit the Maths for this particular pen For details see Appendix B Maths Expressions on page 271 Scale Select Scale to go to a sub menu to set up the scale parameters See Scale Menu on page 63 Logging Select Logging to go to a sub menu to set up the logging configuration See Logging Menu on page 64 Alarms Select Alarms to go to a sub menu to set up the alarm profile See Alarms Menu on page 66 Totaliser Select Totaliser to go to a sub menu to set up the totaliser settings See Totaliser Menu on page 68 RAV This will display the Rolling Average for this pen The recorder takes an average of the number of samples entered Enable the RAV function and enter the Number of Samples Max 500 Then enter the Sample Interval or how often a reading is taken in seconds The Prefill will add in samples based on the sample intervals specified and then take an average reading No Prefill will work out the rolling average on t
211. en the linearisation table X values should be specified in Volts 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Figure 4 4 Linearisation table used for part of the range 50 ia las aural Maa lat a as 40 Jo 30 E 20 T 10 m a 4rs Se Y Eng 0 CSURI Sara Units 10 20 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 X Signal Input The last two points are used to follow the slope for the rest of the signal At the bottom of the 0 10V table the last two inputs are X 0 Y 0 and X 2 Y 6 At the top of the 0 10V table the last two points are X 8 Y 9 8 and X 10 Y 10 Figure 4 4 shows these last two inputs at the top and bottom of the 0 10V signal 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 62 Pens Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Pens Select the Pens button to display all the pens available Menu path to current menu x Pen 1 0 00 to 100 00 B Pens 2 Pen 2 50 00 to 500 00 B The Pens screen displays Pens 3 Pens 4 Pens 5 Pens 6 Pen 3 10E9 to 10E22 all the available pens Each pen displays its scale settings y Pen 5 0 00 5000 00 B gt Select a pen number to edit the setup of each pen Pen 6 20 00 200 00 P gt v including the Scale Logging Alarms and x Pen 4 10E1 to 1066 ber ke ae B es Click on individual pen number to set up each pen profile Enabled Toggle On and Off Tag Select and use the on scre
212. enable Time Sync Trigger When recorder receives the Digital Input and there is a state change i e On or OFF then the recorder time will be synchronized to the nearest hour e Digital Input Choice the input pulse through one of the channels supported 1 to 4 Time sync will only happen on the configured channel when digital input is received on that configured channel Once the time synchronization is complete message will be send in the system messages to show time changed on digital input This will notify the user that system time has been synchronized to the nearest hour due to digital input Time synchronisation is at best pre cise to 1 second Time changes eg daylight saving During resetting the time or updating the time change in the recorder the data which gets collected during this interval will be ignored In the case of daylight saving if recorder clock is behind the hour there will be a gap in data collection For example when recorder re ceives the digital input and there is a state change the recorders system clock is showing 11 58 AM i e behind the hour then there will be a gap of 2 minutes in data collection as the time will be synchronized to the nearest hour If recorder clock is ahead of the hour then there will be duplicate data entry For example when recorder receives the digital input and there is a state change the recorders system clock is showing 12 02 PM i e ahead of the hour then there
213. ents OPCAE Max Alarms OPCAE No Alarms Back OPC Status Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnostics gt Comms gt OPC Status of the OPC activity OPC Server Status Tick will show the Server is running OPCDA Min Update Rate Minimum Update Rate Supported for the OPCDAServer in milliseconds OPCDA Rec Conn Recommended Connections for OPCDAServer OPCDA Clients Number of OPCDA Clients Connected OPCDA Max Groups Maximum Number of Groups Supported for the OPCDAServer OPCDA Max Supp Items Maximum Number of Unique Items Supported for the OPCDAServer OPCDA Groups Requested Number of Groups Requested to OPCDAServer OPCDA Items Requested Number of Items Requested to OPCDAServer OPCAE Rec Con Recommended Connections for OPCDAServer OPCAE Clients Number of OPCAE Clients Connected OPCAE Max Alarms Number of Active Alarms Supported in OPCAEServer OPCAE No Alarms Number of Active Alarms Available in OPCAEServer 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 165 SMTP Status Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnostics gt Comms gt SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Displays the Type Time Date and Message details for Email transfers FTP Status Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnostics gt Comms gt FTP File Transfer Protocol Displays the Type Time Date and Message details for FTP trans fers Peers Status Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnostics gt Comms gt Peers Displays all recorders availab
214. epresented by Power x y Returns the value of x raised to the power y Reciprocal recip x Returns the reciprocal of x i e 1 x Root root x y Returns the y root of x Round round x Rounds x to the nearest whole number Set clear a digital output SETD x y This feature allows a digital output to be set or cleared from a script using the function SETD x y where x is the digital output 1 to 49 where 49 is the power relay and y is the value 1 to set or 0 to clear The function will return the value set if successful if not successful it will return 1 0 this would be caused by trying to set and digital input rather then output Set User variable UVSET x y Returns the result of x the user variable and y the value Sin sin x Returns the SIN of x SinH sinh x Returns the Hyperbolic SIN of x Square Root sqrt x Returns the Square Root of x Square sq x Returns the square of x i e x multiply by x Subtract Returns the result of the subtraction Tan tan x Returns the TANGENT of x TanH tanh x Returns the Hyperbolic TANGENT of x Trigger an Event TRIGE x This will trigger Event x 1 to 20 TRIGE x will return 1 when the event is fired otherwise it will return 0 Functions use radians 27 radians 360 degrees Event triggering from scripts This feature allows any enabled event with an enabled effect does not have to have any causes enabled to be triggered from within the scripting system using the
215. eriodical basis using event system to show dai ly weeks monthly totals max mins averages etc the reports can be printed e mailed as attachments or exported to external media The reports will be in RTF format for use in MS Word or other compatible word processors Before a report can be run the report details must be entered in Reports menu on page 117 To trigger a report using the event system see Event Effects on page 89 iZ Reports i 2 Run View Archive Reset All e Run This will list the reports that are available Before a report can be run the report details must be entered in Reports menu on page 117 Once a report in selected from the list then report is immediately created 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK e View Archive This will produce an archive list of all reports that have been run Select a report on the screen and press the display button From this screen you have the option to Print or Export the report The printer settings must be configured in Printer Menu on page 110 To export the report to a USB key or Compact flash card ensure the media is fitted to the recorder and there is enough memory available mark1_Sat May 26 2007 15 18 00 Pen Overview 5 0571 18 333 Reset All This action will reset all hourly daily weekly and monthly max mins totals and averages System max mins and totals shall remain unaffected A warning dialog will appear to ask if you
216. es Overview 31 USCS ar Aaa Sateen sth eat ees ene 13 Fuzzy Logging Appendix Foi 293 G General Batch Properties oe 107 General Menu Batch Meni sersem Error Alert Factory Groups Identity oe PE Printer Menu sessarsesnmorntenaneconnsa Getting connected IP Address o c sccccss00 208 Group Batch s sssssssss1ssss1sssorrssorrsoorssorrsseeess 109 GGTOUPS parina E ERE A EA 111 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK H Hardware Options Overview cccsscsssssesesee 37 Hardware Status DiaQmOStics spinenie crnan e Hazardous Voltage Help Files eecccsssscsssssesseeeeseees High and Low Alarms os Hubs OF Switches s I IP Address osoasa IP Address Troubleshooting Identity ahctioicaeseiscenea tu emnteneanaaaaonie Installation voceeeececcccseescsesesstesseesessseeseesseenes 24V DC Input wee Alarm Relay Cards ou Analogue Input Card oi Analogue Output Card Comms Connections essees Digital IO Cards wee Electrical Installation 000 Environment and Location Instructions woe eee cece Mechanical Installation Panel cut out size wee Pulse Input Card wee sae SPCO Relay uistatran uncenusaemacsiies cc Transmitter Power Supply Card vist Installation Category sssri Internet Security Settings se J Jump feature sssri 148 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK L LED Flash Codes cnisccsssnssssssnsssessisnesreesensisresenaeen 267 PAT U
217. es that the user must know and record which flow meter is outputting the highest flow at any particular time This can of course be derived from the four lots of recorded data but not only is this extra analysis later but a real time display is required The application is easily solved by using the Script Function in the recorder represented in pseudo code the script is as follows If input 1 is bigger than all the others then make the global variable 1 equal to channel 1 and display and record input 1 If input 2 is bigger than all the others then make the global variable 1 equal to channel 2 and display and record input 2 If input 3 is bigger than all the others then make the global variable 1 equal to channel 3 and display and record input 3 If none of the above are correct then Input 4 must be the highest so make the global variable 1 equal to channel 4 and display and record input 4 Display the global variable 1 on another pen to show which channel is biggest at any given time Pen 5 is chosen to record the highest channel input and channel 6 is chosen to record which input is the highest ol The greater than gt is used the AND amp amp Boolean is also used and the global variable GLBV1 is used to hold the current highest channel number Converting this to an actual script gives the following If A1 gt A2 amp amp A1 gt A3 amp amp A1 gt A4 This tests if flow meter 1 is more th
218. eseseeseeeeaes 287 External Input Reference cccccccccccsssessessessessenscneesceseeseeseeseesecsecseeseesecsececneeneeneenees 288 Appendix D Alarms csiccvensisssnsistcsstnccacansasnastancsanacanteisicancsevensednatenancdsniadadenlanan 289 Alarms Menu sssirenseninsisrainn asresten seisine seqeasvaysssdesvessessessessessee ses 289 Appendix E Ethernet wccccsssiscstsccecccecestesieseneceresnsawsdssesseniwewevessancnnteccacenecanesin 291 Appendix F Fuzzy Logging nidssisesiitinsncdsccccincesdancdcsssendaanseueisuancsadsncdsseenatiasasin 293 Appendix G F sub zero Sterilisation cseecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 297 The sienificance of FO ninan E REE OET OEE E E 297 Appendix H Calibration civcsieciiteessceresecnsesevncaterascassensanteseenssedsandnnudsessenncanenes 299 AI Calibration and CJC Calibration sesesesesosoeeeoesosesesoesesesososoeossoseceeoesesecosoe 299 Sensor Compensation s sssssssssssssssssssossssossssssossosssosss ssssssssssosssssssosessssssssssssss 299 Appendix l Battery Data saannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 301 Location Processor Board essessssessssecseseesoseosoeoossssessosssosssessososososesssoessssocssso 301 Safety Guideline Sac nisn E E REER E O 301 Appendix J Function Codes and Memory Maps cccsssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 303 Modbus Memory Map Supplement s essesesesosoeesossosesoeoesesesosoeseoesosecesorsesecesoe 303 TOUAUISCL S ssssccssssis
219. ess known as batch processing used in thermal treatment sterilisation food processing and chemical reactions Concurrent batch mode is now available where each batch is associated to a group of pens Other features include Batch logging control Automated batch counters and Event driven batch control Batches are controlled with command lines entered into the recorder these include Start Stop Pause Resume and Abort batch Batch Markers are placed on to the recorder s chart and entered into the messages system for every batch command applied Counters Up to 16 User Counters are available and can be used as a part of the Events system User Counters can be set up as a Cause or an Effect of an Event A Counter Effect can be used to count an occurrence or to reset different types of counters depending on hardware avail ability Other counters available are Alarm Event Digital Input Relay Output and Pulse counters Other Standard features CE Mark Conformity with 73 23 EEC Low Voltage and 89 336 EEC EMC Directive Soft Alarms 6 software alarms per pen are easily set up to display and record selected out of limit conditions These can be tied to the relay or digital outputs to activate the user s external equipment Common Relay Output A separate relay output at the rear of the unit can be set up as an alarm output Not available for the QXe recorder Communications the recorder supports FTP Modbus TCP IP master
220. essages csiiscscesssisssececussessespeasseseccteseeersstnees Messages Screen printing Modbus x sicsscestsssssssssasibessnssibtncansaissnswes Modbus Capabilities 312 Modbus Function Codes escccccssssccssssssssvsssesves 305 Modbus Status ss 164 Modbus profile tool data update 223 Modbus COMMS oo 206 Mounting and Viewing Angles sss 6 N Network Settings Comms Server o cececcecceecccscssssessessssssssssssscssseseeseees 217 O OPC Clients caccescccsssessssessssessssessssessssessssessssessssesssnes OPC Interface disciacta a cesssissensto see eeatanesies OPC Status enen Operating Temperature Options unssin OVErVIEW sxccisschiicsitaciinia n e Bae Mite 222 2225 a nate riiens tans essa ieee Comms Data Storage Display ss Events ooeeeccccccccscsseseeseteeseees Functions and Features Options Hardware QX Rear Connections QX Standard Screens QXe Rear Connections QXe Standard Screens Recorder Functionality Remote Control Viewer SX Rear Connections SX Standard Screens SECUN eni a ERRE S USB Deyic s srnceisisiocoeimineaui oiai P PC Ethernet Connections sss 207 PWD NERS VIC cciccsesisunisvrnsisosstistvdansitiatelesanivobioh ous Panel Mounting 0 0 0 Panel cut out size Password Net Sync Conf SUration i csissscnenissansidassenstsaonvetirns 132 RUES e E seers 130 Password Network Synchronisation
221. et the data or Cancel to ignore and return to the Factory menu Reset All This will remove the current setup current layouts and chart and log data from the recorder and return to the default setup When you select this button the Reset All Warning box will appear with a message This will reset all data including setups layouts and chart and log data This is irreversible and will restart the recorder Are you sure you wish to continue Select OK to Reset All or Cancel to ignore and return to the Factory menu Localisation Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Factory gt Localisation Set up the recorder for native language use and global settings including e Language Select native language menu prompts from list For French and German the corresponding keyboard layout will be selected e Help Language Select native language for Help Files currently English only availa ble e Time Zone Select the corresponding time zone from the drop down list e Daylight Saving Toggle On or Off to activate daylight saving if applicable When the time zone is selected and daylight saving is active the recorder will change the daylight saving hour automatically The date this occurs depends on the time zone selected Some time zones do not have daylight saving Data being recorded will be affected either with a 1 hour gap of data or a 1 hour overlap of data e Temp Units Select the Temperat
222. ets on opposite sides of the unit either top and bottom or left and right slots NEMA 4X rated recorders require all four mounting brackets to be fitted Figure 2 5 QXe recorder dimensions 10 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Mechanical Installation Panel Mounting Clamp Installation The QX SX and the QXe recorders slide into the panel cut out and are held in place by two or four panel clamps The panel clamps should be fitted on diagonally opposite sides of the unit and tightened against the rear of the panel using two fixing screws The mounting clamp assembly and fitting instructions differ slightly for the two recorders QX and QXe 1 Insert the panel gasket onto the recorder so it goes between the back of the recorder bezel and the panel From the front panel place unit in the panel and push through the panel 2 To loosen each clamp unscrew the long screw to accommodate the panel thickness 3 From behind the panel the orientation of the clamp should be with the screw head towards the rear of the unit See Figure 2 1 on page 6 4 Take the first clamp and locate the two lugs on the clamp into the slots on the unit See Figure 2 1 on page 6 5 Take the second clamp and do the same but in the diagonal position to the opposite side See Figure 2 1 on page 6 6 Tighten the screw using a flat blade screwdriver and the clamp will secure against the panel A CAUTION CONTROL UNIT DAMAGE Do not over tighten mounting c
223. ever value is entered in Increment By Reset will restart the counter to whatever number is entered in Reset To ee Sub Type only available when Reset is selected as the Event Action Select to reset User Pulse Events Digital Inputs Relay Outputs or Alarm counters Selecting any of these Sub Types will activate the corresponding menu item s so you can then specify the number of the Sub Type to be reset To view counters using a maths equation see Maths Variable Table on page 272 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 93 ee oe oe User Counters only available when Sub Type is set to User Select the User Counter number to be used from the available list Counters will only be available if they have first been set up in the User Counters Menu Increment By only available when Increment is selected as the Event Action Enter the number at which you want the counter to increment by when the event cause is triggered Reset To only available when Reset is selected as the Event Action and Sub Type is set to User Enter the number at which you want the counter to reset to when the event cause is triggered e Max Mins Reset Use this as an effect of an event to reset all Max Min values e Chart Control The chart activity can be controlled as an effect of an event The chart control options are Pause Stop Resume Clear and Prefill oe gt gt Enabled Type Chart Control CO
224. ew password Max 12 previous passwords 0 for disabled Cannot be disabled for ESS recorders e Username Max Set the maximum amount of characters that can be used for the User name login 1 to 20 characters 4 to 20 for ESS recorders e Password Max Set the maximum amount of characters that can be used for the Pass word login 1 to 20 characters 6 to 20 for ESS recorders 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 127 128 e Username Min Set the minimum amount of characters that can be used for the User name login 1 to 20 character and 0 will disable 4 to 20 characters and no disable for ESS recorders e Password Min Set the minimum amount of characters that can be used for the Pass word login 1 to 20 characters 0 will disable 6 to 20 characters and no disable for ESS recorders e Min Alpha Set the minimum amount of alpha characters to be used in the Password 0 to 20 characters e Min Symbol Set the minimum amount of symbol characters to be used in the Pass word 0 to 20 characters Min Numeric Set the minimum amount of numeric characters to be used in the Pass word 0 to 20 characters e Pass Retries Set how many times the incorrect password can be entered before the user account is locked out 1 to 10 retries O will disable 1 to 6 retries and no disable for ESS recorders e Pass Expiry Set how many days before the current passwords will expire 1 to 365 days and 0 will disable For ESS recorders 1
225. f your flow meter is in units hour the unit will DIVIDE by the time factor in this case 3600 so every 1 second 1 3600th of the unit is added Unit Factor Normal Totaliser only The Totaliser adds the engineering unit from the instrument onto the total after the time factor is applied You then need to Divide by the unit factor For example If your flow meter is in litres time and you want to Totalise in litres there 1 litres in 1 litre so your unit factor would be 1 so every 1 second 1 1 unit is added If your flow meter is in litres time and you want to Totalise in Cubic meters there are 1000 litres in 1 cubic meter so your unit factor would be 1000 so every 1 second 1 1000th of a unit is added No Backflow Normal Totaliser only If the flow reading should go into a negative value eg The flow meter has been switched off and No Backflow is inactive the totaliser will subtract from the total value When No Backflow is active any negative values are ignored and the total value is held while the flow meter is off until the backflow level is exceeded e Backflow Level Only active when No Backflow is set Set the level at which totalising will stop if the signal flow goes below this limit and if the No Backflow option is active e Restrict Range Normal Totaliser only Toggles On and Off When active the totaliser restarts at Min range once it reaches Max range e Min Range Normal Totaliser onl
226. failure contact your nearest Service Department or an author ised agent to arrange for the return of the unit for repair Cleaning Instructions The recorder s touch screen can be temporarily disabled for cleaning see Clean Screen on page 140 Cleaning the unit should be done with a soft lint cloth and warm soapy water or screen cleaner recommended for use on a PC Solvents and prolonged exposure to detergents can cause damage to the front panel It is recommended that any cloth used for cleaning is damp but NOT wet to avoid water collecting in the unit For Nema 4X IP66 rated recorders option refer to the Nema 4X standards Backlights 1 MTTF Mean Time To Fail is defined as the time at which 50 of a batch of backlights remain in excess of half their original brightness i e a display has a greater than 50 chance of being half its original brightness when used at 100 after 55 000 hrs for the QX Maximum luminosity 400 cd m2 86 000hr if used at 80 43 000 hrs for the SX Maximum luminosity 400 cd m2 67 000hr if used at 80 40 000 hrs for the QXe Maximum luminosity 450 cd m2 62 500hr if used at 80 For this recorder the backlight cannot be changed separately so the display has to be replaced Reducing the brightness can significantly improve the life of the backlight 2 At extended temperatures these times are reduced 3 The backlight is a consumable item and will NOT last forever 4 A mainten
227. false result from testing if one variable is less than or equal to another NOT Returns true if the result is 0 otherwise returns false 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 277 Full Maths amp Script Processing Table 14 6 Boolean Operators Syntax Description Not equal to l Returns a true or false result from testing if two variables are not equal to each other e g IF A1 GLBV1 OR II Returns a true or false result from testing if one or other or both tests are true e g IF A1 GLBV1 A2 GLBV2 XOR Returns a true or false result from testing if one or other but not both tests are true e g IF A1 GLBV1 A2 GLBV2 Functions for Scripts Scripting is not available on the QXe Scripts evaluate at whatever the Analogue sample rate is set to There is 500 character limit for scripting Table 14 7 Functions for Scripts Syntax Description Else else Steps into brackets to run Must always finish with a return else return y Elseif elseif x Carries out a conditional test and if true steps into brackets to run Must always finish with a return elseif x gt 4 return y First run FIRSTRUN Returns true if the script is being run for the first time otherwise returns false If if x Carries out a conditional test and if true steps into brackets to run If false steps to next test without operating the contents of the bra
228. faults to 502 When the setup is complete go back to the TCP IP menu and complete the Comms setup When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Network Admin Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Comms gt Network Admin This must be set up to ensure network printing can be performed and emailing made easier without being prompted for this information each time you want to print or email This infor mation will remain after a firmware upgrade Network Admin is required for printers on a network and shared or work group printers Shared or work group printers must contain the correct file path see Printer Menu on page 110 Username 1500 Password Soa Domain loc 5 e Username Enter your network Logon username e Password Enter you network password For a local printer connected directly to the recorder via USB no domain is required Ensure the printer name is set to the default LPT1 see Printer Menu on page 110 e Domain For network printers enter your network domain No domain is required for Local printers connected directly to the recorder via USB If in doubt contact your IT Administrator for advice on entering Network Admin require ments Comms Services Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Comms gt C
229. following function TRIGE x where x is the event 1 to 20 Once an event is triggered using scripting the event is locked and cannot be triggered again from scripts until the lock is cleared using the clear event function CLRE x where x is the event number 1 to 20 This prevent successive exe cutions re triggering the same event As a further measure to avoid the system being over loaded by events from within the script system each time an event is triggered from within a script it will apply a 1 second automatic lock preventing the same event from being trig gered more then once a second irrispective of the CLRE x being called for that event 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 275 Full Maths amp Script Processing Damping examples Example 1 if P1 was measuring degrees C the expression P1 damp A1 P1 3 will damp the signal with changes up to 3 degrees C any change over 3 degrees between readings will be damped but by a small amount Example 2 P5 damp A2 P5 A3 will damp the A2 input up to a level determined by input A3 note the reference parameter P5 is always the same as the pen it is being used in this should always be the case Table 14 3 Compare amp Convert Syntax Description RHc rhc x y Returns Relative Humidity with y as the dry bulb temperature in degrees C and x the wet bulb tem perature in degrees C RHf rhf x y Returns Relative
230. from 1 to 3600 1 hour Select Delayed Event and select the event s this will apply to Enter the time delay 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Script Timers Script timers provide 20 independent timers to be used as desired pre viously control and access of script timers was limited to maths functions for use in script but this has now been extended allowing the timers to be controlled using the event system allowing them to be stopped started and reset Script timers can also be viewed in Script Timers on page 152 Access to timers via the Maths scripting feature is still available see Table 14 4 on page 276 e Play Sound Sound effects can be used to alert the user that an event effect has occurred Set the Sub Type to Start to reveal two more menu options Sound name and Play Mode The user can pick from a list of 20 different sounds these can be configured to play a single time or repeat continuously Please be aware that continuous mode will repeat continuously until a corresponding stop event is triggered for that sound Also like ring tones the sounds themselves can be replaced on the recorder with custom sounds To update the sounds see Update Sounds on page 135 e Display Alert Display alert as an event effect this feature is available from within the event system where the Alert Display can be used as an event effect to display a preset or user defined marker Select Message Type as Preset to display a
231. from another recorder via Compact Flash or USB or Screen Design er will over write the existing screens on the recorder The Compact Flash and the front USB device port are found under the front flap on the re corder There is another USB port at the rear of the recorder The first USB device fitted will be USB1 therefore the second USB device fitted is USB2 See Storage Media Format on page 145 for formatting information of Compact Flash cards and USB keys Compact Flash not available for the QXe recorder When loading layouts from Screen Designer see Loading a Layout into a Recorder on page 199 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 125 Passwords Main Menu gt Configure gt Passwords gt The Password system manages the security within the recorder menu system It allows re stricted access within the recorder providing password protection at different levels If your recorder has ESS Extended Security System enabled the password system cannot be disabled An Administrator should be nominated to have control of the password system fae Passwords A EN Change Pwds Pwd NetSync User Administration Levels First Time Login The First Time Login only relates to ESS Extended Security System purchased with the recorder Non ESS user For users without ESS once you enable the password you can add a user at adminis trator level and finish apply etc Then go into the menu system
232. g Average example Rolling Average of input signal Pen 11 Input signal Pen 67 Damping on input signal Pen 10 Pen 11 26 4373 Note the Damping Pen 10 has been offset for this example to be able to see the damping effect clearly Linearisation Tables Ohms Volts and Amps only Select a table from the drop down list if required See Linearisation Tables on page 59 e Use Pen Scale Toggle On and Off this is enabled by default Analogue defaults to the corresponding Pen eg A1 will default to Pen 1 If you change A1 to display another pen scale eg Pen 3 you must go into Pen 3 and change the maths to A1 This will ensure that Pen Scale 3 will display A1 input With this enabled the Engineering zero and span is the same as the pen scale Disable this and the Engineering zero and span will not reflect the pen scale When disabled see Eng Span amp Eng Zero bullet points below This is not available when using Linearisation Tables 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 53 54 Units Ohms Volts and Amps only This is the Units of Measurement for each input Select and enter a value Max 13 characters For Thermocouple and Resistance Ther mometer units see Localisation on page 106 Label Select and enter a identification label for the input Select and enter a label Max 15 characters SQRT Extract Ohms Volts and Amps only Toggle On and Off The Square root extraction in the analogue input
233. g Method Sample Average Min Max can be set independently per pen Logging Types Continuous Fuzzy Logging Rate QX SX 20 msec to 60 hours per pen Xe100 msec to 60 hours per pen Fuzzy Logging A secure data storage technique which delivers data compression ratio of 100 1 or more self teaching storing the data at a variable rate to match the process Specification Physical Parameters Enclosure Bezel Zinc plated steel case with high impact resistant polycarbonate bezel scratch resistant lens Pol yethylene Terephthalate NEMA 3 IP54 protection rating standard with NEMA 4X IP66 Front face only protection rating as an option Mounting Panel Unlimited mounting angle For the best view of the display the viewing angle should not exceed QX 55 from the left or right 40 looking down and 50 looking up at the recorder display SX 70 from the left or right 45 looking down and 55 looking up at the recorder display QXe 45 from the left or right 10 looking down and 30 looking up at the recorder display Mounting adjustable for panel thickness of 2mm to 20mm Adapter kits available for covering existing panel cutouts Dimensions QX QXe Recorder W 144mm 5 67 H 144mm 5 67 D 200mm 7 87 Additional 830mm 3 15 clearance recommended for a straight type power cable and signal connectors Cutout 138 x 138mm 5 43 x 5 43 SX Recorder W 288mm 11
234. g achannel selected as a Pulse input set up an extra pen with a Maths func tion of LPULn in Edit Maths in the Pens menu For more information see Appendix B Maths Expressions on page 271 For connection details see For connection details See Alarm Relay Channel Numbers on page 26 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Menu path to current menu Digital I O 1 D1 Pulse Input Hz te m The Digital IO screen Digtal JO2 D2 Input displays all the available channels that can be set Digital 1 0 3 D3 Pulse Input Hz p a up to be digital inputs or outputs Digital I O 4 D4 Input Each channel displays Digital 1 0 5 DS Output Relay 24W its individual settings Digital 1 0 6 D6 Output Relay 244 eer Aca igital I y Output Relay 24V gt v channel to edit the con figuration of each input ga Pea P Finish ad or output For all cards select an Alarm Digital to display the configuration menu Each Alarm Digital has a list of menu items to be configured Enabled Toggle On and Off Digital Type Set to Output Relay contact Power for the Alarm Relay cards Toggle between Input and Output or Pulse Input for the Digital IO card On the 4 Relay Alarm card only output type is available Channels 1 to 6 on the 8 Alarm Relay card are out puts channels 7 amp 8 can be either inputs or outputs Note Pulse Input only available on channels 1 to 4 for slot G 17 to 20 for slot H and 33 t
235. ge in flow meter 3 causes problems The user needs to monitor the two inputs and count the number of times flow meter 3 reading exceeds that of flow meter 2 The code consists of the two flow meter readings and a change counter that totals the number of times that flow 3 exceeds that of flow 2 The pseudo code is written as If flow meter 3 has a larger reading than flow meter 2 check to ensure that it was already greater than meter 2 if it was return the latest change count value If it was not greater than meter 3 last time set a flag to indicate a change and increment the change counter by 1 then return the latest change counter If flow meter 3 is less than 2 simply return the change count value with no increment Pen 7 is used to implement this script and is implemented as follows 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 281 Full Maths amp Script Processing if A38 gt A2 Tests if A3 is bigger than A2 if BLKV1 1 If it was then tests if A3 was bigger than A2 last time period return BLKV2 If it was return with the current change counter else If not then BLKV1 1 Set flag to show that A3 has just exceeded A2 BLKV2 BLKV2 1 Increment the change counter by 1 Return BLKV2 Return the new change counter total else If A3 is not bigger than A2 BLKV1 0 Set flag to show A2 is bigger than A3 this time Return BLKV2 Return current change counter With script above BLKV all Variables are used to maintain values I
236. ged off and returned to the current process screen User Log in Log Out Method Users can log in and out of the system or web page easily using the touch screen or an at tached keyboard Users and Groups Number of Users The system will support up to 50 users Multiple Log On s Users are allowed to log on to the system more then once allowing the same user to log on from different areas e g via the user interface and via web browser at the same time User Name Each user must have a user name this is a maximum of 20 characters in length and cannot be duplicated Numeric characters and symbols can be used in the user name but no spac es User Group Each user can be allocated to a group these are defined as follows Administrator Administrator has access to everything and it is possible to have more than one user at the administrator level The Administrator will have unlimited access to the system and provide the ability to setup other users With the exception of Administrator who has access to everything the other 4 groups per mission areas can be configured users can then be allocated to a level and they will inherit those permissions 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 169 Permissions Permissions may also be customised for an individual user their permissions can be changed to become a customised user However for global access restrictions the user must be allocated a security level of Engineer Supervisor
237. gital Input Output optional 8 I O or 16 I O all channels may be selected freely as either digital inputs or outputs The Digital I O card also has 4 channels that can be set as pulse inputs channels 1 to 4 The operating frequency for pulse inputs on the Digital I O card is 1kHz max Input Low lt 1V High gt 4 5V to lt 10V DC 9V to 20V p p AC or Volt free input Low short circuit High open circuit 16 I O not available for the Q Xe 4 relay outputs all four channels are relay outputs only 8 relays 2 DI card two outputs can be configured for use as digital inputs A digital input is provided by a volt free contact between the normally open NO and the common C terminals of an output relay If the 2 Digital inputs are used only 6 relay outputs are available Closed lt 500 ohms Open gt 300 kohms Transmitter Power optional QX has 200mA 24VDC 3VDC SX has 1 Amp 24VDC 3VDC QXe is available with 130mA 24VDC TXP as an option on the Comms card Agency Approval optional CSA Optional CSA22 2 No 1010 1 2004 Certificate Number 211230 UL Optional ANSI UL61010 1 2004 File 201698 FM Class 1 Division 2 optional FM not available for the Q Xe Extended Security System ESS optional Provides full support for 21 CFR Part 11 Includes features for entry of unique User ID s and associated passwords timeout on inactivity 1 to 10 min password expiration 1 to 365 days up to 50 users pass wo
238. gned 16 bit int unsigned 16 bit int or IEEE float X Series devices use IEEE float Start Addr This is the register address number to start the transaction from No Of Items Enter the number of items from the start address that are included in the transaction For example displayed here will be 10 SCV 1 1 1 1 1 10 This means the transaction will take 10 items from the start address with a Serial Comms variable of Slave 1 Transaction 1 Register 1 to Slave 1 Transaction 1 Register 10 76 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Enabled Friendly Name Slave Device i D Enabled Comms 5 ODBUS Y master Ysiave1 4 Port RS 485 Protocol Modbus Transaction 1 Inii gt v 3 Each Master device can have up to 32 slaves and each slave can perform up to 8 transactions Direction In Command Coil Status 1 Data Type short Start Addr 1 i No Of Items 10 SC 1 1 10 e Je a A Slave e Enabled Toggle On to make this recorder a Slave Device e Port Select this for a list of available ports either Ethernet or RS485 For port configu ration see Ports on page 72 e Protocol Select this for a list of available protocols Modbus or Modbus X Modbus and Modbus X can both use Ethernet or RS485 Ports Protocols define the format in which the data is transferred from the recorder to a PC or transfe
239. go back to the Pen menu and complete the pen setup Sterilisation Specification for Sterilisation The definition Fo Po is the sterilisation pasteurisation time in minutes required to destroy a stated number of organisms with a known z at temperature T For example F18 250 represents the time in minutes required to destroy a stated number of organisms at a temperature of 250F 121 11C with az 18 degrees F F values are used to compare the sterilizing values of different processes however F values cannot be com pared unless the z values are the same When temperature is not specified for example F 8 6 it is understood that the temperature is 250F 121 11C the subscript O as in the term Fo 7 4 is used to indicate that the z 18 degrees F and the temperature is 250F 121 110 See Appendix G F sub zero Sterilisation on page 297 Displaying Totals Totals can be displayed by setting up a separate pen to display the totalised value Totals are best displayed in a DPM screen If you use a separate pen to display a total be aware that if the total is stopped the pause symbol will not appear as it does for a totaliser pen First select a pen you are going to use to display the total of another pen Extra pens are available as a Firmware option see Credits on page 101 For this example this will be Pen 4 To Start Stop Reset and View totals see Totals on page 150 In the pens menu for the totalising pen Pe
240. h the newest The longest pen is the pen that will take the longest amount of time to fill it s part of the log mem ory before it starts recycling The recorder will where possible balance the times so the shortest and longest pens fill the log memory at approximately the same time Depending on the different log rates the allocation of memory will vary per pen When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu NOTICE Because pens only begin to use extra memory when it is required there will be some delay in how quickly other screens update the memory allocation information Eg the Recording screen will adjust Export Required In time depending on chart speeds pens rate and how far the slider is moved 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Storage Alarm Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt Edit Recording gt Storage Alarm The storage alarm function is linked to the Error Alert system when there is a requirement for a time period to be set to alert the user before the storage media is full e Internal memory Set the amount of time before the internal memory becomes full and data is lost and for the Error Alert Message to display on the screen Enter a time period of between 0 5 and 48 hours Export media Set the amount of time before the data being exported to a media becomes full and data is lost for t
241. hat can be customised to suit This is set out in Level Permissions on page 173 Policy Main Menu gt Configure gt Passwords gt User Admin gt Policy At the top of the Policy menu are four levels to be assigned these are the permission levels that will allow access to specific areas of the recorder menu system The names of these levels can be edited here e Pwds Enable Tick to enable the password menu e Level 0 Name Administrator Highest permission level e Level 1 Name Engineer Second highest permission level e Level 2 Name Supervisor Third highest permission level e Level 3 Name Technician Fourth highest permission level e Level 4 Name Operator Fifth highest permission level Unrestrict allows the Administrator to de restrict access to certain areas so menus will be available even without logging in e Menu Timeout Enable Tick to activate the timeout facility to be enabled on the menus This is always enabled for ESS Menu Timeout Set a specific time period of inactivity in a password protected area before logging out 20 to 3600 seconds e Web Timeout Enable Tick to activate the timeout facility to be enabled on the web page This is always enabled for ESS e Web Timeout Set a specific time period of inactivity in the web page before logging out Enter the time in seconds 20 to 3600 seconds Old Passwords Select how many previously used passwords are locked from use as a n
242. have a unique ID for each device in the network Additional 100mm and 180mm recorders using the Trendbus protocol could be supported on the network as long as their device IDs remain unique With Modbus connection anywhere between 24 and 64 devices are supported at a rate of 1 reading per second again depending on the complexity of the device configurations As the rate is decreased the number of devices supported increases 5 The maximum number of pens supported at once per second for a given device is 32 Up to 64 pens supported at once every 5 seconds Then all 96 pens at once every 10 seconds for the SX recorder speed and reliability could impact performance 232 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK OPC Interface Open Process Control OPC Interface Open Process Control OPC Server connection must be enabled in the recorder by selecting the OPC option in Credits on page 101 Many types of OPC Server software packages are available and are com patible with the recorders OPC server supports OPC DA version 3 and OPC AE Alarm and Events Use the name of the OPC server as it appears in the client software OPC limitations Technically speaking there are no restrictions on the number of clients that can connect to OPC DA or OPC A amp E servers Some software limits are in place OPC DA Server Maximum number of groups that can be added per client is 3 Maximum number of unique items that a OPC DA server supports is 100 I e
243. he cable screen and the recorder case Signal Wiring A WARNING ENSURE SAFETY EARTH CONNECTION Always ensure the unit is connected to safety earth when connecting to an AC or DC supply Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury Your recorder is intended for panel mount use and only the front face is intended to be exposed to the operator Disconnection from the supply MUST be made possible by means of a switch circuit breaker or other means of supply isolation The disconnection device must be included in the panel installation clearly marked in close proximity to the recorder and within easy reach of the operator The protective earth terminal must remain connected even if the recorder is isolated from the mains supply if any of the analogue or relay terminals are connected to hazardous voltage 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 13 Electrical Installation A CAUTION UNIT DAMAGE CONTROL To protect against component failures the user should fit an external fuse for the DC input power supply The value should be 4A time delay high breaking capacity mini mum 60Vdc rated Failure to comply with these instructions may result in product damage A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES When using the recorder as portable equipment the optional rear cover must be fitted when hazardous voltages are connected Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious in
244. he Error Alert Message to display on the screen Enter a time period of between 0 5 and 48 hours e FTP Memory Set the amount of time before the FTP memory becomes full and data is lost for the Error Alert Message to display on the screen Enter a time period of between 0 5 and 48 hours When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Reports menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt Reports Reports can be generated manually or on a periodic basis using the event system to show daily weekly monthly totals max mins averages etc the reports can be printed e mailed as attachments or exported to the external media The reports will be in RTF format for use in MS Word or other compatible word processors Before a report can be run the report menu must be configured In the Reports Menu select the first or next available Report Edit Setup fet econo A Report 2 oven 2 batch report Report 3 X Report 3 X Report 4 Report 4 Enabled a Name group 1 report Style Normal Selection Type Pen Group Group Group 1 Curr Pen Yalue Included v a ho a a Enabled Set to a tick to enable Name Enter an identifiable name of your report 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 117 118 Style Select Batch for running reports on current batches Select
245. he Recorder ID and Serial Number will be transferred if the device is not detected an extra device will appear in the database containing the Re altime data Depending on the type of network being used it maybe advisable not to use Modbus comms and FTP in the same time to the same PC This may cause the FTP transfer to time out Only data can be sent via Modbus No recorder setups or events are sent for realtime and logged data However a Modbus interface such as Modscan 32 can be set up as Modbus master and used to transmit Totals Digital Input Digital Output a Comms Variable CV or Messages to the recorder Modbus X Modbus X protocol differs from standard Modbus by the reversed byte order of the floating point number The Comms Server provides an integrated facility for testing a device to help decide which modbus protocol variant to use See Edit a Device on page 224 Modbus Mapping and Function Codes see Appendix J Function Codes and Memory Maps on page 303 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Hardware Installation Device and PC Ethernet connections Connect an Ethernet cable from the Ethernet port on the back of the device to the Ethernet hub Connect another Ethernet cable from the Ethernet port on the PC to the Ethernet hub Hubs or Switches Hubs and Switches come in all different shapes and sizes Both are used as a common connection point for devices in a network They are commonly used to con
246. he right will display details of any item selected in the left window Depending on what has been selected the right window will split in two to give logging information Items listed in the left window that have a sign against them contain other items click on the sign to reveal the list of items contained within The sign will change to a sign when all the items are displayed To close the list click on the sign Comms Server Toolbar Administration The Administration button appears in the top left of the comms server it contains Shutdown Server From here the comms server can be shut down this will disconnect the comms server it will also shutdown the database servers at the same time Preferences The General Settings tab has an option to minimise the Server when it is opened The Diagnostics option that will produce an additional tab to the bottom window this will display properties and values of a selected device Send Recorder Events is an option that needs to be enabled to allow event data to be exported when the export data function is performed and this will also allow event chart controls to be enabled The Clear Setup Cache button will remove all setup files Network Settings is for PC s with more than one network card fitted to access devices on other networks The network cards are displayed here for selection If the Use NIC Default IP Address Selection is ticked then the first network card that was
247. he samples as they occur See Figure 4 2 Effects of Damping and Rolling Average example on page 53 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Group This pen can be allocated to a Group with other pens to display information be used for batch control or run reports on groups of pens Select this to display the list of available Pen Groups If you select a group here this pen will be added to it The group can then be renamed to rename these groups see Groups on page 111 Groups are used as a part of the Batch system see Batch Menu on page 107 e Colour Each Pen has a Default Pen Colour but this can be changed if required Select and use the colour palette to set the pen colour Trace Width Select and set the Trace Width for this pen when it is displayed on a chart The default trace width is 1 with a maximum of 7 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Scale Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Pens gt Scale Individually configure each scale per pen in the scale menu Menu path to current mn Edit Setup Enabled y units Tag Pen 1 m Span 100 000 Maths Type Basic Maths zero 0 000 Edit Maths Al Scale Type Linear ois Select Auto 2 Major Divs None a Select the Scale button to take you to the Scale menu Click on Scale to set up
248. hi P17 P1 J P1 U Message Body P1 T P1 P1 U 4 gt a e o a n sea e eree Lv Lx J 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 79 80 SNTP Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Comms gt Comms Services gt SNTP Simple Network Time Protocols is a protocol for synchronising the clock on the recorder with a Network Server Server Enable Toggle On and Off Activate this to make this recorder the server Other recorders set up as clients can synchronise their time to this server recorder e Client Enable Toggle On and Off Activate this to set this recorder to synchronise time with the server See Figure 4 7 on page 80 Server Name up to 32 characters Only available when Client Enable is active This is the name of the Network Server that can be used for time synchronisation Enter the server name to be used for time synchronisation this could be a Time Server on the internet or on your network If a recorder is acting as the Server the Client recorders must have the recorder s network ID eg xs nnnnnn this is the 6 digit Serial number See System on page 155 for the recorder s serial number e Period Only available when Client Enable is active Select and enter the time period in seconds required between checking and updating the time using the on screen key board This will be between 600 and 3600 seconds e Threshold Only available when Client Enable is acti
249. hort circuit High open circuit If a Pulse input card is fitted in slot A the first 4 pens will display the maths function of HPULn in Edit Maths in the Pens menu as default to display the pulse reading For more information see Appendix B Maths Expressions on page 271 Edit Setup 7 pi Menu path to current menu Pulse Input 1 x PIL Frequency Measure H The Pulse Input screen Pulse Input 2 y P12 Frequency Measure i Puse Input 2 AEEY gt displays all the available Pulse Input 3 PIS Frequency Measure Hz gt pulse input channels that can be set up Pulse Input 4 PI4 Frequency Measure Hz i Each channel displays its individual settings Select a numbered chan nel to edit the configura tion of each Pulse input o Aeg Press the Pulse Input button to display the available pulse inputs Click on individual Pulse Input number to set up each channel profile e Enabled Toggle On and Off e Hertz Fixed as Frequency Measure in Hertz 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK e Update Rate Fixed at 1Hz Label Select and enter an identification label for the pulse input Select and enter a label Up to 16 characters When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Linearisation Tables Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Field I O gt Linearisation Linearisation Tables
250. hown 50001011 504 Compact Flash card 256Mb 50001011 505 Compact Flash card 512Mb 50001011 506 Compact Flash card 1Gb 50001011 507 Compact Flash card 2Gb 50001011 508 Compact Flash card 4Gb 43 51453071 502 QX Case Handle and Terminal Cover Not shown 44 50005224 501 QX Rear Terminal Cover Not shown 45 50017150 501 QX Left amp Right Hand Chassis kit 48 30755050 502 QX Mounting Hardware kit 2 Mounting Not shown Brackets 49 51453083 501 QX Panel Gasket 52 51453038 501 Stylus Kit Black pack of 5 53 50013947 501 Connector kit 2 of each connector Not shown type 54 50017179 501 QX 5 5 Backlight kit of 2 Not shown 50017290 501 Touch Screen Protector kit of 5 Not shown 46184161 502 Carrying Handle kit Not shown 50017181 501 QX SX Blanking Plate for I O Slots 2 Not shown 51452129 501 10 Ohm Resistors Pack of 8 Not shown 50001251 501 QX Portable Case Not shown 51453051 501 QX SX and QXe Power cord 125V Not shown QX and QXe Portable Case Dimensions A Height 165 1 6 50 Y Width Depth 165 1 235 lt a a 6 50 9 25 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK SX Recorder 20 GAES 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 243 USB Ethernet host 244 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 20 to 55V DC 20 to 30VAC Input Common Relay Instrument supply Output Analogue Input or Analogue Output CJC Sensor Analogue Input or Pulse Input Ala
251. ibuted access to the stored data time synchronisation over RS 485 and Ethernet networks It is also available with a V3 compliant OPC Server to make it easier to interface third party HMI software packages that support an OPC Client The Communication Server provides security for the transmis sion and storage of process data AComms option card and expansion card are required for the QXe recorder Database Management Tool Database Management Tool this software application works with Trend Manager and Trend Server to provide safe administration of data with tools to archive sort move copy and delete the data stored in local and remote databases The Database Management Tool software is supplied with Trend Server X Series Screen Designer Not available for the QXe recorder X Series Screen Designer is a separate software package that enables the user to design unique display layouts for transfer to the recorder s screen Screen layouts can be created using a combina tion of indicators such as Trending Charts Digital Panel Meters and Bargraphs Flexibility allows each type of indicator to have elements of its appearance changed to create an individual presentation 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 237 The X Series Screen Designer software package is compatible with all QX and SX recorders Layouts can be transferred on to single or multiple recorders of the same type which contributes to continuity and standardization of process data
252. ightness is 80 Adjustable between 10 and 100 of full brightness This works on a square law rule that means if you reduce the saver level by 25 you will double the backlight life If you reduce the saver level by 50 you will quadruple the backlight life Normal backlight MTBF at 100 brightness is QX 55 000 hours 86 500 at 80 brightness ee SX 43 000 hours for the 67 000 at 80 brightness e e QXe 40 000 hours 62 500 at 80 brightness When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Note Once you enable the screen saver it will not turn off the backlight if at the time of the Timeout there is a pen in alarm The screen will stay on until the alarm is gone and the Time out is passed Once the Saver is active and screen is Dark backlight is off it will turn back on if a pen goes into alarm Exit Screen Saver If the screen saver is active on the recorder any of the following will deactivate the screen saver e User touches the recorder screen e Any USB device is plugged in or unplugged On alarm An alarm is triggered the unit will not return to screen saver till the alarm state is inactive and another screen saver time out period has expired Charts Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Screen gt Charts The Chart Speed sets how fast in mm hr the chart moves across the screen The recorde
253. il wiceeccccccccccccessssssssessesssssessesessseseestestessenes Event Causes c ccccccccccccscsscescesesseessesscsessscsessesaeees Event Effects cenre Events Overview EV CNtS COUNLECTS eececsesscsscessesssessesssessesssessessseesessseess Export Now Extra Pens F F sub O TOtadiser coecceccccccecccsccssssssssssessssssesssseseeseene 68 F sub zero Sterilisation Appendix G_ 297 FIP Status ccssstessscsssciisisscssscessecssiesaisiscacdiwiaviaels 166 Factory Calibration ssi 102 310 Factory Ment sssi 101 AI Calibration us iis CIC Calibration wc eseseeseseeseseseeeenees Calibration aenieei een dias mained Credits arosi Daylight Saving Firmware Upgrade TAT BAGS auoe esei eisir ee a aT Pine Hesso nan a R E T Localisation Temp Units Time Zone nsss Field IO Menu Alarm Relay as Alarm Digital IO ww Analogue In Menu Analogue Out ou Digital IO af Pulse Input on Field IO Specification Analogue Output Pulse Input Card Finish COMME ape aro aa i eparses EERE REEERE Commit Later Discard Finish button Firmware Credit System Firmware Options s is Firmware Credit System Firmware Upgrade sotcinc tesco cia anew First Time Password Setup ESS 1 0 170 Full Maths ssicssssccuacastieiet Codie te uabentapraniinineniee 279 Full Maths amp Script Processing 00 271 Function Codes and Memory Maps 303 Functions and Featur
254. ilure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury Pulse Input Channel Numbers The Pulse Input card has channels using a connector that only takes up half the length of the connector slot Looking from the rear of the unit the Pulse Input connector is on the right of the slot with a blanking plate on the left Table 2 5 Pulse Input card Card Position Slot A Slot B Slot C Slot D Slot E Slot F Channel number 1to4 9to 12 17 to 20 25 to 28 33 to 36 41 to 44 Pulse Input Connection Details Do not connect anything to terminals marked NC Not Connected For Frequency and Volt age levels see Specification Tables on page 259 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 oO m o oO m o ol o m m o o NC NC NC NC 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 23 24 Electrical Installation Transmitter Power Supply Card The QX Transmitter power supply option is 24V DC 200 mA and is fitted to the power supply card within the unit 24V OV Connection is made via a 2 way connector at the rear of the unit the mating half is supplied with this option For O O connector position see Figure 2 3 on page 14 The 24V transmitter power supply is not isolated from the recorder 24V DC TXP and is not referenced to ground The SX Transmitter power supply option is 24V DC 1 A and
255. imum rating only applies up to 104 F 40 C For higher temperatures the RH spec is de rated to maintain constant moisture content 266 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Specification Tables LED Flash Codes LEDs are fitted on the Analogue Input card Analogue Output card Pulse Input card 4 and 8 Alarm Relay cards and the 8 and 16 Digital IO cards The LEDs can be seen through six holes on the left side of the Q X QXe recorders and 18 holes on the SX recorder looking from the front Table 12 3 Pins a Sequence Type of Fault 1 1 flash once pause flash once pause etc Hardware 2 2 flash twice pause flash twice pause etc Communications 3 3 flash three times pause flash three times pause etc Memory 4 4 flash four times pause flash four times pause etc Other 1 2 flash once pause flash twice more quickly pause CJC fault flash once etc added as CJC could be unplugged 1 3 If another error is also present with CJC error flash CJC fault once pause flash 3 times Red LED flash codes relate to the first fault stored in the error buffer With no faults the red LED remains off When the red LED is flashing the green LED stays lit The green LED flashes for normal operation The board outputs the flash code for about 30 seconds after it was registered 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 267 268 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Appendix A Quality and Safety
256. in the format S lt no gt lt name gt way e g S1 Alert wav 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 135 136 Alarms Menu Main Menu gt Alarms gt Acknowledge and Configure Alarms by categories Alarms R A Ack Alarm Configure Finish Acknowledge Alarm Main Menu gt Alarms gt Acknowledge Alarm User acknowledgment of alarms can be performed at this menu only Latched alarms can be acknowledged Normal alarms cannot be acknowledged When a Latched alarm is set up in the Pen Alarms menu and a latched relay is configured it will maintain its active state until the alarm has been acknowledged A latched alarm will continue to flash if an alarm marker is displayed until it is acknowl edged and itis out of alarm state See Alarm Markers on page 196 for flash colour iden tification Ack Alarm e All Select this button to acknowledge all active latched alarms By Group Select this button to acknowledge latched alarms in a group of pens Pen groups can be set up in the Pens menu e By Pen Select this option to acknowledge latched alarms for individual pens Configure Main Menu gt Alarms gt Configure This is a short cut to change alarm levels this will display all available pens with alarms set up To change the configuration select the desired pen this will display the alarm details Select the Edit button to change the alarm level If the Edit button is greyed out go to the Pens gt
257. int cal on Slot A of the QXe recorder will improve accuracy for lead resistance above 10 ohms Square Root Extraction Available as standard on every input type Sensor Compensation Single point and Dual point Input Sampling Rate QX QXe Recorder has 2 available slots and the SX Recorder has 6 available slots with up to 8 analog inputs each the input sampling rate is dependent on actuation type QX SX All Inputs 100mS 10Hz 200mS 5Hz 500mS 2Hz QX SX Fast Sampling 20mS 50Hz mA mV Ohms and Volts only QXe200mS 5Hz 500mS 2Hz and 100mS 10Hz Analogue Input expansion card option 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 261 Specification Tables Specification Analogue Inputs Scales Linear amp Logarithmic Normal and Scientific notation Decimal Point automatic or programmable Engineering units user definable 10 characters Logarithmic 38 min to 38 max recommend up to 20 decades on one screen to ensure clarity Input Isolation 300VAC channel to channel channel to ground Resistance thermometers are not isolated on the QXe Noise Rejection Analogue Input card std at 50 60HZ 2 Common mode 2Hz 120dB 5Hz 120dB Normal Mode 2Hz 80dB 5Hz 25dB Analogue Input expansion card option Common mode 2Hz 120dB 5Hz 120dB 10Hz 120dB Normal Mode 2Hz 85dB 5Hz 80dB 10Hz 48dB Specification Logging Loggin
258. ion Electrical Installation Installation Category e Installation category Installation category II Pollution degree 2 Follow National and local electrical codes for installation in a Class 1 Div 2 area For voltage frequency and power refer to the appropriate Specification sheet See Sec tion 12 Technical Data amp Specifications on page 255 Fuses There is a fuse situated on the DC input version power supply type 2A time delay this can be replaced by the user Replacement of fuses should be carried out by qualified service personnel If the fuse should blow again there is probably a problem elsewhere within the unit and the recorder should be returned for inspection to your supplier Cables To fully comply with the requirements of the CE Mark all cables connected to the rear of the unit should use screened cable terminated at both ends A low impedance earth cable lt 50 mQ must be connected to the earthing stud on the rear of the recorder to ensure that the recorder is always earthed Before performing any installation please read the section on Safety on page 2 and Warnings and Safety Precautions on page 3 All connections to the unit are made via the rear panel the layout of which is shown in Fig ure 2 3 on page 14 Note The QXe Analogue Input card Slot A Cable screen must be well connected to the re corder case using a low impedance bond Also avoid use of a length of wire between t
259. ion will be highlighted To change the actual chart speed setting for Fast Medium and Slow see Charts on page 113 ta e Apu E EN Touch the screen to Menu 0 6 apScrean produce the Settings button 5 oi J Select Settings to a produce the chart 28 00 speeds menu Pen 4 129080 Pen 5 14 00 09 22 00 09 24 00 QuickView Changing chart speeds can be used as quick view of the data at different resolutions 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 195 196 Screen Activity Alarm Markers Alarm markers appear when an alarm is setup in the Pen Alarms menu Hi A F and Low alarm markers appear as a triangle on a DPM or Bar pointing up for a Hi alarm and down for a Low alarm See Alarms Menu on page 66 Deviation Alarm Markers These are diamond shape markers Deviation is how far this pen can de viate from the Ref Pen before triggering an alarm See Alarms Menu on page 66 to set up the alarm Type Deviation Level and the Ref Pen Rate of Change Alarm Markers There are two types of rate of Change Alarms Rate Up and Rate Down al 7 They will appear on a DPM or Bar when a Rate Up or Rate Down type alarm has been set up in the Alarms Menu on page 66 and has been triggered The Rate Up Alarm Marker will slope up to the right and the Rate Down Alarm Marker will slope down to the right Alarm Marker Flash Colours For Hi Low and Deviation alarms Table 6 1 Alarm Markers F
260. is recorder setup will be added to the re corder list Note The recorder will be added to the list under the Recorder Name as set in the re corder itself This is the name that appears in the top right corner of the recorder 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK screen when in normal logging mode NOT the name you gave the recorder when set ting up the FTP If you select the Recorder button on Trend Server this will show a list of all recorders cur rently logged with a setup The recorder just added will be the last one on the list This name will be used to set up the Modbus Profile in Comms Server for the recorder Recorders xX Importing Data via FTP Select type of import as Data this is the same as for Importing from a directory except that when im porting data via FTP you will have a choice of New data or all data The All function will import all the data in the recorder s memory to the external device port The New function will just im port any new data since the last import was made 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 215 Communications Server Communications Server 216 Comms Server Overview The Comms Server and the Database server will automatically become active when the Trend Server software is running Refer to the Trend Analysis Software Manual In stallation instructions The Comms server will enable the user to Monitor the status of communications with a device on any serial port up to 8 po
261. is the event number 1 to 20 This prevent successive executions re triggering the same event As a further measure to avoid the system being overloaded by events from within the script system each time an event is triggered from within a script it will apply a 1 second automatic lock preventing the same event from being trig gered more then once a second irrispective of the CLRE x being called for that event e Set clear a digital output This feature allows a digital output to be set or cleared from a script using the function SETD x y where x is the digital output 1 to 49 where 49 is the power relay and y is the value 1 to set or 0 to clear The function will return the value set if successful if not successful it will return 1 0 this would be caused by trying to set and digital input rather then output See Table 14 2 Maths Function Table on page 274 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 95 96 Counters Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Events Counters gt Counters Up to 16 User Counters are available and can be used as a part of the Events system User Counters can be set up as a Cause or an Effect of an Event Setup a User Counter Select the next available Counter number Enabled Pa Name Counter 1 Start At 1 0 Rollover At 100 0 d Enabled In the Counter menu tick to Enable Name Name the counter for ease of identification Start At E
262. isplay the device status in the top main win dow Green LED s will show a realtime connection is made If grey LED s are showing and the device displays Unconnected and if Red LED s display then there is a problem with connection 4 The data from this device can now be logged to a database by using the Configure log ging screen and setting up channels for logging with the log rate and type and setting up a destination database See Logging Configuration on page 226 5 When the realtime data is being run eg graphed to the application server software or an OPC client this will enable the bottom window that will display details of the data 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 219 Communications Server Add a Database To add a database to a server right click on the server eg Local Server select Add Data base and complete the dialog box details for the name and description of the device Add a Database Server 1 Use the database icon with a sign in the top left of the comms server window 2 Right click on Database Servers in the top left window Connect to a Database Server 1 Select Database Servers in the left window and then right click on the server to be connected in the servers list in the main window 2 Connect to database server dialog box will appear enter an IP address and a descrip tion to identify the database server Delete a Database Server 1 Right click on the database server to be
263. ist if this feature is ena bled in the recorder It cannot be enabled by the firmware credit system contactl your supplier for details Note 2 not available for the QXe Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK IO Cards Main Menu gt Status gt System gt IO Cards This will display the Slot position of each card in the recorder The Card Type is identified as Analogue I P Alarm Digital I O Analogue O P or Pulse Input The number of Channels on each card eg Digital I O 1 16 The Firmware Version of the card is displayed and the Board Revision Table 4 11 Example of IO Card Status for a QX Slot Card Type Channels FW Version Board Revision A Analogue P 1 8 A 00 0 B Pulse 9 12 A 00 1 G Digital I O 1 16 A 00 0 Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen Pen Overview Main Menu gt Status gt Pen Overview Each pen is displayed with full configuration details Pen Displays the pen number and ticked if it is enabled Value Displays the current reading for this pen Name Pen name or number Maths Displays any Maths calculation applied to this pen or the Analogue Input chan nel for this pen Summarised to M for any Maths expressions Scale Displays the High and Low limits of the scale range for this pen In Alarm Displays the current status of the alarm ti
264. it comes across operations functions brackets etc not expected or permitted it will report an error However the fault being reported may be on a previous line caused by the missing or incorrect function Refer to Application Note 43 TV 07 32 on your CD or web site for a list of scripting error messages 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Appendix C Thermocouple Connections How Thermocouples work Thermocouples produce a voltage dependant upon the temperature gradient between the hot and cold junctions The hot junction is the measuring junction of the thermocouple the cold junction is the point where the thermocouple wires are connected usually the connec tion block on the back of the recorder 20 C 100 C 7 CJC Hot Junction Cold Junction If the hot measuring junction is at 100 C and the connection block of the recorder is at 20 C the thermocouple will produce a voltage corresponding to 80 C the difference between the hot and cold junctions For the recorder to correctly report the 100 C it needs to know the temperature at the cold junction There are 4 options of cold junction compensation CJC on the recorder that are detailed below The simplest and most common is to use the Internal Automatic compen sation This uses a CJC sensor built onto the Al board to measure the connector tempera ture In this case it will measure 20 C this will then be added to the 80 C measured by th
265. ither Master or Slave devices See Figure Modbus Master Communications on page 75 Front and Rear USB Communication Ports The front and rear of the QX and SX recorders are fitted with a USB communication port The QXe recorder has a USB port at the front as standard and another available at the rear as an option The USB Host ports will provide an interface for Save and Load Data Save and Load Setups External keyboard amp mouse Barcode reader Mass storage device USB key Local printer 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Modbus Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Comms gt Comms Services gt Modbus Modbus is available as a Firmware option see Credits on page 101 Modbus can be used with RS485 or Ethernet ports The Modbus protocol defines a mes sage structure that devices will recognise and use regardless of the type of network over which they communicate RS485 is an option for the QXe recorder 52 MODBUS Master Finish Modbus Master Communications The recorder can communicate with up to 32 slave devices on both RS485 and or Ethernet at a maximum poll rate of 1 second slowest 1 hour Each slave can perform up to 8 trans actions where a transaction can retrieve or send 1 or more registers from a slave or re treive or send 1 or more Pens to a slave Access to slave registers within the maths function has been provided using scv x y z where x Slave number y T
266. jury AC Power AC supply is connected via the standard configuration IEC chassis plug on the rear panel 100 250 Vac 50 60 Hz 40 VA QX QXe and 60VA SX Absolute limits 90V 132Vac 110V and 180V 264Vac 240V 24V AC DC Power 48V AC Power For the QX and the SX the supply range is 24V DC 10 absolute limits are 20V to 55V DC Also accepts 20 to 30V AC Power to the D C variant is connected via a rectangular 3 way connector as identified in Figure 2 3 on page 14 for the QX and Figure 2 4 on page 15 for the SX The QXethe supply range is 24V DC 10 absolute limits are 20V to 30V DC Also ac cepts 20 to 25V AC Earth screw ground AC supply 100 250 VAC Wire seal provision SPNC Relay 24V DC AC Input Analogue Input IE I Analogue Output sll or Pulse Input 24V TX Power Supply Output Slot A ee Slot B CJC Sensor Alarm Relay or Ethernet Digital I O Slot G USB Host RS485 Figure 2 3 QX Connector diagram 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Earthscrew ground 24V DC AC Input Electrical Installation AC supply 100 250 VAC Analogue Input Analogue Output or Pulse Input Slot A Slot B Slot C SPN Relay Slot D Slot E Slot F 24V TX F ower oupely Alarm Relay Output ot LED Digital I O Slot G CJC Sensor Slot H position in the middle of the ony Analogue Input
267. knowledge Single pen Pen group All pens Emails Screen Change Print Screen Counters Reset Increment Max Min Reset Chart Control Pause Stop Resume Clear Prefill Clear All Messages Delayed Event Script Timers Start Stop Reset Reset amp Start Play Sound Start Stop Display Alert Reports Batch Start Stop Pause Fast Scanning mode 5 For fast processes the scan rate and recording of the data can be set for up to 50 times per sec Note 4 ond 20ms for up to 8 inputs for the QX and 16 inputs for the SX Totalisers 4 Each pen can be associated with a totaliser Using extra pens the totalised values can be dis Sterilisation played and recorded multiple totals can be calculated out of the same variable weekly monthly calculation Note 1 etc The totaliser function can handle Fo and Po sterilisation calculation Custom Screens Note 2 4 Import custom built screens that have been created in Screen Designer Reports 3 Generate reports manually or using the event system to show daily weekly monthly Totals Max Mins Averages Current Value Messages Message Lists Alarm System Diagnostic Security amp User Counters Digital Inputs and Digital Outputs Reports can be printed e mailed as an attachment or exported to external media in RTF format Health Watch 2 The recorder keeps track of important life actions for improved diagnostics and preventative Maintenance maintenance notification Including Power cycles
268. knows the previous logged readings it can calculate where the next point should be assuming it s on a straight line if the measured value does not equal the pre dicted value the point is logged as it no longer forms part of the straight line Fuzzy Logging looks for straight lines at any angle Not just on the horizontal Do you have any examples Example 1 Flow amp Pressure Measurement of Mains Water Pressure A recorder was installed to monitor the flow of a mains water supply At peak demand the mains pressure had been subject to sharp drops in pressure and flow rate and it was nec essary to find the cause of the problem The recorder had to have a fast scan rate in order to capture the glitches The recording period would be over many days if not weeks so storage capacity was ata premium A fast scan rate using the standard sampling method would result in a disk life of about a day which was not acceptable As this application consists of long periods of little activity relatively constant flow rate and short periods of high activity rapidly changing flow rate itis ideally suited to Fuzzy Logging During the hours of stable flow where the flow rate remained more or less constant the Fuzzy Logging technique would give compression ratios up to 100 times However as soon as a glitch appeared the fast sampling rate was able to capture and store all the points Example 2 Cold Storage Temperature Measu
269. l the Batch details are correct and you wish to start the batch immediately Use the Back button to return to the Batch setup and not start the batch This icon changes to show a batch is in progress mi 0001 Turbine 1 18 Jan 06 10 51 23 10 49 00 10 5068 10 51 00 Pen 1 18 Jan 06 18 Jah 06 18 Jan 06 67 23 Start Batch Mark on Chart Pen Batch Mark on Chart A Batch marker will be placed on all process screens that have a chart displayed The mark on chart will show where the batch is started with S Batch Name The next time you press the Batch button the screen will have changed to give you the Batch Controls The batch control buttons enable the user to Stop Pause Resume Abort or add a Comment to the current batch that has been started A Batch is complete when it has been stopped When a batch is stopped E appears as a mark on chart on the screen If the batch is aborted it is not a complete batch and will be marked on the chart with an A to show it has been aborted If the recorder is not logging starting a batch will automatically start the logging However stopping the batch will not stop the logging 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK If a batch is Paused P will appear as a mark on chart and the Pause button on the Batch Control menu is replaced with a Resume button When Resume is selected the screen will be marked with R Figure 4 6 Batch Control screen and Messages screen Batch All Mess
270. lable for the QXe Start Stop Recording The Recording screen will allow the user to manually Start and Stop recording Select either the start or stop buttons to activate the function for All pens a Group of pens if a group is defined or By Pen to identify an individual pen s e Recording Displays the current pen recording status and the number of pens currently recording Export Required In XXd XXh XXm XXs This is the amount of days hours minutes and seconds left until the internal memory buffer starts to be over written Exporting does not remove the data from the recorder but when the internal memory buffer is full the latest data will start to over write the oldest data Available as a Maths expression giving the hours until recycling starts see Maths Variable and Function Tables on page 272 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 145 146 e Schedule Displays the frequency of a scheduled export only if a scheduled export has been set up see Edit Recording on page 114 e Media Full In Displays how long before the external media selected for the scheduled export is full FTP Export required XXd XXh XXm XXs This is the amount of days hours min utes and seconds of safe recording time available An FTP export must be completed before the FTP buffer is full and the latest data will start to over write the oldest data Available as a Maths expression giving the hours until recycling starts
271. lamp screws QX and QXe torque setting should be 0 5 0 75Nm 4 4 6 6lbf in SX torque setting should be 0 5 0 70Nm 4 4 6 2lbf in Failure to comply with these instructions may result in product damage SX 1 Insert the panel gasket onto the recorder so it goes between the back of the recorder bezel and the panel From the front panel place unit in the panel and push through the panel 2 To loosen each clamp unscrew the long screw to accommodate the panel thickness 3 From behind the panel the orientation of the clamp should be with the screw head towards the rear of the unit See Figure 2 2 on page 7 4 Position the circular mounting boss in the hole on one side of the case with the lip of the boss inside the case Ensure the front of the clamp is up against the panel 5 Fix the second clamp on the opposite side of the unit See Figure 2 4 on page 15 6 Tighten the screw using a flat blade screwdriver and the clamp will secure against the panel 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 11 Mechanical Installation Mounting Clamp Diagram Figure 2 1 QX and QXe Mounting clamp 2 mounting clamp positions required on two opposite sides of the recorder Nema 4X requires all 4 clamps to be fitted Mounting clamp slots Figure 2 2 SX Mounting clamp 4 mounting clamp positions 2 shown 2 clamps are re quired on opposite sides of the recorder 12 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Electrical Installat
272. larms e Showing For Input Channel Analogue Digital Hi Pulse or Low Pulse Figure 4 4 Channel mapping Setup screen for a selected widget or object Pen No 1 Alarm No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Pen No 1 Total Pen No 1 Total Select a Pen 2 Js J Gs Gs Input Channel Maximum Average Cancel Total Channel Mapping Objects To select an object activate the Expert button on the Screen menu bar Objects have blue grab handles around the edge Select Map from the Screen bar to display the Setup information as described in Channel Mapping Setup screen on page 138 If the object is an Alarm Marker the data will always be from Alarm for Pen Select the Pen number and the alarm number to be shown Pen Pointers just need to be mapped to a Pen 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 139 140 Parent Pens This does not apply to charts as charts normally have more than one pen displayed The parent channel is the initial channel to be configured on a widget All objects added to a wid get except charts and pen pointers automatically default to using the parent channel The parent itself allows the user to quickly make all of their objects update to use the pen number indicated by the parent Replay Main Menu gt Screen gt Replay The Replay button takes you to the process screen in replay mode The Replay screen con sists of a chart and
273. lash Colour A Magenta flash In alarm not acknowledged Yellow flash In alarm acknowledged latched alarm amp Cyan blue flash Out of alarm latched not acknowledged Grey Out of Alarm Pen Pointers Pen Pointers appear on a scale next to a chart when no bars are present They move to dis play the real time value Each pen pointer is numbered according to its associated pen and will flash yellow when that pen goes into an alarm state Pen pointers will change direction and point up or down when a pen signal goes off scale 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Mark on Chart There are two different types of Mark on Chart automated or user An automated Mark on Chart can be set up for An Alarm going in and out of an alarm state Start Stop or Reset Totals e Batch control such as Start Stop Pause Resume and Abort batch Generated by an effect of an Event A user Mark on Chart is activated by first selecting a process screen that is displaying a chart Go to the Messages List button on the Main Menu bar and select Mark A text box will appear enter the message you wish to be displayed as a mark on chart on the screen using the on screen keyboard or a USB keyboard Pen out of alarm Batch stopped Pen into alarm Totals started User 001 0 3 Jan 06 15 03 00 Pen 1 61 70 gt TH Pen 2 43 05 Pen 3 Figure 6 5 Mark on Chart 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 197 198 Screen Markers Table
274. le on the network The screen will display the recorder name what version of Firmware is installed ID number and Network Name and IP address It also displays the recorder s network sync status to show if the recorder is part of a pass word group It will display either Master Slave or a Stand Alone recorder not belonging to a net sync group The last column displays which Password Net Sync group each recorder belongs to Stand Alone recorders will be blank The Peers Diagnostic Status screen only gets updated when a rescan is done if you remove a peer from the network it still shows in the Comms Diagnostic Peers Status screen until another rescan A rescan will be done when a recorder come online startup or a change is made to password netsync If you experience any security issues using peers see nternet Security Settings on page 235 Messages The Messages list displays the Peer to Peer status Thus includes the Type of message usually a system password message Time Date and the Message information This screen can be cleared or printed Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen Media Status Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnostics gt Media e Pen Pen number e Rate Pen speed e Store Size How much memory is allocated to this pen Store Time How much storage time is available Remaining How much memory is left before data is over written Store Size Store Time
275. lect Totaliser from the Pen screen to display the totalising setup menu e Enabled Toggles On and Off to activate or de activate totalising for this pen Type Select this for a list of Types of totalising Normal or Sterilisation Normal totaliser function is usually associated with flow monitoring applications Sterilisation is where items are subjected to heat over a period of time Each pen can be totalised according to the Fo or Po sterilisation function at 250 F 121 11 C The Standard Reference Temperature and Thermal Resistance Z Value are adjustable All temperature limits are adjustable Start temp Reference temp and Z factor are all user defined allowing support for many different types of sterilisation applications See Sterilisation on page 70 Tag Select and enter an identifier for the pen Up to 17 characters e Add to Msgs Toggles On and Off Select this to add a totaliser to the messages screen Eg Totali Total 1 Reset e Units Normal Totaliser only This is the Units of Measurement for the totaliser Select and enter the units Up to 12 characters e Time Factor Normal Totaliser only Time factor Totaliser adds a value once per sec ond so you need to Divide by this factor For example If your flow meter is in units second Time factor is 1 If your flow meter is in units minute the unit will DIVIDE by the time factor in this case 60 so every 1 second 1 60th of the unit is added I
276. ledge the alarm Select the first available event eg Event 1 In the Event 1 menu tick to enable and change the Event tag if required Each Event has four Causes and four Effects available these can be used in different combinations NOTICE Remember that any of the Causes will trigger All the Effects Cause 1 and Effect 1 are not linked e An event can have up to 4 causes that triggers just one effect eg A pen going into alarm a Totaliser starts Max Mins reset and a Batch starts This could have the effect of starting Logging e Aneventcan have one cause that has up to 4 effects eg A pen could go into alarm and the effects could be that the alarm is acknowledged and a Totaliser is started there is a Mark placed on the chart and an Alarm is sounded See Event 1 example on page 85 An event can have up to 4 causes that have up to 4 effects eg A pen goes into alarm and a Totalisers is started A scheduled export starts and Max Min values are reset The effects could be the alarm is acknowledged and a mark on chart is displayed to show the start of the totaliser an Email is sent to notify a scheduled export has been made and a sound effect is played to identify the Max Min values have been reset In summary Cause 1 2 3 or Cause 4 will trigger Effect 1 2 3 and Effect 4 When selecting Totalisers and Alarms etc ensure they are enabled and configured in the Pens menu 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 83 84 Ta
277. les On and Off With this deactivated the DNS Server address can be changed from the default if required Pri DNS Address This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Only available when Auto DNS is deactivated Sec DNS Address This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Only available when Auto DNS is deactivated Auto WINS This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Toggles On and Off With this deactivated the Windows Internet Name Service can be changed from the default if required Pri WINS Address This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Only available when Auto WINS is deactivated Sec WINS Address This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Only available when Auto WINS is deactivated Auto MDNS This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Toggles On and Off This will deactivate the Managed Data Network Services When the setup is complete go back to the TCP IP menu and complete the Comms setup Ports Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Comms gt TCP IP gt Ports The port numbers are associated with the IT system in use Port numbers are set to a default but can be changed by the user to allow data traffic to use a specified port HTTP HyperText Transport Protocol is the communications protocol that enables Web browsing Select and enter the desired port number if required Defaults to 80 Modbus communications protocol used for automation applications Select and enter the desired port number if required De
278. lider shows how much memory is allocated to Chart data and how much memory is allocated to Logged data The user can adjust the slider which will display how long it will take to fill the memory at the current chart speed before the data will start to be recycled See Storage Bias on page 115 How Replay works There are three separate queues of data represented by the three different chart speeds As you zoom in and out it switches between these different queues These queues are not all the same length so for example The fast speed may be at 600mm hr which means to cover 24 hours takes approx 30Mbytes for 8 pens The medium speed may be at 20mm hr which means that to cover 24 hours takes 1Mbyte 1 30 of fast The Slow speed may be at 1mm hr which means that to cover 24 hours takes 50Kbyte 1 20 of Medium The result of this is that the slow speed will tend to give you much more elapsed time history but at a lower time resolution here is a representation of what this could look like Data 2 week 4 weeks 6 weeks 8 weeks 12 weeks Fast speed Medium speed Slow speed The lines represent absolute time coverage So if you go right back to the earliest time on the slowest chart shown by in this example you cannot zoom in any more as the medium speed coverage does not go back that far Zooming Capabilities The example in Figure 6 4 on page 194 shows
279. light Event Effects cecccsccccccceeccessn 93 Backligh tS cn psshscirchisnacctenisusinanipoaee Barcode Reader Barcodes for Batch Batch Event Causes ccsscssccccoscosccvtssssvsvvsestevssstesssosdovsetseteenesns Event Effects Batch Commands Batch Mark on Chart at SERTA Batch Ment n se Barcodes for Batch ecese Concurrent Batch Mode Batch Setup Control Batch Commands Batch Mark on Chart Batch process screens Batch Overview o a Battery Data Appendix Twice 301 Battery Safety sisccsncssicdaicntntconcnteaincaas 301 Processor Board iissnuiinrininimanannias 301 Brightness Screen Saver seks shee eae 114 307 CE Mark ossessi CJC Calibration CJC Connectors eee Cables eeceececccsssessesssessesssessesssesseesssssessssssesevsseestesseeseess Calibrate Screen vecceccccccscscsssesssssesssssseesessnesees Calibration cc AI Calibration wo Appendix Ho ou ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees CJC Calibration oo Maintenance sssr Sensor Compensation ou EE User Calibration ssssssisssssssissiiisiiissesisisssssrisssanis Calibration Input Range ou Card Positions and Channel numbers Card and Slot Positions ceceecceeccecccecceeseeeeeeveens Change Log Speed Alarms P Change Passwords sssrin Channel Mapping Map D tON sseshivccssstesesbiedessaretes annaia 138 Parent Pens cernernararonnea nr a 140 Channel Mapping Objects ccs 139 Channel Mapping Widgets 0 138 Cha
280. list of all available markers that have been previously added to the recorder To add Preset Markers go to Preset Markers on page 96 Select the Message Type as User Defined to enter your own text For more information on the Alert system and how to customise it see Error Alert on page 99 e Batch Batch controls can be used as the effect of an event occurring An event cause must be set up so that the effect of the event is to Start Stop or Pause a batch Batches work using groups of pens so when setting up an event with a batch control as a cause you must assign a group of pens See Groups on page 111 e Reports A report can be created as an effect of an event Reports can be generated on a periodical basis using event system to show daily weeks monthly totals max mins averages etc the reports can be printed e mailed as attachments or exported to exter nal media Before a report can be run the report details must be entered in Reports menu on page 117 Event triggering from scripts e Trigger an Event This feature allows any enabled event with an enabled effect does not have to have any causes enabled to be triggered from within the scripting system using the following function TRIGE x where x is the event 1 to 20 e Clear Event Once an event is triggered using scripting the event is locked and cannot be triggered again from scripts until the lock is cleared using the clear event function CLRE x where x
281. ll of the recorders to be included in a password group Recorders in the same Master Slave password group must have the same revision of firmware Recorders set up with ESS Extended Security System and non ESS recorders can not be mixed in the same password group Choose a recorder to be the Master of the password group and go to the Pwd Net Sync dialog on that recorder from the Menu gt Configure gt Passwords menu Set the Type field to Master and the use the Associated Slaves field to pick from a list of availa ble recorders in order to make up the password group membership If a recorder is a part of a password group and the network becomes disconnected then the recorder will notify you of the available options concerning its associated password group This will occur if you have to update a password or if you have the Alert function set up to provide an Alert message that says the network cable is unplugged of if you do a rescan of the system 10 To remove a recorder from a password group set the recorder back to a stand alone 11 device and deactivate the Password Net Sync option in the Firmware Credits menu This will cause the recorder to reset This recorder will no longer be available for use in a password group But the password system and policies will still be active using the last group password If a Master is removed from a password group a new master can be assigned or all the recorders can be
282. llation NOTICE For Digital Inputs short together the 2 pins of the channels with a switch or a relay Pulse Inputs The 8 and 16 Digital I O option card has 4 channels that can be set as pulse inputs first 4 channels The operating frequency for pulse inputs on the Digital I O card is 1kKHz max Input Low lt 1V High gt 4 5V to lt 10V DC 9V to 20V p p AC or Volt free input Low short circuit High open circuit Figure 2 11 Digital Input Output card connector details CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2627 28 29 30 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NOC NO Normally Open C Common Digital Input Card Channel Numbers The Digital input cards are either 8 or 16 channels with a full length connector taking up 16 channels even if only 8 channels are in operation Both the digital input cards can be used as a relay card if required Table 2 7 Digital Input card 8 channel Digital Input card 16 channel Card Channel Card Channel position number position number Slot G 1to8 Slot G 1 to 16 Slot H 17 to 24 Slot H 17 to 32 Slot 33 to 40 Slot 33 to 48 The 16 channel Digital I O card is not available on the QXe 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 27 Electrical Installation Communications Connections Ethernet The Ethernet port is fitted to all X Series recorders as stan
283. logue Input Card Calibration Demo Traces Reset Setup function and a Localisation menu BE 8 FW Upgrade Calibration ax te Demo Traces Resets Localisation Finish e Credits The Credit menu contains the Serial no of the recorder how many credits are available displays the Options Code and lists what Firmware Options are currently active See Credits on page 101 FW Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade button allows new versions of the recorder firmware to be loaded into the recorder See FW Upgrade on page 102 e Calibration Analogue In and CJC Calibration can be performed per slot card See Calibration on page 102 e Demo Traces A set of demo traces are available for demonstration or simulation pur poses See Demo Traces on page 105 e Reset Setup Select this to clear the current setup A Warning message will appear before activating the reset See Resets on page 106 e Localisation Set up the recorder for native language use and global settings See Localisation on page 106 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Credits Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Factory gt Credits The Credit menu contains the Serial No of the recorder how may credits are available dis plays the Options Code and lists what Firmware Options are curren
284. lour of the Time Stamp at the top of the chart and Marker Mark on Chart can also be changed ss Red Green Blue Current Oo acai io Ti O Colour O Alarm e Chart Graduations This will change the colour of the graduation lines on the chart e Chart Colour This will change the colour of the background of the chart e Chart Alarm This will change the colour of the background of the chart when it goes into an alarm state e Replay Graduations This will change the colour of the graduation lines on the chart when the recorder screen is in Replay mode e Replay Colour This will change the colour of the background of the Replay chart Replay Alarm This will change the colour of the Replay chart when it goes into an alarm state e Time Stamp This will change the colour of the time stamp and date at the top of the screen Marker Colour This will change the colour of any Mark on Chart displayed on the screen The Default button will return all colours to their original factory settings The Colour Picker On the right side is a selection of default colours which can be used as they are When a colour is selected it will appear in the New box with the Current colour next to it Use the sliders labelled Red Green and Blue to vary the colour displayed in the New box As you move the slider the colour shade number will change in the box below the slider If a specific colour is required enter the colour number by s
285. ltime x COM1 x7 COM2 x COM3 xe COM4 xe COMS xr COME xr COM7 x COM3 New device is added ensure the Active box is ticked 49 Ethernet Destination Client connections Database logging The status lights will not be active yet This is because no logging or graphs have been set up so no data is being requested To set up Logging go to Logging Configuration on page 226 To start Realtime graphing go to Realtime Graphing on page 231 Edit a Device Select the Comms port containing the device for editing and right click on the device either in the left or top window The Edit Device Details dialog box will appear showing the config uration for comms with that device Any fields not greyed out can be changed For Ethernet devices the IP address can be changed Any device can be made active or inactive from here For active Modbus devices the recorder name and protocol variant can be changed modbus vs Modbus X For an inactive Modbus device the device profile can also be changed For information on the Test button see above Click on the OK button to save the changes Delete a Device Select the Comms port containing the device to be deleted and right click on the device ei ther in the left or top window Select Delete Device from the resulting menu The Delete De vice Details dialog box will appear showing the details of that particular device Check this is the correct device for deletion the
286. me every time the recorder is powered up With this feature Off the recorder s IP address is cre ated dynamically using a DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Server With this feature On the IP address can be fixed by entering a known available IP address below IP Address Available when Static IP is On This is an identification address for com munications between two devices The IP Address identifies a specific recorder Sub Net Mask Available when Static IP is On Acts as a filter when identifying an IP address Gateway Available when Static IP is On A configuration parameter transmitted to each network device 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 71 72 DNS WINS MDNS Set to Automatic click on this to activate and de activate options DNS Domain Name System WINS Windows Internet Name Service MDNS Man aged Data Network Services See DNS WINS MDNS on page 72 Ports The Port numbers are associated with the IT system in use Port numbers are set to a default but can be changed by the user to allow data traffic to use a specified port See Ports on page 72 DNS WINS MDNS Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Comms gt TCP IP gt DNS WINS MDNS Set to Automatic click on this to activate and de activate options DNS Domain Name Sys tem WINS Windows Internet Name Service MDNS Managed Data Network Services Auto DNS This is a sub menu for DNS WINS MDNS Togg
287. mpera ture has been set to 100 C a common value then the Fo summation would begin at t 8 minutes when the temperature first reaches this value 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 297 298 Because of this small but increasing contribution to Fy once T reaches 100 C and the fact that in this trace the temperature exceeds 121 11 C the Fg value reaches 15 at time t 20 minutes at which point the sterilisation is complete and cooling begins For some applications it is allowed to report the Fg value that is finally achieved as the sample cools back to the start temperature in this example 100 C and so the contribution under the curve up to t 22 minutes would be included in the reported Fo The final Fy value might then be 16 1 say with 15 having been achieved up to t 20 minutes and the extra 1 1 having accumulated during the cooling back to 100 C between t 20 minutes and t 22 minutes The terms used in setting up the Fo totaliser together with their default values are summa rised in this table Term Definition Default Allowed values Range The equivalent time in minutes at 121 11 C that would pro Fo duce the same degree of sterilisation This is the totaliser out put value The temperature increase in C above the reference tempera 10 5 20 z factor ture that will produce a 10 fold increase in the rate of sterilisa tion Start The temperature in C above which the contributions to FO 100 9
288. mware kk Platform 5 Boot Loader 1 Mac address 00 d0 6e IP Address 160 221 Front USB Host Mode Internal Mem Id This number is made up from the size of the memory card and what type of format it is Eg 128T16 128MB size formatted to TFAT16 Database Size Mb CF Card MB MB USB 1 MB MB USB 2 Empty Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen See Database Size Management on page 219 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 155 Options Main Menu gt Status gt System gt Options Displays a list of firmware options available and which ones are enabled For more information see See Section 7 Firmware Options on page 201 Table 4 10 Options Credits Enabled Full Math 4 V o x Scripting Full Maths Note 2 6 V o x Events 6 Y o x Fast Scan Note 2 5 Y o x Totals 4 Yoox Custom Screens Note 2 4 Y o x Reports 3 Y o x Maintenance 2 V o X Printing 2 Y o x Batch 5 Y o X Counters 3 V o x Groups 2 V o x Modbus Master 10 Y o x Remote View 3 Y o x Email 3 V o x OPC 8 Y o X Pwd Net Sync 5 Y o x Extra Pens 2 4 pens Total Pens Password CFR Note 1 NA V o x Total Credits no used no available NA Note 1 Password CFR ESS Extended Security System This will only appear in the l
289. n 4 select Edit Maths and enter T followed by the pen number you wish to totalise eg T3 Pen 4 is now set to totalise the value of Pen 3 It may be necessary to set a larger scale for the totalising pen pen 4 as the totalising value may become larger than the pen scale of the pen being totalised pen 3 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Go to the recorder s process screen and select a screen showing DPMs The totalising pen pen 4 will display the totalising value of pen 3 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Comms Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Comms Services TCP IP Network Admin Finish Services Modbus Web Email SNTP FTP and Peers See Comms Services Menu on page 73 TCP IP Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Comms gt TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol A protocol for communication between computers recorders and other devices Automatic DNS Names The recorder will automatically register a unique Network ID using the serial number The format is xs nnnnnn where nnnnnn is the serial number of the re corder This allows you to locate the recorder for browsing if you are using DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol TCP IP Settings Static IP Toggle On and Off With this enabled the IP address will be the sa
290. n acquisition values upwards to 400MB up to 90 million points Setup and screens Stored internally on non volatile memory Manual Saving Data saving by inserting Compact Flash card or USB memory stick Data Saving Period Related to log rate number of pens totals and alarms Each pen is capable of its own independent storage rate QX and SX Recorder 20ms to 60h QXe Recorder 100mS to 60h Data Format binary encoded format Recycling Mode Internal memory has FIFO First In First Out capability where the newest data over writes the oldest data Power Requirements QX Recorder Voltage VRMS 100VAC to 250VAC auto select Frequency 50 60Hz Power Consumption lt 40W 24V Optional instrument power 20 to 55VDC 20 to 30VAC Power Consumption lt 40 watts SX Recorder Voltage VRMS 100VAC to 250VAC auto select Frequency 50 60Hz Power Consumption lt 60W 24V Optional instrument power 20 to 55VDC 20 to 30VAC Power Consumption lt 60 watts QXe Recorder Voltage VRMS 100VAC to 250VAC auto select Frequency 50 60Hz Power Consumption lt 40W 24V Optional instrument power 20 to 30VDC 20 to 25VAC Power Consumption lt 40 watts Common Relay Output SPNC NC common alarm relay Two contacts normally open when the recorder is powered no active alarms Rating 24V 1 Amp Not available for the QXe Battery Battery backed up for clock replaceable Lithium battery Type 6032 3 0V 10 years lif
291. n click on the OK button and the device is removed otherwise the operation can be cancelled 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Communications Server Comms Server Logging To set up logging you must first decide where to store the data A database must be set up The database can either be on the PC running Comms Server or on another networked de vice There will be a database already set up by default on your PC when Trend Server was load ed This will be called Initial database To set up a database on the PC click the Database Servers icon this will expand to show local Servers i e databases on that PC Click local servers to expand out to show all da tabases Communications Server Communications Server E T Database Servers Database Servers Communication Ports 98 Local Server x COM1 Initial Database x COM2 June FTP xf COM3 a 1 xf com4 x COMS In the example shown there are two available databases The default database called Initial Database and June FTP Databases can be added by right clicking on the Local Server icon and then clicking Add Database Enter a database name and description click OK and the new database will ap pear on the list To add a database server you will need the IP address of the device that will be the database server Click the new database server button Enter the IP address and a new databas
292. n the batch ends See Start Log Start for details Allow Direct Input Enable this to allow the Batch control properties listed below to be edited directly from the batch control screen A barcode reader can be plugged into the front of the recorder and the barcodes scanned in directly NOTICE List driven data fields The next 5 fields are available for data entry associated with a batch The names can be overridden to suite the end user application all fields are now 69 character long with the exception of the User ID which is 20 A pre defined list of up to 30 items can be configured to allow users to select input for these fields from a list rather than type them in every time E g a user might have 8 different products running though the same process these can be pre configured so when starting a batch the user can pick from a list of products The pre defined lists have to be enabled in the in dividual group screen eg Show List Sets of functions are available to retrieve the list index from within Maths allowing state based processing during user selection See Figure 14 1 Maths Variable Table on page 272 e Name Props Enter the name of the batch name and setup a list of additional names to appear as a pick list as a part of the Batch Control screen see Batch Setup Batch Control on page 141 User ID Props Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new batch The User ID displa
293. ncoded to start a batch S Start Batch 216 Batch Name User ID is Fred A barcode with up to 25 characters including spaces can be read into the recorder using a USB ASCII barcode reader 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Recording Menu Main Menu gt Recording This will display the current recording status of the recorder and allow recording control Recording Methodology The recorder uses a new and powerful method for recording Data is acquired at pen spe cific rates processed and stored in the large on board Flash memory This memory oper ates in a cycle mode such that the oldest data is over written by the newest When data is exported from the recorder this does not delete that data from the recorder but retains it for further or future downloads With this method the user can export multiple cop ies of the same encoded data giving extreme security d Recording aiaia E Export Now Recording 15 pens recording Export Required In 1d 0h 39m 24s Schedule 1 Hour to USB1 Media Full In 20 Days FTP Export Requir Orn 00s sified A Storage Media Format New Compact Flash cards and USB storage keys are pre formatted for use in the recorder and PC If you have a used Compact flash or USB key we recommend you erase it Format ting of Compact Flash cards and USB keys can be done through your PC The formatting types accepted by the recorder are FAT FAT16 TFAT and FAT32 Compact Flash not avai
294. nd used to identify and analyse batches of data Supports up to 6 concurrent batches Counters User Counters can be set up and used as a part of the Events system to count an occurrence Other counters are available depending on hardware availability Eg Alarm Event Digital Input Relay Output and Pulse counters Modbus Master Modbus master enables the recorder to communicate with up to 32 Slave devices on both Ethernet and RS485 The recorder itself can also act as a slave device while also being a master Modbus master can also be used in conjunction with OPC to enable the recorder to act as a communication bridge Remote Viewer Remote Con trol Tool Extends the user interface of the recorder onto the desktop PC Providing full remote control of the recorder launched from a web browser Email optional Setup email accounts to send the following When an Alarm is triggered or an Email can be sent as a part of an Event occurring such as Alarms In Out Ack Totaliser Start Stop or Reset Digital Inputs On Off or State change TC Burnout on a specific Analogue Input channel Scheduled Events Once Inter val Specific days Month End 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 265 Specification Tables Specification Options OPC Server optional OPC Server Open Process Control Software application for realtime interfacing between servers and clients OPC is a software sta
295. ndard that defines common interfaces for data exchange between devices such as recorders controllers PCL s and Windows based applications OPC 3 0 DA amp AE compliant Totalisers and up to 96 pens can be transmitted via OPC server max poll rate 1 s Pwd Net Sync optional Password Network Synchronisation Password can be synchronised over the network a recorder can be designated as a master of a password group and other recorders can be added to that group as slaves the master will ensure all passwords are synchronised with all recorders in its group up to 32 recorders can be in a Password group this include the password Master Extra Pens 4 pens optional 4 extra pens to store and display totalised values results of calculations etc Maximum is up to 16 extra pens for the QX 12 extra pens for the QXe recorders and 48 extra pens for the SX recorder Specification table for Sterilisation The definition of Fo Po is the sterilisation pasteurisation time in minutes required to destroy a stated number of organisms with a known z at temperature T For example F18 250 represents the time in minutes required to destroy a stated number of organisms at a temperature of 250 F 121 11 C with a z 18 degrees F F values are used to compare the sterilizing values of different proc esses however F values cannot be compared unless the z values are the same When temperature is not specified for example F 8 6 it
296. ndow click on Ap ply to enable the channels to log Once the channels are in the Channels logging to selected database window they can be selected and the Edit and Delete button become active The Edit button allows the logging rate or type of logging to be changed There is also a Database Events Logging box that can be ticked that allows any events to be logged to the database using Trendbus Not available for X Series recorders Summary of Logging Changes If any changes are made using the Edit button the Sum mary of Changes button becomes active this will show the last changes made to any of the channels for this configuration only The Delete button will take the channel out of this window and put it into the window showing available channels for logging logging will stop for this channel The set up is complete and the logging to the database should start immediately To check the setup go back to the Comms Server screen 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 227 228 Communications Server Comms Server Status Screen If you have a graph open Comms Server should be showing that the recorder is operating by displaying flashing green lights in the Active column Click and highlight the recorder Click the Database logging Tab The screen should now show all the pens logging for that recorder and their log rate Figure 8 1 Comms Server Status Screen a Communications Server Administrator fel Z i Dat
297. nect segments of a LAN A hub contains multiple ports and when a packet Of data arrives at one port it is copied to the other ports so that all segments of the LAN can see all packets Switches work in a similar way but send the data directly from one port to another On a busy net work this can be quicker and can have less data collision incidents Ethernet cable to device Ethernet cable to PC Spare Ethernet ports for additional devices Ethernet Uplink option to other networks DC Power Supply 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 207 Hardware Installation Getting connected IP Address Stand alone system This is for connecting a local device direct to a PC using an Ethernet crossover cable By using a crossover cable the PC is able to receive data transmitted from the device Contact your IT systems administrator for setting up this link The TCP IP properties are displayed showing the PC s IP address and the Subnet mask Make a note of the IP Address and the Subnet mask If there is no IP address or Subnet mask displayed contact your IT systems administrator When this information is entered the next stage is to configure the device See TCP IP on page 71 Figure 8 1 Stand Alone system Switch hub Z Uplink optional to Mains other networks Mains 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK
298. neeeaeeaeeaeeaeeaes 33 Fentress a aa aes tes iaba cath cea tea asked aaah odes as ea bea 34 Options HardWate ssi sacsscsscusseisceasesisteatessesatssexesebssat EEAS sda es PEET Erria SaN ETETE 37 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Section 4 Recorder Setup ssnissccccdscstcssicsncsccicnancsdunnsasadsnencncacweetneasncsaaeceteesandaae 43 POWEEUP cecdussesscscceseccvscnicssndcvcbecddestentecsessecedceanacssveascssecoudespbessudecdscnsestansussece 43 1 Menu Access sata De TOS OnOff oee sess aod EEEE EE EEE es EAE A NESES 44 4 Time Gnd Date Settings manei ae e a E r N ead ayaesy 45 3J Firmware O PULONS ienris irene a ara at E EEE TE 45 MenuP hnanou S Help isneirnaion o a aA AN EE ORE AEE dance saat Configure Menu Setup Menu Edit Recording Repor meni siian RAAE A R AA RE A TAY OUT EA A E TEE E R AEAN E T EE RN PassWord S oa nene EE E E E E 126 DEINE Seear a E r E E A E E E 135 Alarms M enteren e ERE e i e EEES 136 Sereen MCN sees ae R A se O EEE E E R 137 Batch S tup Batch Control sssvsscsevvsevsssecsisssicaavsesetiensa dai R A 141 Recording Menu Messages Merit csr rinis t EAE E R E A e EE E RE R PERTE Process Men renra tone EEE A EEE E Stats MENU seein us cas E EE E E AE TO Fimis hen a a a a aise Section 5 Password Security oe cies speienh tis waist ecintinuaninsinanncaniadinecsinaniinnatindimatins 169 LOG On Off eerren as E aes ie ceases as ed vse ee nee eae 169 Users and GrOUDS sisina ar ER E A TAS 169 Adminis
299. nes are they must be a USB printer that shows as a standard PCL Printer Command Lan guage The system will not support multi function devices or printers that require specific drivers Avoid photo printers and printers that allow stand alone operation with cameras or media specific printers such as pictbridge There isn t a constant factor to which printers work and those that wont We recommend that you follow the guidelines outlined here and plug it in and see Examples of printers that are compatible with the system are HP Deskjet 995C HP Photosmart 7760 e HP DeskJet 895Cxi HP Laserjet 1022n HP Laserjet 1300 e HP Deskjet 970Cxi HP Deskjet 450cbi HP Laserjet 1160 HP Deskjet 6980 HP Deskjet 6940 Xerox 6120N Phaser HP Inkjet 1000 HP Business jet 1200d HP Business Inkjet 1000d HP Officejet Pro K5400 To set up your printer configuration go to Printer Menu on page 110 Iss 7 Feb08 UK 29 Electrical Installation Keyboards All keyboards are native USB keyboards English and US keyboards are recognised as US layout QWERTY for all languages except French and German keyboard layouts French and German keyboards are activated when the recorder is set to that language Cordless keyboards and mice are not supported e Dell Model SK 8115 Keyboard e IBM ACC42 with USB hubs Dell Model C BG17 Dual Cordless e IBM SK 8815 with USB hubs Keyboard and Mouse Combination e Logitech Model LX300 Cordless IBM
300. ng displayed and Clean Screen facility There are Calibrate and Touch Test features to re calibrate the screen See Screen Menu on page 137 e Batch The Batch function manages sections of data Batch markers are configured by the user and are used to identify and analyse batches of data See Batch Setup Batch Control on page 1417 e Recording Start or Stop recording Export Now will transfer data to external media such as Compact Flash or USB key See Recording Menu on page 145 e Messages The messages screen will display certain message areas Specific types of messages have been put into categories or all messages can be viewed See Mes sages Menu on page 147 e Process Controls for any process in use eg Max Mins Totals Counters User Varia bles Script Timers and Reports can be controlled from this screen See Process Menu on page 150 46 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK e Status Displays status information screens that are available to the user these will provide information for reporting and diagnostic purposes See Status Menu on page 154 e Finish When an operation is complete use the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later See Finish on page 167 e Help The Help icon appears as a question mark on all menu screens The Help files are context sensitive and will supply information for each menu screen where the icon appears See Help on page 46 Configure
301. nge Ref Accuracy Temp Stability Field Field T Cs oF C F C Cal Cal DegF Deg C B 500 to 1000 260 to 538 8 1 4 5 8 1 4 5 1000 to 3300 538 to 1816 4 0 2 2 0 01 C 2 0 1 11 E 454 to 328 270 to 200 21 6 12 21 6 12 00 328 to 94 200 to 70 3 1 1 7 0 01 C 3 1 1 7 94 to 1832 70 to 1000 1 3 0 7 0 8 0 44 J 346 to 32 210 to 0 3 1 1 7 0 01 C 0 8 0 44 32 to 2192 0 to 1200 1 2 0 7 0 63 0 35 K 454 to 94 270 to 70 36 20 0 01 C 36 20 00 94 to 2502 70 to 1372 1 8 1 0 9 0 5 R 58 to 500 50 to 260 6 7 3 7 0 01 C 6 7 3 7 500 to 1202 260 to 650 2 7 1 5 1 0 0 56 1202 to 3214 650 to 1768 2 0 1 1 1 0 0 56 s 58 to 500 50 to 260 5 9 3 3 0 01 C 5 9 3 3 500 to 1832 260 to 1000 2 7 1 5 1 0 0 56 1832 to 3110 1000 to 1710 2 0 1 1 1 0 0 56 3110 to 3214 1710 to 1768 2 5 1 4 1 0 0 56 T 454 to 346 270 to 210 9 7 5 4 0 01 C 9 7 5 4 346 to 752 210 to 400 1 8 1 0 9 0 5 E 328 to 32 200 to 0 2 2 1 2 0 01 C 1 0 0 56 32 to 1652 0 to 900 1 3 0 7 0 7 0 39 G W_W26 32 to 212 0 to 100 45 25 0 01 C 45 25 212 to 600 100 to 316 11 2 6 2 11 6 6 2 600 to 1526 316 to 830 5 0 2 8 5 0 2 78 1526 to 2759 830 to 1515 3 1 1 7 1 6 0 89 2759 to 4199 1515 to 2315 5 0 2 8 5 0 2 78 C W5 W26 32 to 356 0 to 180 4 5 2 5 0 01 C 4 5 2 5 356 to 2228 180 to 1220 3 6 2 1 8 1 0 2228 to 4199 1220 to 2315 6 7 3 7 6 66 3 7 M NiMo NiCo 58 to 698 50 to 370 2 0 1 1 0 01 C 1 0 0 56 NNM90 698 to 2570 370 to 1
302. nges ree 50V 52V 1000mV 11V 25V 26V 500mV 600mV 12V 13V 250mV 300mV 6V 6 5V 100mV 150mV 3V 3 25V 50mV 75mV 1 5V 1 6V 25mV 36mV 0 6V 0 8V 10mV 18mV 0 3V 0 4V 5mV omV Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification 256 QX and QXe recorders have one slot for digital inputs and alarm relay outputs All alarm card channels provide 240V AC isolation channel to channel and channel to recorder Digital I O channels will provide isolation to 100V AC test voltage not for mains connection The SX recorder has three available expansion slots for Digital Input Relay Alarm output cards Inputs are automatically debounced to remove switching oscillations All Digital Inputs are volt free contacts and are sampled at 10Hz max Relay Alarm Output Card Options There are two card options split into two types 4 Channel Relay Alarm Card 120 240 VAC 3 Amps rated resistive load The relay contacts are form C NO NC and includes suppression 8 Channel Relay Alarm Card 120 240V AC 3 Amps rated resistive load Two channels on the 8 Relay Alarm card can be used as digital inputs The relay contacts are form C NO NC and includes suppression The 8 amp 2 Relay Alarm card this 8 channel card will have 8 mains rated relays of which 2 of the 8 channels can be configured for use as digital inputs 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification Latched or Single Pulse The relay outputs can be set
303. nised without having to remember file names Password Protection Up to 4 levels of password protection with up to 50 different users are available Multiple levels of password protection and an audit trail of actions enhance the security of the data e Password Network Synchronisation is a credit function in the recorders that provides a means of keeping the passwords of users in sync for network connected recorders It uses a Password Master Slave setup to update passowrd changes Extended Security System option ESS provides features including entry of unique User ID s and associated passwords time out of password entry password expiration and traceability of user actions ESS is compatible with the requirements of 21CFR part 11 Events Events is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit system Events are certain conditions or operations which can be set up and logged according to the time and date of the occurrence Subsequently events can be reviewed in a list or represented on a graph An Event is made up from a Cause and an Effect For example set up a cause such as Pen 1 going into an alarm state and the effect of this could be to start a totaliser or acknowledge the alarm 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 35 36 Functions and Features Batch The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis Batch enhances the management of data collected in a non continuous proc
304. nnected Pulse Input Card The Pulse Input card connections are made via 1 x 12 way screw terminal plugs that fits into a PCB header on the rear of the unit The Pulse Input card position for the QX is shown in Figure 2 3 on page 14 and Figure 2 4 on page 15 forthe SX The Pulse Input card is not available on the QXe recorder however the 8 Digital I O option card has 4 channels that can be set as pulse inputs channels 1 to 4 The operating fre quency for pulse inputs on the Digital I O card is 1kHz max Input Low lt 1V High gt 4V to lt 50V DC 8V to 50V p p AC or Volt free input Low short circuit High open circuit 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Electrical Installation A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES Insulation from channel to channel Normally a channel can be safely connected to a hazardous voltage up to 300V AC common mode with respect to earth However where a channel is connected to a safety low voltage circuit an immediately adjacent channel must be adequately insulated from hazardous voltages between 150V AC and 300V AC max This insulation should comprise of at least 1 5mm air gap or a bar rier rated greater than 1400V AC This is to ensure that protection of the safety low voltage circuit is fully maintained Common Mode voltage is a voltage applied between the whole channel and earth not between pins on achannel 300V AC is permitted at Measurement Category CAT Il Overvoltage Category Il Fa
305. nnection speed Fast gt 5 mbps J feta Se REE See for more details Modbus profile tool ownload from data update on page 220 Disk drive PC Card r NOTE Hit F1 for help on using FTP Press the Add button to add a new recorder to the list Ftp Recorder Setup FAD BEI ene 8 Recorder Location IP Address Eg 192 168 1 1 Recorder Name IP Address fiso 221 36 33 X Series network name xs 100089 Look up IP address descriptive name for the recorder Fumacel OK Cancel Edit Remove Enter the IP address from the recorder that you noted earlier If you don t know it select the Look up IP Address button The other method is to select the Find Device button This will search for all X Series recorders on the network using their Network ID eg xs nnnnnn where nnnnnn is the recorder s serial number Give a name for the recorder This should be something recognisable all recorders should be given different names Press OK On pressing OK then Done you will return to the External Import dialog box as above Check that Setup only and from Network FTP are still selected Then drop down the list and select the recorder you have just added The recorder name and IP address are in the list Finally select Import Trend Server will download the setup from the recorder and this will be displayed in a setup window Press OK and th
306. nnel and channel to recorder Digital Input Outputs will provide isolation to 100V AC test voltage not for mains connection All digital inputs have volt free contacts and are sampled at 10Hz max 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Electrical Installation The QX and the QXe recorders have only one slot available for digital inputs and relay out puts for either a 4 or 8 channel Alarm Relay card or an 8 or 16 channel Digital I O card fitted in slot G the position is identified on the rear panel The 16 channel Digital I O card is not available on the QXe recorders The SX can have up to three Alarm Relay cards fitted in any combination of Alarm Relay card or Digital I O cards The first Alarm Relay card or Digital I O card is fitted in slot G any additional cards will locate in positions H and I A WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES Digital Input Output card channels must not be connected to any hazardous live volt ages no higher than 30V AC rms or 60V DC Alarm Relay Card channels Alarm Relay Card channels can be connected to hazardous voltages up to 300V AC at Measurement Category CAT II Overvoltage Category II Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury NOTICE For 12 and 16 way connectors torque setting 0 4 Nm 3 5lb in Do not over tighten Recommended wire size for termination connector is 22 12 AWG 22 14 SWG 4 and 8 Alarm Relay Cards The 24 way connector for the Alarm Relay Car
307. nnel to channel Normally a channel can be safely connected to a hazardous voltage up to 300V AC common mode with respect to earth However where a channel is connected to a safety low voltage circuit an immediately adjacent channel must be adequately insulated from hazardous voltages between 150V AC and 300V AC max This insulation should comprise of at least 1 5mm air gap or a barrier rated greater than 1400V AC This is to ensure that protection of the safety low voltage circuit is fully maintained Common Mode voltage is a voltage applied between the whole channel and earth not between pins on a channel 300V AC is permitted at Measurement Category CAT Il Overvoltage Category Il Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 21 22 Electrical Installation Analogue Output Channel Numbers The Analogue Output cards are either 2 or 4 channels using a connector that only takes up half the length of the connector slot Looking from the rear of the unit the Analogue Out con nector is on the left of the Analogue slot with a blanking plate on the right Table 2 4 Analogue Output card Card Position Slot B Slot E Slot F Channel number 9 to 12 33 to 36 41 to 44 Analogue Output Connection Details Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Loop NC Loop Loop NC Loop NC Not Loop Loop NC Loop Loop NC co
308. nputs Select to Include or Do Not Include this option Include Digital Outputs Select to Include or Do Not Include this option 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Footer Style Choose between one or two lines of footer at the end of the report The extra footer lines give you the option to add fields such as Cheked By and Date etc See Fig ure 4 7 on page 153 Email Tick to enable the Email function See Figure 4 7 Email Report example on page 153 The report is sent as a Word document and to view all the options eg Footers you may have to change your View to see these options View gt Print layout Recipients only available when the Email function has been enabled Select from a list of email recipients Email addresses and Server names must be entered in Email on page 78 Print Set to a tick to enable the Print function The printer settings must be set up before this feature will operate see Printer Menu on page 110 Export Device Select from a list of options if you require your report to be exported to an external media device or select Do not export The removable media device needs to be fit ted to the recorder when the report is run and have enough memory available When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Run a Report Once the report details have been completed in the repor
309. ns Select the pen and the number of alarm to be acknowledged Email Is an event effect that will send an Email when triggered by a Cause Eg Cause Totaliser Starts Effect Email is sent ee Sub Type Auto Single Line User or Multiline User Auto will enter what the Event was eg Scheduled or Alarm triggered Single Line User can have up to 69 characters of text or use Embedded Process Values on page 89 Multiline User can have up to 80 characters per line with up to 1000 characters including spaces carriage returns and line feed in total They can also include embedded process variable Maths variables as embedded vari ables on page 91 can be used in an email ee Recipients Enter email recipients from the list If no email recipients are present in the list they must be entered first in the Email menu see Email on page 78 Embed Screenshot This feature allows a screen shot of the current screen to be attached to an out going email the attachment is in bitmap bmp format 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK ee Email Text Only available when Single Line User is selected as a Sub Type Enter text here to add a Mark on Chart when the Email is sent Email Template Only available when Multiline User is selected These are sets of text scripts that can be pre written and assigned to an Email Select a template from the list To set up templates for multiline text see Email on page 78 Figu
310. ns The Settings button is used to enable screen cycling alarm screens and replay screens The Appearance button is used to change the chart background colour for normal charts and charts in replay mode Screens Main Menu gt Configure gt Layout gt Edit gt Screens This section allows the user to configure and modify the standard screens on the recorder The Edit button will produce a list of available screens in the recorder In each screen you can enable check and change the screen properties The Edit button may display a warning message if the Commit Later option has been select ed This means changes to the configuration have been made but the changes have not been committed to the recorder See Commit Later on page 167 Select a standard or a new screen to view the following menu list e Name Select to Change the name of the Standard Screen 22 characters max includ ing spaces Enabled Toggle On and Off to activate this Standard Screen e Template Type Select from a list of pre defined templates ee DPMs Select which pen is displayed Activate to display Max Min readings and or activate to display Total values ee DPMs and Bars Select which pen is displayed Activate to display Max Min readings and or activate to display Total values ee Charts and DPMs Select which pen is displayed 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 121 122 ee Charts and Scales Select which pen is displayed Select and activat
311. ns first time password setup and database tool information Supplementary documentation to accompany these recorders are Table 1 1 Supplementary documentation Manual Part number Trend Analysis software user manual 43 TV 25 25 Notes e The contents of this manual are correct at the time of issue The contents may change at any time without prior notification This is due to continuous develop ments to the recorder and it s functionality e Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this document however should there be any anomalies found please contact your supplier e All rights are reserved No part of this manual should be copied or repro duced stored on a retrieval system or transmitted in any form without the prior permission from your supplier Trademarks e Microsoft MS DOS Windows Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows CE are all registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Compact Flash and CF logo are trademarks of the Compact Flash Association CFA For the purpose of this manual the and symbols will not follow their own trade mark names or registered trademark names in every instance Company names and Product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their individual owners 43 TV 25 30 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 1 Safety Safety The X Series range of instruments is compliant with the requirements of BS EN 61010 1 200
312. ns Menu on page 62 Up to 6 batches can be run concurrently To start a batch enter information in all the required screens that have previously set up in the Batch Menu on page 107 For batch mode state and count in Maths scripts see Maths Variable and Function Ta bles on page 272 For batch mode state and count in embedded variables see Embea ded examples on page 90 Select a Group e Batch Name Name to Identify the batch up to 19 characters User ID Identification of user starting the batch If Passwords are active on the recorder then the User ID page will be skipped for user entry and will be automatically entered up to 19 characters Lot No Add a batch Lot No if required up to 11 characters Desc Enter a description of what the batch is up to 17 characters Comment Add any further comments Lot No Desc and Comment are the default field names The field names can be changed in General Batch Properties on page 107 If Allow Direct Access has been setup in the Batch Menu on page 107 then a Barcode Reader can be used to make entries for all the items listed in this menu See Barcodes for Batch on page 144 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 141 142 Figure 4 5 Batch Setup screens Name Batch 017 User ID 017 Enter Batch Name Lot No Loti Desc Start Batch 17 Batch 017 Enter Additonal Comments optional pe ma pu aea Press the Finish button if al
313. nssanivaassnaiuasianavanss 237 The Trend Analysis Software Suite c cccccccccscsescscssessesesseseesessesenseseesseeesseeeeesaees 237 System Reguit ements orrian A E 238 Section 10 Spares LiSt iis cui cinaiancassncnanrinsacadianinaieninetianeianmaeanaitdamiwadanneioned 239 OX RECON ET essai E EEE E O RE 239 SX Recorden nanio e ie a ada E EE REA E bars dnnivesees 243 OXe REcCOrdET orenen aa E E T E ies dete is hastens R 248 Section 11 Instrument Care and Maintenance sssssssennnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 253 Instrument Care and Manintenance sessesessesessecosseeoesessoseesosoesosossseeoesesossee 253 CL CATIA INSU ONS srs te EREA ET OOT E 253 BOCKIIQNIS orcii oei eriin EE SEE EKA E ERETNA 253 Operating TemperatuTe cinner ieas E EO TERRERO 253 Touch S CHOON arisin iai a a a oa 253 C librdti Ot ornoen a ETETEA EAE E TEE 254 Section 12 Technical Data amp Specifications ccccseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 255 Field IO Specification Analogue Input csccccsscsssssscescesscecscsesssscscssessscesessnsssessnessossessesssossesssecssoess Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification ee sesesseeseseeseseesoeeesoeceesoeoosseeoeseeoesee 256 Relay Alarm Output Card Options ccccccccsccscscssseseseeenesseesenesseeecseneeseseceeeseneeseeaes 256 Digital Inp t Cards ss sccsccsssssessessesisssessessoiestssiesinsesconsosesssonsonsoss ssassesasontaseassaseveasesss 257 Specification Tables rccccccscscsssscsccccssscsccssccsscssssscc
314. nt Effects ecenin iS 92 Discard Configuration oecccsccccccccccscccceeeeces 167 Display Alert Event Effects esessessesessessesseseesreseoressessersessoseeseesosse 95 Display Overview sssrin 34 Displaying Totals ssie 70 E ESS Extended Security System s 170 Edit Custom Screens Edit Layout Ansuicciiowendanadinneindoke Add Screen me Appearance Delete Screen iis SCIGOMS lt siscissscesassicasnsectoscvscanvesbeuves EEEE Ee ait SEMINO S raean NEEE Edit Recording ccacitend csasudeahaneatahonncaeh Edit Recording Menu Scheduled Export wo cece eeeeseeeeeseneeeeeens 114 Storage Alarm SLOLAGES BIAS eedi a e Edit Screen Properties Custom Screens Standard Screens Edit Setup ssssossissssssssrsssesresssressrsrsssoresrsrossesressn Edit Standard Screens cssssssscssssesssessenne 137 Electrical Installation 24V DC Input AC POWEM sorra manon e aa otp ECEE EANA 14 Alarm Relay Card Connections 0 24 Analogue Input Card oi eeeeeseeseseeeeneeeees 16 Analogue Output Card Cables senedinin Comms Connections aii DG POWER siipien ar A a a Eie Digital IO Card Connections oo eee 24 FUSES surne noaee E AES Installation Category Pulse Input Card isncicirinsinnnnoanniia SPCO Relay cetenueniennr aii Signal Wei Bs sis acd ey dessvadtensassehadscotssbsseeactestaseasts Transmitter Power Supply Card oo 24 Email e ore e a R Event Effects cicsncseecicstessisassedinaandetinives
315. nt no US 6 405 155 B2 developed as an alternative to the more standard methods of recording data Paperless Recorders are primarily used for exception recording They spend most of their life trending and recording straight lines Fuzzy Logging has been developed to improve the efficiency of data storage and is particularly effective in exception recording examples where normal operation consists of generally static inputs Fuzzy Logging looks for straight lines in the data stream in real time whether they are hor izontal climbing or descending A straight line made up of say 10 points can be equally well represented by 2 points one at either end the other 8 points are redundant Fuzzy logging works by creating straight lines in the data and discarding redundant points What s it for Sears To help the user in the trade off between Scan Rate Disk capacity and Recording Time after all the Pie is only so big Fuzzy Logging has been developed to help maximise all three sections in effect increas ing the size of the Pie The Recording Pie Scan Rate E Storage Capacity The result is a technique that delivers a host Recording Period of real world benefits over the more traditional recording methods 1 Disks take longer to fill changed less frequently less site visits 2 Faster scan rates can be used for any given disk size giving greater resolution on the process
316. nter the number at which you want the counter to Start At Rollover Enter the number at which you want the counter to Rollover At The default maximum Rollover value is 3 3e 38 When the count reaches the rollover number entered it will restart the count from your Start At number Once a User Counter is setup it has to be assigned something to count eg as a part as an Event See User Counters on page 88 Preset Markers Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Events Counters gt Preset Markers Set up marker text that can be used to mark the chart as a part of an Event Effect or manual added from the process screen as a Mark on Chart The mark on chart functionality has been extended to include the use of 20 separate preset markers With some markers configured when using mark on chart the user has the option of starting with blank text the previously entered text or one of the preset markers Preset markers are also used in the Mark on chart effect and the Alert system effect See Error Alert on page 99 To add text to a marker select the next available marker and enter the text via the on screen keypad Hit the tick mark to accept the text and then go to Finish to confirm 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Time Sync Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Events Counters gt Time Sync This provides Time Synchronisation on recorders on a Digital Input Enabled Select the tick to
317. nth the Current average pen val ue or Do Not Include Average values Pens Pens only available when either Curent Pen Value or Max Mins is set to Included Select which pens this report will be run on Totals Select this to include the Total values of each selected pen All pens or group of pens depending what has been chosen in the Selection Type option The report can give you the pen Total value for every Hour Day Week Month the Current total pen value or Do Not Include Total values Totaliser Pens only available when Multiple Pens is selected for Selection Type This will display any pens that have been set up as a totaliser pen See Displaying Totals on page 70 Messages Select this to include the Messages of each selected pen All pens or group of pens depending what has been chosen in the Selection Type option The report can give you the pen Messages for the Last Hour Last Day Last Week Last Month All messages or Do Not Include Messages Message Lists Select which type of messages are required for your report Alarm Sys tem Diagnostic Security or User messages One or more selections can be made For more information see Message Types on page 147 Counters Select which type of Counters are required for your report Alarm User Event Digital Digital Input Relay Output or Pulse One or more selections can be made For more information see Events Counters on page 82 Include Digital I
318. o 36 for slot I Output Output only The relay outputs can be set to be either Latched or Single Pulse A Latched relay will be maintained in its active state until the trigger source has returned to anon alarm state unless acknowledged For Single Pulse the relay will go active for a period of time specified by the user then return to a non active state The time out period remains independent of the length of time the active state remains If the output is set to Single Pulse when the alarm is activated the signal will display a single pulse for the duration set See Pulse Duration The alarm will trigger again when it goes back into an active alarm state NOTICE Outputs that are set to Single Pulse should not be used as a part of a maths expression as it can cause spurious values Pulse Duration Output only Available when Single Pulse is selected as an Output Specify the pulse length in seconds from 0 1 100ms to 6480 108 minutes in 0 1 sec ond increments Select and enter the pulse length e Failsafe Output only Toggles On and Off Each relay channel can be independently selected with the fail safe option This will invert the state of the relay output With Fail safe Off normally open NO relays have open contacts when the power is off and open contacts when there is no active alarm The contacts will close when an associ ated alarm goes active With Failsafe On normally open relays have closed contacts
319. o activate a short cut to Settings such as change the chart speed 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 187 188 Menu Bar At the top of each process screen is the Menu bar Recorder ID and Name alternates with the Screen Name a D F Menu 1 18h 70 Screen Date and Time Menu This gives direct access to the Menu System to set up the recorder See Section 4 Re corder Setup on page 43 Alarm bell 1 The second button shows the Alarm status When the alarm bell is green this means there are no active alarms If the bell is red then an alarm is active and the number of active alarms will display below Press this button to produce the Alarm menu bar Here there is an Acknowledge button to confirm any latched alarms that require acknowledgment See Alarms Menu on page 66 There is a View button that displays all pens currently with alarms set up The De tail button will take you straight to the Alarms menu see Alarms Menu on page 136 Time Left 18h This button shows how much time is left before data will fill the internal memory and an ex port of the memory to an external device is required before data is overwritten Select this button to go to the Recording screen to export the data now or set up a timed export using the Scheduled option See Recording Menu on page 145 If the Time Left button shows two green arrows this means that the memory buffer is full and the oldest data ha
320. o the previous menu Menu Path As each button is selected in the menu system a menu path will appear at the top of the screen to enable the user to know where they are in the system The user can select these buttons to return to previous menus and enables the user to jump back more than one menu at a time Menu path dit Setup Select to go back to previous menus Serial No 100089 Credits 30 A grey arrows indicates a further sub menu Optio ode 1000890302109 Options 25 Credits in Use 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 45 Help Help is available on all menu screens and is context sensitive from each screen The Help icon will reside either in the top right or bottom right on all menu screens All the Help files have a Home button that will take you to the Help System main index Navigating in the help does not stop the logging Main Menu Main Menu Se WE Select a button Configure Alarms Screen to take you to the next menu D gt a Recording Messages 102 e Configure Configure the recorder through the Setup Layout Passwords and Settings menus See Configure Menu on page 47 e Alarms Acknowledge Alarms Alarm configuration and their associated condition and View the current alarm status See Alarms Menu on page 136 e Screen The Screen Menu includes an Edit button to configure Pen Channel mapping Replay previous data Screen List to change the screen currently bei
321. of 20 local varia bles per script Compact Flash free storage CFFREE Returns the percentage of free storage space space available on the Compact Flash card CJC CJCn Get the Board CJC value N 1 to 6 Returns value in Degrees F C or K depending on the localisation setting CJC in Degrees C CJCnC Get the Board CJC value N 1 to 6 Always returns value in degrees C Comms Variables CVn Get the Comms variable n 1 to 96 Digitals Dn Get the value of Digital Input or Digital output n 1 to 48 Digital Input bit pattern DIOn Get the 16 bit pattern from the DIO slots where n 1 2 or 3 Slot G H amp respectively Returned as a 16 bit word 0 to 65535 A channel config ured as an output is set to 0 EC1 to EC 20 EC1 Event Counters 1 to 20 File Transfer Protocol FTPHRS Returns the number of hours of safe recording recording hours left time available Glbv GLBVx Get the global variable x This is a global varia ble accessible to all scripts There is a maximum of 200 global variables HPC1 to HPC48 HPC1 High Pulse count using Pulse cards 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Full Maths amp Script Processing Table 14 1 Maths Variable Table Maths Variables Syntax Description Internal memory hours left INTHRS Returns the amount of hours left until the inter nal memory starts to recycle over write IOC1 to l OC48 IOC1 Digital Input Output counters for Digital in and relay out L
322. ogin Totals No Login Counters No Login User Variables Operator Script Timers Operator Reports Operator Totals Menu No Login required Start Stop and Reset Totals buttons require Technician access Permission Area 15 Max Min Menu No Login required Reset Max Min Reset Max and Reset Min buttons require Technician access Permission Area 16 View requires No Login Permission Area 4 View requires No Login Permission Area 6 Counters Menu No Login required User Variables i Totals Counters Operator access Permission Area 41 Reports Finish Reset button for all Counters require Technician access Permission Area 14 U n User Variables j Modify and View buttons View requires No Login Permission Area 7 Script Timers Operator access Permission Area 47 P Reports Operator access Permission Area 45 Run and View Archive reports Reset All Engineer access Permission area 46 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Figure 5 9 Default password access from the General Menu General Menu Supervisor access Permission Area 20 General F Ident Error Alert and Factory require Identity i Engineer access Permission Area 28 Batch requires Supervisor access Permis sion Area 22 Printer requires Supervisor access Permis sion Area 21 Group
323. omms Services lt 4 Comms Services id Sis E FTP Finish 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 73 74 Modbus Communications protocol for Ethernet and RS485 See Modbus on page 75 Web Browse your recorder using the web browse feature See Web on page 78 Email Setup email accounts to send alarm and event information See Email on page 78 SNTP Simple Network Time Protocols is a protocol for synchronising the clock on the recorder with a Network Server See SNTP on page 80 FTP File Transfer Protocol used to transfer data to and from the recorder See FTP File Transfer Protocol on page 81 Peers Sets up the recorder to be identified on a network Peer to Peer See Peers on page 81 Standard Communication Interfaces Rear Ethernet Communication Port The rear of the recorder is fitted with an Ethernet10 100 port and RS485 port which sup ports RS485 Modbus protocol and TCP IP Modbus Web Browser See Web on page 78 OPC Server connectivity to third party software OPC Server connection must be ena bled by selecting the OPC option in Credits on page 101 For more details on OPC Servers see OPC Interface Open Process Control on page 233 Rear RS485 Port A Comms option card and expansion card are required for the QXe recorder RS485 2 wire to support Modbus RTU The RS485 connector plugs into the back of the recorder Recorders can be setup as e
324. on page 164 This screen will help to identify which area to focus on if the recorder connections are not doing what you expected When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 77 78 Web Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Comms gt Comms Services gt Web The Web browse function is enabled disabled from this menu Select this to enable and al low the recorder to be browsed on a web page Internet access is required The Web button is password protected if passwords are enabled For web browsing information see Web Browser on page 234 and Internet Security Settings on page 235 See Level Permissions on page 173 for information on how to Web Browse and have full remote control of your recorder from your PC The Remote View function is a firmware option that is activated from the Factory menu gt Credits on page 101 Email Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Comms gt Comms Services gt Email Set up this email menu in order to send emails for the following 1 When an Alarm is triggered see Email Alarms in the Alarms Menu on page 66 2 An Email can be sent as a part of an Event occurring such as Alarms In to Out of or Acknowledged e Totaliser Start Stop or Reset Digital Inputs On Off or State change
325. one Medium Safe browsing and still functional LJ Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned Activex controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites Custom Level 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Reset custom settings Reset to Medium 235 236 Internet Security Settings NOTICE Please ensure any firewall settings on the desktop are permissive of the Comms Server Trend Server and that ports set up in the configuration default 8955 TCP and 8956 UDP are allowed passage through the firewall 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Section 9 PC Software Suite The Trend Analysis Software Suite The Trend Analysis Software Suite complements the capabilities of the X Series record ers by providing the benefits of viewing configuration network communications database manage ment data analysis and report generation using a personal computer It ties the process together providing for real time or FTP communications with the recorders through a Local Area Network LAN Trend Viewer This is the standard software provided with the recorder that displays and prints data imported from the storage media used by the recorder Trend Manager This is an advanced data analysis archiving software package providing full configuration of the re corders Trend Manager is a stand alone package that delivers to the user total recorder configu ration all
326. orary User entry 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Level Permissions Table 5 1 Default Level Permissions Default user levels of access to areas within the recorder menu system Permission Area Admin Engineer Supervisor Technician Operator aia Perm Area 1 Messages v v v v v v Perm Area 2 Screen v v v v v A Perm Area 3 Status v v v v v v Perm Area 4 View Totals v v v v v v Perm Area 5 View Alarms v v v v v v Perm Area 6 View Max v v v v v v Min Perm Area 7 View v v v v v v Counters Perm Area 8 Acknowl v v v v v edge Alarms Perm Area 9 Configure v v v v y Alarms Perm Area 10 Batch v v v v v Control Perm Area 11 Recording v v v v v Perm Area 12 Change v v v v v Password Perm Area 13 Main Con v v v v v figue Menu Perm Area 14 Configure v v v v Counters Perm Area 15 Configure v v v v Totals Perm Area 16 Configure v v v v Max Min Perm Area 17 Load Save v v v va Setups Perm Area 18 Main Setup v v v v Menu Perm Area 19 Edit Setup v v v Perm Area 20 General v v v Setup Menu Perm Area 21 Printer Setup v v v 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 173 Table 5 1 Default Level Permissions Default user levels of access to areas within the recorder menu system ea g mr No Login Permission Area Admin
327. order Allow Download Tick to allow FTP transfer from the recorder to Trend Analysis software e Log Messages Tick to add a message to the messages list when an FTP transfer is performed Mark Chart Can only be active when Log Messages is enabled Tick to mark the chart when an FTP transfer is performed Refer to Section 8 Communication on page 205 in this manual and the Trend Anal ysis software manual for setting up FTP transfer Peers The Peer services communication function sets up the recorder so it can be recognised on a network containing other X Series recorders This means that multiple recorders will be able to discover other recorders on the same local network in order to share data between them For example basic unit information such as firmware version recorder name and net work identity This will be used mainly with the Trend Analysis software to allow discovery of recorders in order to transfer data via FTP or Modbus Enabled tick to enable e Set Number Default to set 1 this should not have to be changed unless a lot of recorders are being used on the same network Start Port Default port number 8955 End Port Default port number 8970 The port numbers have been specially selected for this type of network communications It is recommended that the ports are not changed unless specifically requested by your IT net work administrator If this is changed on the recorder it must also
328. ork email address or this could be a generic name used to identify the recorder Password Enter your password associated with your user name If you have a system where the log in password expires and requires you to change it periodically you will need to update the logon password in the recorders when you are forced to change your PC pass word User Address Your network email address Or this could be a generic name used to iden tify the recorder No spaces Recipients Address Enter up to 12 email addresses of the destination you want the email to be sent to Templates These are user defined templates containing email text If you require standard text to be sent out in an email then set them up here and give it a template name These templates can be used with the events function to send an email as an effect of an occurrence See Event Effects on page 89 Select a template from the list add a Subject heading up to 50 characters and Message Body text as you would for a normal email Type into the message body text box up to 80 characters per line and up to 100 lines of text can be entered including Embedded Process Values on page 89 This will include specific pen data to your email Contact your IT Administrator for advice on entering Server name requirements Figure 4 6 Templates for Email using Embedded Values Comms proms Email Memplates Fenvlates Message Body Subject Pen 1 Temperature Test
329. ort information will already be inserted If the screen is selected from the icon or Communications Port heading then the comms port will need to be assigned Select the device ID number if necessary from the drop down menu The next section is Database Configuration a list of connected database servers and a list of databases that are currently being logged to In this section is a window showing the channels available to be logged As channels are selected from this window three additional buttons become active Add Channel selection select each channel for logging Add all Channels for logging and Clear Channel selection 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Communications Server Add Channels for Logging As each channel is selected or all channels depending on the button selected the Logging Channel Configuration box appears so the Log Rate and Type of logging can be set for each channel individually or all channels If all channels are added the next box will ask how often you want these channels to be logged log rate this can be a sample every second to one sample every 24 hours This selection will apply to all channels If channels are added one at a time using the Add Channel Selection button the same log rate box comes up but a different log rate can be set for each channel When all the required channels have been added click OK When the channels have been selected they will appear in the bottom wi
330. out option is available if the user enters the incorrect password for a preset number of times in a row the account must be de activated and only an Administrator can re activate the account The account can be reactivated in 2 ways Retry amp Preserve Password Reset retries unlock and preserve password allowing user to have another try Retry amp Reset Password Reset retries unlock and reset password which must be changed on first login 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 171 172 User Interface requirements No Activity Timeout A no activity timeout programmable from 20 to 3600 seconds which will automatically log out a user after a defined period of inactivity at the menu system or web page Level Names The level names such as Operator Technician Supervisor Engineer are for internal refer ence and are displayed as defaults it is possible for the user to change the group names to suit their personnel structure This is stored in the policy set up for the Password configura tion Audit Trail A full audit trail is available and is stored as a message log Trail Rules The audit trail cannot be turned off and will always be generated for the password system Audit Trail Entries Audit trail is generated for the following actions e User log On Off and source Recorder Web e Failed password attempts e Areas where access was attempted but denied e Password expiry e Inactivity timeouts auto logouts e Temp
331. ove Figure 8 10 Internet Security on page 235 shows an example from Internet Explorer 6 on a Windows XP machine The settings shown are for Internet access If the device is to be accessed in an intranet scenario then the same has to be done for local intranet option Firewall settings If this device is sitting on an enterprise network with a firewall in place then the firewall should be configured to allow all requests on port 80 and port 976 for remote control Ac tiveX There is also one port for FTP control and one for OPC which should be opened Access to the firewall settings will differ depending on what firewall is installed Active X Control Depending on your set up and if passwords are active a dialog box will appear for Internet Explorer Digitally Signed Active X Control if prompted select Yes Access to the firewall settings will differ depending on what firewall is installed Figure 8 10 Internet Security SS ee ES E General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings Security Settings amp 06 Internet Internet 4 This zone contains all Web sites you haven t placed in other zones Security level for this zone Settings Q Disable Restricted Enable sites A Download signed Activex controls Disable Local intranet Trusted sites Move the slider to set the security level for this z
332. owing the user to archive graph print and export data It also allows files to be exported using comma separated variables CSV format that can be imported into most computer software Trend Server This is a fully network aware software package for real time viewing and archiving of data with com munications to the recorder It supports all the capabilities of Trend Manager plus real time data acquisition FTP File Transfer Protocol and web browser access Trend Server provides secure multi level multi user access to the recorder data by various departments with security Standard fea tures of Trend Server include data archive tools Email set up and alarming graphing print import and export data facilities Trend Manager with OPC Server provides the same functions as the Trend Server but in cludes the added function of an integrated OPC Server to allow easy interfacing to third party HMI soft ware packages that support an OPC Client This provides a real time interface between servers and clients Modbus Profile Configuration Tool this is a tool that comes as part of the TrendServer Pro software that allows the user to set up Modbus Device Profiles for use by the Communications Server It allows the user to set up other Modbus devices other than the X Series recorders to get real time data into TrendServer Pro Communications Server The Communication Server is supplied with Trend Server It manages real time communications distr
333. p The amount of time since the recorder was last turned on e Last Setup Modified displays the last Day Month and Time the setup was last modi fied Total On time How much time the recorder has had the power turned on e Total Off time How much time the recorder has had the power turned off e Longest Off time How long was the longest time period the recorder was powered off Lithium cell life Approximately how much battery time is left e Backlight Life Approximately how many hours of Back light time left e Compact Flash How many times the Compact Flash card has been inserted Lowest temperature Displays the lowest ambient temperature detected so far Highest temperature Displays the highest ambient temperature detected so far Al last factory cal When the last factory calibration was made to this Analogue Input card Eg in card slot A Al last user cal When the last user calibration was made to this Analogue Input card Eg in slot position A input 1 All channels will be listed per channel 158 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Al last Factory cal AI last user cal 4 4 AI last user cal 4 1 AI last user cal 4 2 Al last user cal 4 3 Al last user cal 4 4 Relay 1 cycle s Relay 2 cycle s Relay 3 cycle s Relay 4 cycle s Fixed Fri Oct OF 13 50 24 5132 Fri Oct OF 13 50 24 5132 Fri Oct OF 13 50 24 5132 Fri Oct OF 13 50 24 5132 Fri Oct OF 13 50 24 5132 Fri Oct OF 1
334. page 84 If in doubt contact your IT Administrator for advice When complete go to Finish gt Commit to implement the new set up Groups Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Groups This menu is used for re naming the groups Groups are used as a part of the concurrent batch system Each batch is associated with a group pens are assigned to a group and all the pens within group 1 will belong to the batch that is controlled by group 1 See Batch Menu on page 107 The same pen can only be associated with one group To add a pen to a Group see Pens Menu on page 62 Groups of pens can also be used in order to e Acknowledge Alarms in pen groups e Reset Max Min Reset Max or Reset Min in pen groups Start Stop and Reset Totals in pen groups When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 111 Screen Menu Screen Setup Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Screen Set up the recorder s screen configuration L3 Screen Setup A i _ 2 Screen Saver Charts Brightness Finish Screen Saver In this menu you can configure the Screen Saver functions See Screen Saver on page 112 e Charts In this menu you can set the Fast Medium and Slow chart speeds See Charts on page 113 e Brightness Adjust the brightness of the s
335. pester e ester Software Installation Comms Sound Effects Set VOLUME norena eE E AE Update Sounds oe Spares List sssi OX e r a s SX Portable Case n se Specification Tables Specifications ars csrvesscsscssssseassasvnyearcosiqesetasanisnawieenies Standard Communications Interfaces 205 Start Up ossessi Static Electricity Safety za Status Ment rcescssiascecpencsesisnctesnsasiatsneeseviaincviielsiis Alarm Digital IO sssssessesesesesesisssirssrssrisrrersrereresen Analogue In we eeeeeeeeeees ae Analogue Out wu COMMS seemne renak ae Diagnostics diiss oreas diie ra aiian arei Eyent Statis secourus General Status oo eee Hardware Status TO Cards ii innost mii Mamt nance o ereraa cere eE E Medid osrstenie EERROR KEES ANER AETS QPUODS sieneranincnen Pen Overview Te Pulse Inputs oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Recording eee eseseeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeteteeeeeees SYSTEM casscsvesssesedtvprlesdiadenssvevsesees AG Sterilisation sona Storage Alarm Storage Bias ssis Storage Media Format BUUS earn n EE EO E Symbols Safety ssssssssssirsssissssrrsssrrrssrrsssrresnnss 2 System Ev nt Causes neoion a tni 86 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK System Menu General Status serenor EEE 155 IO Cards Options System Messages sisi System Requirements System SIAS snae En REA T TC Burn Out Event Causes poncessnstinins 86 TCP IP rerea Ee EERE eeusiasratiaait DNS WINS MDNS IP Address eee
336. plays its individual settings Analog In 13 A413 RT PT100 10Hz Select a numbered chan nel to edit the configura Analog In 14 414 Volts 450 SH2 3c tion of each input i ee e Enabled Toggle On and Off Analog In 12 A12 TC Type K 2Hz P e Type Select this for a list of available Signal Inputs e Sample Rate Select this for a list of available Analogue Input sample speeds A Fast Scanning range of 50Hz 20ms is available as a firmware option not available for the QXe recorder See Firmware Credit System on page 201 Arranged in 2 banks of 3 inputs and sample rate must be the same within each bank only for QXe recorder 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Range Ohms Volts and Amps only Toggle between Preset and User Defined The Preset option will make available a list of Range Types or select User Defined to specify High and Lower Limits Range Type Ohms Volts and Amps only Only available when Range is set to Pre set Select for a list of available ranges The factory default range is 12V See User Defined Maximum Input Ranges on page 256 e Damp Level The damping filter is an advanced algorithm offering improved response over more traditional methods It works by producing configurable levels of damping but at the same time being able to respond rapidly to large input changes Enter the Damp Level in Engineering Units Figure 4 2 Effects of Damping and Rollin
337. progress during the time when a Scheduled export is to occur the scheduled export will hold off until the manual export is finished Storage Bias Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt Edit Recording gt Storage Bias An adjustable slider can be used to determine how much internal flash memory is allocated for storing chart data and how much internal flash memory is allocated to storing logged da ta The User can adjust the slider to increase and decrease the internal flash memory stor age allocation Displayed under the Total Available Space bar is the amount of internal flash memory allo cated to chart and log data This will update as you move the slider The amounts shown display how much time it will take to fill the internal flash memory allocations at the current chart speed before the data will start to be recycled The default for the slider time coverage wise is set to not have any bias to either chart or logged data The recorder is set to balance time coverage wise the chart and logged data equally depending on how many pens are enabled and what current chart speeds are set As you move the slider to the right towards Chart you will notice the allocated internal flash memory space for the chart data will increase in the bar above the slider As you move the slider to the left towards Log you will notice an increase in the internal flash memory for the Log data in the bar above the slider 43 TV 25 33 GLO
338. r has 11 different chart speeds There are 3 categories that can be set Slow Medium and Fast From each of those categories the actual speed of the chart can be selected Figure 4 12 Chart Speed selection 6000mrm h 1200mm h 600mm h 20mm h v Cancel P 300mm h v Cancel P Fast Speed Medium Speed Slow Speed e Fast Speed 60mm h 120mm h 300mm h 600mm h 1200mm h and 6000mm h 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK 113 e Medium Speed 10mm h 20mm h 30mm hr 60mm hr and 120mm h e Slow Speed 1mm h 5mm h and 10mm h 20mm h Once the charts speeds have been set up in this menu go to a process screen displaying data on achart and touch the screen This will activate the Settings menu in the top right of the screen select this to display the 3 categories set See Chart Speeds on page 195 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Brightness Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Screen gt Brightness Set the recorder s screen brightness using the instant brightness slider Default screen brightness is 80 Adjustable between 10 and 100 of full brightness Set the brightness level tick to agree then go to Finish Commit to permanently apply the change For information on increasing the display life by reducing backlight brightness see Back lights on page 253 E
339. r access Permission Area 29 Services Permission Area 29 TCP IP Permission Area 33 Network Admin Permission Area 29 lt 4Comms Services Finish Comms Services Engineer ac cess Permission Area 29 Modbus Permission Area 30 Web Permission Area 31 Email Permission Area 34 SNTP Permission Area 32 FTP Permission Area 31 Peers Permission Area 29 Figure 5 12 Default password access from the Web page General Pens Alarms Hardware Remote Viewer Info EI Support E Sales 0001 QX 2336 Screen 15May 06 12 03 02 Website Take Control Web page Engineer access View Status Permission Area 37 Full Control Permission Area 39 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Figure 5 13 Default password access to clear a pop up Alert Internal Memory Full Thu Apr 19 13 24 44 ged data is being lost Clear Pop up Alert Technician access To OK or clear the error alert message Technician permission level is required Permission area 42 ens 6 3e 01 Pen 5 bh eh Pen 6 48 98 Pen 7 14 64 Pen 8 0 00 Figure 5 14 Default password access to use the Context menu i cE df CD 09 Jun OF er ie 03 MEDS ETT 100 0 13 24 L deg Fast 600mm h IRA PS og Context menu Technician access AEN Touch any chart process screen to 0 00 3 20 05 produce the Settings button in the top aT right of the
340. r between other devices and peripherals FPLB Floating Point Little Endian Byte Swapped Format amp FP B Floating Point Big Endian Format are standard notations Slave ID This is a unique Modbus ID Address used by the recorder to identify Modbus messages Applications that talk to the recorder with Modbus will need to know this number to return messages to the device If you are using the Communication Server on TrendServer the same Slave ID number must be entered 1 254 RS485 Baud Rate Select this for a list of available Baud Rates This is the speed in bps bits per second at which data is transferred Byte Options Select this button for a list of available Byte Options The Byte Options consist of 3 digits comprising of Parity set to None N Even E or Odd O 8 Data Bits and Stop Bits signifying the end of the character string 1 or 2 e Line Turn Around This is for a 2 wire line type Data has to be fully transmitted before the line can be turned around and data can be received or vice versa e Reply Delay Enter a delay time in milli seconds before the recorder sends a reply Recommended delay should be set to 12mS min if using the Comms Server Modbus X Modbus X protocol differs from standard Modbus by the 4 floating point order which is reversed for application compatibility To check communications connections and trouble shooting network settings versus SCV parameters see Comms Status
341. r card for the QX with 2 4 6 or 8 outputs available for the SX recorder Output type 0 20mA or 4 20mA Not available for the QXe recorder Nema 4X IP66 Nema 4X IP66 protection available as an option Portable Recorders Portable cases available as an accessory item Digital Input 2 inputs on 8 channel Alarm card 8 inputs on 8 Digital I O card and 16 inputs on a 16 Digital I O card The digital inputs allow users to initiate from a remote location through a dry contact closure selected recorder functions only 8 Digital I O available for the QXe recorder Pulse Frequency four frequency inputs per board are available to measure pulse signals up to 25 kHz max 2 cards Not available for the QXe recorder but 4 pulse inputs can be used on the Digital I O option card e Pulse Inputs The 8 Digital I O option card has 4 channels that can be set as pulse inputs first 4 channels The operating frequency for pulse inputs on the Digital I O card is 1kHz max Approvals CSA and UL approvals QX and SX also have FM CL1 Div 2 approval 24VAC DC or 48VDC Power Supply 20 to 55VDC 20 to 30VAC Only 24V AC DC avail able for the QXe recorder 20 to 30VDC 20 to 25VAC 24VDC Transmitter Power Supply QX can supply up to 200mA to external transmitters SX up to 1A Available as an option for the QXe recorder with up to 130mA 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 37 Functions and Features SX Standard Screens
342. r in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen unless you enable Show n List in the group properties menu See Group on page 109 108 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Group Automated batch counters Each group can maintain its own batch counter this can be configured to start at any desired value and be incremented by any set amount The batch counter can be included in the batch name which itself can contain additional information e Auto Pop Wizard When enabled this will automatically populate the Batch Control screen with the properties entered into that specific Group e Auto Pop Name This is the name of the group that will have it s properties populate the Batch Control screen e Zero Pad Count This refers to the amount of zeros that will be added to the embed ded batch counter Eg BATCH 2 GC 000001 This has to have the same amount of digits to accommodate the largest number the counter will reach which will be the Roll over value If this is not enabled the leading zeros will not be shown e Ctr Start This refers to the number at which the batch counter will start e Ctr Increment This is how much the counter will increase or increment by Ctr Rollover Enter the number at which you want the counter to reach before it starts again e Show name List only appears when Auto Pop Wizard is off Enable this to allow any additional list item names to appear in a drop down list in the
343. racterisation Tables i 59 Chart Control Event Effects s ciecsstascenssisvcsecsscdoascovsesecdeasaavedeseoaenes 94 Chart Controls TAVODL eee E Geen eee ees Realtime scsi sccssessescsseissedsisceseceeceicenexe Chart Speeds CRATES oaeoi Clean Screen Cleaning the Recorder ececcccsssssssssssssssssssssiees 253 Clear All Messages Event Effects oo ccccccccccccsssssscsceesssesesssseeeee 94 Client Server Network c 80 Commit Configuration s es 167 Commit Later Configuration s 167 Comms Data Logging and Transfer eeeeeeeteeetees Getting connected IP Address eee Hubs or Switches oc Internet Security Settings Local Area Network oseese Modbus Capabilities oe OPC Clients oooi OPC Interface oo cece PC Ethernet Connections Protocols lt cessiessesceseesectserssstinsiesteliciee Remote Networks ece ee Remote Viewer iccecccccccccceccscssssscssssscssssscsseeseees Software Installation ccc cece cesceeeeeeees Standard Communications Interfaces e Web Browser ccccccccccccccscssssscssssssssssssssssssssssssseees 308 COMMS CONNECTIONS sse 28 Comms Diagnostics FTP Status wo Modbus Status OPC Status Peers Status SMTP Status Comms Menu DNS WINS MDNS osiris 72 IP Address ooeec POLS 4 3 sissicesseetsansis Services p TEPIP eenaa USB Comms Ports Comms Server sooisissniinsierioinsiniis Add Pens for Logging Add a Database 000 Add a Database Ser
344. ransaction Number and z is the each successive register retrieved starting from 1 The Modbus master can be used in conjunction with the Modbus slave functionality of the recorder or OPC to enable the recorder to act as a communications bridge Data from the slaves connected to a Modbus master is made available as a map on the slave side of the Modbus master this allows another master to get access directly to another master s slaves data without the master having to re process that information Or a Modbus master can process the data and expose it to the network as its own pens in Modbus or OPC Modbus master must be enabled as a firmware option and requires Full Math or Scripting to assign values to a pen see Credits on page 101 X Series Other Master Master 485 or TCP IP Slave network TCP IP Slaves Full Modbus status can be viewed in Modbus Status on page 164 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 75 Refer to the Modbus Master Installation Instructions that are on the CD to help set up other modbus devices to talk to the recorder 43 TV 33 89 43 TV 33 102 Master e Enabled Toggle On to make this recorder a Master device e Poll Rate Enter a time period in seconds of how often there is a request for data e Legacy Ethernet Tick this to connect to 100mm amp 180mm recorders e Slave 1 32 Up to 32 slaves can be setup per m
345. rd re entry lock out for incorrect entry of password more than 3 times no re use of passwords pro grammable 4 to 12 times traceability by user name Miscellaneous Optional customer ID Tagging 3 lines of up to 22 characters each line Firmware Options 264 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Specification Tables Specification Options Math Algorithms optional All analog input channels have a math expression text block This is a fully user programmable 100 char acter free form math expression for each pen Math calculations available on all pens one per input plus 16 extra pens for the QX 48 extra pens for the SX recorder and 12 extra pens for the QXe Scripting maths includes conditions and multi line scripting in pen maths expressions Allow functions permanent variables constants and timers 500 characters maximum Scripting is not available on the QXe Events optional Events are certain conditions or operations that can be set up and logged according to the time and date of an occurrence Subsequently events can be reviewed or displayed on a graph The Event Causes include Alarms Into Out of and Alarm Ack Totals Start Stop Reset Reset and Start Digital Input ON OFF State Change T C Burnout Scheduled Once Interval Specific Days Month End User Counters Max Mins Reset System Power ON Setup Change Internal Memory Low Export Memory Low FTP Memory Low User Action Mark
346. re 4 11 Event Effect using a Template with Embedded values Exon ome Seeti jee Enabled v Type Email Sub Type Multiline User Recipients phil d gap underground com From Gap Phil D loc 5 Sent Wed 13 09 2006 10 29 Email Text Pen 1 Temperature Test A Subject Pen 1 Temperature Test i Event Cause Scheduled Trigger Time 2m 00s Pen 1 Temp 18 197 deg C e Screen Change or Backlight On Off Select Screen Change as an effect to change the screen when triggered by an active alarm or sytem alert message Eg Pen 1 goes into Alarm and the screen changes from a chart to a DPM screen where Alarm markers are visible Backlight select On or Off When the Event is triggered the effect is to turn the backlight to what state has been selected On or Off If an active alarm is triggered it will override this state as it has a higher priority Print Screen As an Effect this will print the current process screen when triggered by a Cause Eg Cause Digital turns on Effect Print Screen To set up network printer information see Network Admin on page 73 e Counters Counters can be used as an Effect of an Event to count an occurrence or to reset different types of counters A User Counter must be set up first before it can be used as a part of an Event See Counters Menu on page 96 Enabled Tick to enable Event ee Type Counters e Event Action Increment will add by what
347. re 5 2 Default password access from the Configure menu Setup menu Technician access See Figure 5 3 for Setup menu access Permission Area 18 ra Setup P fiil Edit 2 Save 2 Load bailed Back Finish Settings Set Time Set Volume Update Sounds Finish 4 Permission Area 23 178 Settings menu Supervisor access Layout menu Supervisor access All of the Layout menu buttons require Supervisor access Permission Area 24 Edit Layout see Figure 5 7 Layout ra Configure menu Operator access Ed Permission Area 13 F 2 Load 2 Save Setup Technician access Layout Supervisor access Passwords Operator access Settings Supervisor access F Passwords Arar User Admin Save bad wf Pwds Pwd NetSync bain Password menu Operator access See Figure 5 4 for Password menu access Permission Area 36 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Figure 5 3 Default Password access from the Setup Menu Setup menu Technician access Permission Area 18 Edit Supervisor access Save Technician access Load Technician access Save and Load setup buttons require Technician access Permission Area 17 Edit Setup 2 9 Pens p Events Counters General 4 PI a Recording Finish Edit menu Supervisor access See Figur
348. re seal provision provides added security to seal the front door and rear when using optional rear cover to prevent undetected entry to these areas of the recorder e USB Ports USB 1 1 only Front and rear USB host ports for data and setup transfers or remote screen through these ports Attach external devices keyboard or mouse Rear USB is an option for the QXe recorder Replay with Zoom Select replay mode and zoom in on a specific area on the screen The data can easily be replayed at the recorder with the ability to zoom The touch screen makes it fast to review and analyse historical data A Jump function allows you to go from the alarm list directly to the trend showing the occurrence of the alarm Hide pens function allows you to display only the pens required for analysis Print Support Network printing from status message and replay screens Plus screen capture facility of process screens instantly using a basic USB standard PCL Printer Com mand Language printer Print screen function captures every pixel that is sent to the printer Options Hardware Alarm amp Digital IO Cards 4 or 8 outputs relay contacts SPCO 240V 8 Digital I O or 16 Digital I O SPNO 24VDC 16 Digital I O not available for the QXe recorder Programma ble alarm set points can be configured to activate up to 16 outputs for the QX 8 outputs for the QXe and 48 outputs for the SX Analogue Output 2 or 4 outputs available pe
349. reen TO is enabled Enter how long in min utes before the replay screen returns to a process screen Defaults to 10 minutes Menu Bar TO When you select an item from the menu bar along the top of the proc ess screen it will produce a sub menu bar This sub menu bar can have a display time assigned to it before it automatically disappears and returns to the main menu bar Enter here the amount of time before the menu bar is hidden For screens that have been created in the Screen Designer software and have been designed specifically without the menu bar being displayed The menu bar at the top of the screen will appear on the recorder automatically but can be hidden so the full area of the screen can be displayed Enter here the amount of time before the menu bar is hidden Hourly Stamps The Hourly stamps appear on the Trend Screen instead of the date and time stamps for chartspeeds of 10mm hr 20mm hr 30mm hr and 60mm hr if ena bled When the recorder screen is put into replay mode As you zoom out the time stamps on the chart background change from minutes to hours 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 123 124 meere F T O Colour Replay Replay gt Appearance Chart background colour and graduations and the chart background colour when the record er goes into an alarm state can all be changed The same set of characteristics can be changed for a chart in Replay mode using the colour picker The co
350. rement A recorder was required to help track random and rapid temperature changes within the cold storage rooms Conventional sample recording had shown that temperature variations were present but was not of high enough resolution to pinpoint the cause Again as in example 1 the measured inputs would show long periods of stable constant readings interspersed with small sharp increases in temperature In order to track the cause of these variations it was necessary to maximise the time resolution of the data This appli cation was ideally suited to the Fuzzy Logging data storage technique as the periods of in activity would result in compression rates of over 50 times Example 3 Logged Data Example The diagram below is a sample of actual logged data in both the Fuzzy Logging method top and Sample Logging method bottom derived from the same analogue input 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 295 296 It provides an excellent illustration of how less data points can be used to construct an iden tical trace Fuzzy Logged f Sampled Logged Diagram 2 Note This data extract was taken from a 56 hour temperature run which resulted in approx imately 1 Mbyte of sample data and approximately 40 Kbyte of Fuzzy Logged data A compression ratio of 25 times Anything else it can do Yes Fuzzy Logging can be used as a One Hit recording button In applications where the measured process is new or the i
351. removed and select the delete option 2 Adialog box will appear with the IP address of the database server to be deleted If this is correct click on OK All database servers can be removed except for the Local Server Add a Device There are three ways to add a device they all deliver the same dialog box 1 Use the device icon in the top left of the comms server window 2 Right click on a selected Comms port in the left window COM1 to COM8 or Ethernet and select Add Device from the resulting menu 3 Select a Comms port and right click in a blank space in the top window and select Add Device from the resulting menu Add a Device via Ethernet Double click the ethernet icon in the left column This will activate ethernet the red cross will change to a tick Now the recorder must be added To do this click the add new device button The first in the row of three This will bring up the Device Details box All these methods will produce the Add Device Details box Areas of the box become greyed out as the selections are made 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Communications Server Device Details Add Device Details Protocol z Modbus Profile ooxxx l Communications Port IP Address o o 0 0 xxxxxx Network ID XS Slave ID Recorder Name Socket Test Profile Find Device Cancel Protocol The protocol should be matched to that set on the recorder It will be Modbus X by default
352. rk using groups of pens so when setting up an event with a batch control as a cause you must assign a group of pens See Groups on page 111 Scheduled Events A scheduled event can be set up as a cause so that when a scheduled event occurs it trig gers an effect With scheduled events you can specify the time and date for something to happen Eg A schedule can be setup every weekday at 12 00pm to send an Email Enabled Type Scheduled Sub Type Specific Days Day of the W Mon Tues Weds Thurs Fri Time Of Day 12 00 00 PM EETA T Count mm 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Enabled Tick to enable Type Scheduled e Sub Type Set Once Interval Specific Days or Month End Once This is a once only occurrence Interval A scheduled can be setup at timed intervals eg every 12 hours Specific days Select the day s time and how often count the schedule will occur Eg Friday at 12 00 with a count of 10 will carry on for 10 weeks or Monday through to Friday at 12 00 with a count of 10 will carry on for two weeks Month End If Month End is selected with a count of 10 it will carry on for 10 months The recorder refers to a built in calendar and clock and will schedule the event to occur at midnight on the last day of each month Date Time Only available when Once is selected as a Sub Type Select the time and date for a one off occurrence e Period Only available when Interval is selec
353. rm Digital IO 24V TX Power RS 485 Supply Output 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 245 Table 10 2 SX Spares 1 51453012 501 SX Processor Board Assy 2 51453006 501 SX Analogue Input 4CH Assy 51453006 502 SX Analogue Input 6CH Assy 51453006 503 SX Analogue Input 8CH Assy 2 51453027 501 SX Analogue Output 2CH Assy 51453027 502 SX Analogue Output 4CH Assy 2 50001017 502 SX Pulse Input 4CH Assy 3 51453024 501 SX Mother Board Assy 4 51453018 501 SX Digital I O 8CH Assy 51453018 502 SX Digital I O 16CH Assy 4 51453021 501 SX Relay Alarm 4CH Assy 51453021 502 SX Relay Alarm 8CH Assy 5 50001182 501 SX Power Supply AC Mains 50001182 502 SX Power Supply 20 55VDC 20 30VAC 6 51453030 501 SX Transmitter Power Supply board 11 50013946 503 SX Bezel Touch Screen Std and Includes Bezel Touch Nema 3 IP54 Door Screen and Door 50013946 504 SX Bezel Touch Screen and Nema 4X IP66 Door Assy 14 50009119 501 SX Std Nema 3 IP54 Door 15 50003590 501 SX Nema 4X IP66 Door 23 50001782 501 QX SX Speaker Assy 27 50006787 501 QX SX Battery kit of 5 Not shown 28 50001011 503 Compact Flash card 128Mb Not shown 50001011 504 Compact Flash card 256Mb 50001011 505 Compact Flash card 512Mb 50001011 506 Compact Flash card 1Gb 50001011 507 Compact Flash card 2Gb 50001011 508 Compact Flash card 4Gb 30 50006809 504 SX Display
354. rm Messages isi Alarm Relay Card Connections xx 24 4 and 8 Alarm Relay Cards Channel Numbers sessies Alarm Digital IO Diagnostics 1 0 162 Alarm Digital IO Menu ieccssccccscsvccceccisssseiee 56 Alarm Relay Card sea sels Digital IO Card occ cesses esses eeeeseeeeeeeeeatens Alarms Appendix Decco Alarms Ment sss Acknowledge Alarm 0 Change Log Speed ow Configure Alarms oe D yiation sciassianceeisecstsace Email Alarm seese High and LOW ou Mark Chart sessen Rate Up or Rate Down View Alarms oo ccceceseseseseseeeeees ore Alarms Pens s All Messages sssrini Analogue In Menu 0 0000 Analogue Input Card CJC Connectors wee Channel Numbers Connection Details 0 0 ae Current Input oes Dia NOStics sasiisieiin renren Signal Wiring oo eects Analogue Out Menu 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Analogue Output Card sssri 21 Channel Numbers Connection Details Diaghostics aenaran e a Analogue Output Specifications Appearance s ssssssssisssi Appendix A Quality and Safety Appendix B Maths Expressions Appendix C Thermocouple Connections 285 Appendix D Alarms reccccscseciessenen Appendix E Ethernet 0 0 0 Appendix F Fuzzy Logging Appendix G F sub zero Sterilisation 297 Appendix H Calibration sessie 299 Appendix I Battery Data ween 301 Appendix J Function Codes and Memory Maps 0 303 B Back
355. rnout replace the for 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 287 Thermocouple CJC Compensation External Input Reference Copper wire A H Normal signal g processing Input A terminals Temperature on rear reading to maths panel of Thermocouple SxpressIon recorder Table convert R T A y temp to Volts C Reading in Volts Inputs Volts Look up table a PT100 D added gt Converts Vv w C D voltage read EE ing to tem perature Thermocouple Copper cable wire External Input Reference The reference temperature reading in this method is provided by a separate temperature measuring device connected to another input usually RT This input is processed in the normal way and then passed back into the thermocouple signal processing system as a temperature reading 288 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Appendix D Alarms Alarms Menu Main Menu gt Alarms gt Acknowledge Configure and View alarms from this menu Alarms Ack Alarm Process ini Acknowledging Alarms Recording User acknowledgment of alarms can be performed at this menu only latched alarms can be acknowledged If a latched alarm is set up in the Pen Alarms menu then a latched relay will maintain in its active state until the trigger source has returned to a
356. rotocols provides comprehensive connectivity to local area networks LANs The standard Ethernet interface makes networking of the recorder to a LAN or the world wide web fast and convenient Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP automatically acquires the set tings IP address for network communications from a DHCP server Modbus Master and Modbus Slave facility now available for all recorders RS485 Modbus the RS485 connection allows process data to be transferred to other devices or to record data received in MODBUS RTU protocol slave mode only Modbus Master and Modbus Slave facility now available for all recorders A Comms option card and expansion card are required for the QXe recorder Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP The recorder can be synchronised over the ether net network via a SNTP client or synchronise other recorders via a Server Web Server with the recorder connected to a LAN all process variables alarm and mes sages can be viewed from an internet browser values are automatically refreshed Data Storage Internal Data Storage 70MB to 1850MB of expandible internal non volatile flash memory is available for data storage and chart history replay of data on the display Internal memory Logging rate 1 sec Type Pens 70MB 180MB 400MB 890MB 1850MB QX SX 8 24days 61d 137d 301d 622d QXe 8 24days 137d QX SX 16 12d 30 5d 68 5d 150d 311d QXe 16 12d 68 5d Q
357. rts and an Ethernet connection Set up local and remote databases Set up local and remote servers Modbus protocols supported on Ethernet and Serial ports Enable and disable ports Add edit and remove devices Log to database or client connections local or OPC client The comms server will appear as an icon in the system task bar in the bottom right of the PC screen Start up The Communications Server appears as an icon in the Windows system bar at the bottom right of the screen Double click or right click to open loads automatically with Trend Server The comms server manages the commu nications status of devices on a Serial port RS485 or through an Ethernet connection Only Modbus protocol is available for X Series devices see Modbus on page 206 Comms Server Administration and Toolbar Database Servers Communications Ports Figure 8 5 Comms Server Overview a Communications Server On ii Database Servers IP Address Description Connection Status 749 Communication Ports x COM1 oe com2 x COM3 se COM4 x COMS x COME x COM7 x COMB 47 Ethernet Database Servers 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Communications Server The Comms Status shows all the activity of devices Communications ports Databases and Database Servers The window to the left displays the areas controlled by the comms serv er the database servers and the communications ports The display area s to t
358. ry 2Hz S00ms AFF 002V 12 Factory 2Hz S00ms AB 8 y 0 024 124 Factory 2Hz 500ms x x x AS 5 y 0 02Y 124 Factory 2H2 S00ms 4 None x x x e Channel Displays the Slot position eg A B or C D E F the Analogue Input number and the system channel position This will show a tick if this channel is enabled e Input Displays the current Analogue Input reading for this channel See Thermo couple Active Burnout Status on page 162 e Range Displays the current Range Type set for this channel eg 12V e Calibration Displays the type of calibration for this channel either Factory or User Cal Sample Rate Displays the current Sample rate for this channel SQRT If ticked the square root extract is enabled on this channel to linearise a non lin ear input Sensor Comp This will display if any type of sensor compensation applied to this channel Pen Displays which Pen scale is being used to display this analogue input CJC Only for Thermocouple inputs Displays the final adjusted value of a Cold Junc tion Calibration on this channel in degrees C Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen Displayed in the Input column may also be the Thermocouple Active burnout status 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 161 Table 4 12 Thermocouple Active Burnout Status Label Descriptions Disabled Active burnout disabled Normal Acti
359. s Credit Options Full Maths firmware credit option will allow the functions listed in Table 14 1 on page 272 and Table 14 2 on page 274 Scripting firmware credit option will allow the Full math functions plus the scripting func tions in Table 14 3 on page 276 Table 14 4 on page 276 Table 14 5 on page 277 Table 14 6 on page 277 and Table 14 7 on page 278 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 271 272 Full Maths amp Script Processing Maths Variable and Function Tables Table 14 1 Maths Variable Table Maths Variables Syntax Description Alarm Level PnAxL Gets the Alarm Level n is Pen number 1 to 96 and x is alarm number 1 to 6 Analogue Input Eng values An Get the value of Analogue n 1 to 48 in Engi neering units Analogue Raw Electrical RAn Get the value of Raw Analogue n 1 to 48 in values Electrical values Batch Mode BATMD1 to Per group Returns 1 batch running 2 batch BATMD6 stopped or 3 batch paused Batch field list Blfn x Get the index of Batch Field n list entered at batch start Where n is the field number and x is the group 1 6 Batch name list Blname x Get the index of Batch name list entered at batch start Where x is the group 1 6 Batch user list Bluser x Get the index of Batch user list entered at batch start Where x is the group 1 6 Blkv BLKVx Get the local variable x This variable is local to this script There is a maximum
360. s and displayed Refer to the Screen Designer manual for further details For layouts to be loaded into the recorder Custom Screens must be enabled as a Firmware option See Section 7 Firmware Options on page 201 It is recommended to save Screen Designer layouts directly from the software onto a Com pact Flash or USB key This will contain all the files required for loading the layout into the recorder If the Screen Designer layout is saved to another location before being transferred onto removable media ensure that both the bcf and lay files are copied over A warning message will appear if the bcf file is missing Loading a Template into a Recorder One or more Templates can be loaded into a recorder added to a recorder screen or screens and displayed To save a template in Screen Designer onto removable media refer to the Screen Designer manual Fit the removable media into the recorder and go to Main Menu gt Configure gt Layout and select Load The Device selection menu will appear to select the correct media Enter a new file name if required and press the Load button Go to Main Menu gt Configure gt Layout gt Edit and select Add Screen Go to the Template Type option and your template will be listed here Select your template and it will be added to a screen re name the screen as required To display the new Layout go to the Screen button in the Main menu bar at the top of any process screen and select the next
361. s on ccceesecececeseeeeeeeteeeees Print Support nes USB KEYS kroni ET E E ETE USB Devices Overview ccs USB Key Format wesc OSB ROG icicicaia aipimntre trainin Update Sounds Sound Effects User Action Event Causes o cecccccccccccsscesccesscssccssscssessssssscsseessenees User Calibration User Counters Event Cause seee 88 User Messages siis 147 User Variables Process Menu noaee Users Passwords VWXYZ View Alarms ss Volume Sound Effects 0 Warnings and Precautions Web Browser sessir Auto DNS Web Enable esee ZOOM N sernncnnosnnacnernsnsrancnarninn ZOOM Oul seneeesemnnennnnmian POON cssc eaaa o Zooming Capabilities oe eeecseccsssesssssssssssrsesessesseens xs nnnnnn Auto DNS o 316 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Copyrighted Materials For more information please contact your supplier 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK
362. s require Supervisor access Permis sion Area 26 Factory Factory menu requires Engineer ac SB wel 8i redits rade calibration cess All of the factory menu buttons ae eas eae AA i iz require Engineer access Demo Traces Resets Localisation Permission Area 28 asa Figure 5 10 Default password access from the Messages Menu Messages Menu No Login Required Except to clear the messages from each area requires Engineer access Messages all 31 Diagnostics 3 System Messages lt q f Type Time Date Message a 16 19 18 08 06 2007 Scheduled export failed no me 16 19 03 08 06 2007 Power On Off for 0m 39s 16 18 21 08 06 2007 Setup Changed 16 15 41 08 06 2007 Scheduled export Failed no me 16 15 26 08 06 2007 Power On Off for Om 41s 16 14 42 08 06 2007 Setup Changed 16 03 51 08 06 2007 Scheduled export failed no me 16 03 36 08 06 2007 Power On Off For Om 40s 16 02 54 08 06 2007 Setup Changed 15 10 30 08 06 2007 Failed to copy group 1 report _F All messages screen have a button to j clear remove the existing messages rA ee stored in the recorder for that particular gt area of messages Permission area 44 rt Clear print E lt BB Bi B 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 183 184 Figure 5 11 Default password access from the Comms Menu ad 4 TCP IP Network Admin Comms Menu Enginee
363. s started to be over written List 78 This button produces another button bar for quick access to Batch Controls Batch Detail Mark on Chart or Message details The number displayed is the number of new messages that have been registered since the menu was last checked Select this to produce another button bar with access to e Batches Shortcut to enter details to start a new batch or to control a batch that has already been started See Batch Setup Batch Control on page 141 Detail Gives detail of the current batch status for all batches running If you are displaying a screen that has been set up specifically to show a batch then the details will be just for that batch Mark on Chart Select the Mark button to enter a Mark on Chart Embedded process val ues can be entered which will display pen information on the marker See Embedded Process Values on page 89 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Message Detail Press this button for quick access to the Messages screen where each message is put into a category or All Messages can be viewed See Messages Menu on page 147 Exit To return to the process screen Screen The Screen button produces the Screen menu bar Figure 6 2 Screen Menu bar Press to print the current Previous and Next buttons scroll back process screen and forth through the screen list gt Ww gt F Print Edit Replay List Prey Next Exit Standard Screen 1 Select to che
364. sacssceessecstessnssssesseseseccnsedessesssessisesasncsesnces 207 Getting connected IP Address scccscessecsssesesseeeesseeseeeseseesesesenecseeasseeseenscesaeees 208 Local Area Network SetUp sisesissiesssisscossesvesessee sssessessscsssesvsssssesssesndestestestestoseenadesss 209 Links to Remote Networks i scissessiiseacsscicasiasiieias cvzcsvscvseesaisssaiosieveassvivearasniavtevaesaands 209 Data Logging and Transfer o ceccccccccecccssescesseseeseesecsecsecsececuecesceseeseeseeseesecsecseeseeaees Comms and Trend Analysis software System Requirements Software Installation DATED ciicstenesstisdessas sed eevee COMMUNICATIONS Server cecscsccecescccccessccsssevscesscsccscssseecsssescessscesecssscessesses Comms Server OVEIViEw nrn aE EE RREA AEAEE SATI UD aa O T E T O TEE E O E Comms Server Selapanan ia n E A E ED Comms Server LOG BING rieri e E aE ETE AEN Comms Database Server ssccccscsscsssssccssscescesscsscscsssceecesceserssssesscssscsesesees System SOLU se css casterstvssus des nE ETE EE EE E E coneotesevtendeves Modbus Capabilities _sssssssssssssssssssovscsossssooscsssesesososesssscossorss sosopsisssssseoicssss OPC Interface Open Process Control s esessesessesossesoeseososeososcesososssesossesossee 233 Web Browser I E E E T E E E T 234 Internet Security Settings csscccscscssscsssscssccsesssssesssessscssssssssssessesseseers 235 Section 9 PC Software SUNS wciiesinsisnsscnonsscnsassansnsnnetaneadsennd
365. sassssssssesssessasssssssssessesaissisaevecasausaveessessisssesssasestasdsossosssessanteacbessesve 303 Inp t Test MENSAL E scsi varosisiveetartsaiesiieressdeicivens qevssedtnia vatusanisbintandineainnseeaesieaisiant Analogne Input Value sisine aN TO adestasscnssisscneersaisaase Communications Input Per Valie ics ie tetas diniauiathnnineae Modbus Function Codes vi 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Section 1 Preface Preface Thank you for choosing an X Series recorder Thank you for purchasing the newest in our range of electronic data recording for the X Se ries Advanced Graphic Recorders The QX SX and QXe paperless chart recorders are the latest development of the solid state replacement for traditional paper recorders Many options features and functions are available to meet a wide range of applications and requirements including Power Water Treatment Thermal Processing Food and Beverage Pharmaceutical Biotech and Manufacturing industries This manual explains the product functionality operation configuration and communication as well as Safety Precautions Installation amp Wiring Recorder Setup Troubleshooting and Spares List It is recommended that the user reads the manual before installing and operat ing the recorder Documentation A full set of manuals for the software and the recorders including some language ver sions are available on the CD provided Also Application Notes and Installation Instruc tio
366. scsssecsesssessesssessecsseesesens 259 Input Range Performance Accuracy Table 263 Input ACHUGHON ives cexccsesses wsan concen ccsegschaeuscnke Gace esncdustebinnshcaeesibite cucanteee EIR 263 LED Flash CODGS evs coves ess E ER seas det detest AR 267 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Appendix A Quality and Safety CE Mark Safety Appendix B Maths Expressions ccccssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 271 Full Maths amp Script Processing ccccccscssssssssssssssssscscsssesesesessesessssonseesesnseese 271 Maths Credit Options pper EERE stated 271 Maths Variable and Function Tables cccccccscscsecsssesessesessssceseseesesesseesseeseseeaseees 272 Full MGUIIS cscri noa iane AO NNO bea sk ASERS AE EEEE 279 Script Function Application ExampleS seseseeeeeeeseeeeeeesererererererrrererrerrrren 280 Maths Error Messa b s iros rnan a A EER E EEEE EA ATE ES 284 Appendix C Thermocouple Connections ccccccsesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 285 How Thermocouples WOrk ssssessssssorsssesessscoosososscussosssnesedsssosseosi cross aots nessi 285 Thermocouple CJC Compensation cccsccssssscscssscescssessssscsssessssessesssenerees 286 Internal AULOMGTIC sissies nsei aasin E E leeds Eaei E e i NE 286 Ext OPC Referenc sssiscisssssssscassisscsssssossosessssssesssvsesesiesiessasos sontssssesoasssssnssnssossassnesyeys 287 External with a Specified Temperature cccccscscescssssseseeseseeseseeseeeeseseese
367. see Maths Variable and Function Tables on page 272 Export Now Export Now will transfer data from the internal memory to the external media such as Com pact Flash or USB key Exporting does not remove the data from the recorder but when the internal memory buffer is full the latest data will start to over write the oldest data Select the Export Now button to go to a sub menu of available external storage devices Buttons become active when a device is fitted Once fitted the size of the device memory and the amount of available space is displayed Select the desired device to export to and this will display two options New and All The All function will export all the data in the recorder s memory to the external device port The New function will just export any new data since the last export was made to this port If an Export Now is requested within 5 seconds of a Scheduled export being activated the manual export will not occur ghDevice Selection CF Card Free 120 3 Free 200 9 SExport to USB 1 a MB MB Size 122 2 MB Size 247 2 MB p New All lt Required Required Back Space Space 455 KB 54 MB Device Selection If the Device Selection buttons are greyed out you will need to insert a Compact Flash or USB key into the port After a few seconds the button becomes active Compact Flash not available for the QXe USB1 is the first USB device to be fitted and USB2 is the second one fitted front
368. set of 5 0 Low Eng Dual Point Sensor Compensation is used to offset the signal input by a user specified amount against the Low and High Eng val ues The offset amount can vary throughout the signal input range 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Appendix l Battery Data Location Processor Board Located on the processor board this battery is used mainly for Clock battery back up Type 6032 IEC CR2032 System Li MnO org elyt Voltage 3 0 V Cell Type Typical Capacity Weight mAh 6032 230 mAh 3 gms Approx Percent age of total weight Active Materials Maganese dioxide mnOz 29 Propylen carbonate PC 4 3 1 2 Dimethoxiethan DME 2 1 Lithium metal Li 2 Carbon C 0 9 Lithium perchlorate LiCIO 0 3 Passive Materials Stainless steel 57 6 Plastic 3 8 Safety Guidelines e Keep batteries out of the reach of children especially those batteries fitting within the limits of the truncated cylinder as defined in ISO DP 8124 2 2 In the case of ingestion of a cell or battery the person involved should seek medical assist ance promptly It is of extreme importance that batteries are inserted into equipment correctly with regard to polarity and Do not attempt to revive used batteries by heating charging or other means Do not dispose of batteries in fire Do not dismantle batteries Do not short circuit batteries
369. setup will not be maintained over a power failure If Commit Later has been executed a warning message will display for Edit Setup Edit Lay out and User Admin Passwords screens This is to alert the user that the changes have been made to the configuration and not committed in the recorder The user can Discard the changes or continue to do changes and then Commit them Setup Modified This setup has been modified but not committed Select to discard the existing changes or continue Discard Continue 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 167 168 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Section 5 Password Security Log On Off If ESS Extended Security System Password security is active on your recorder a password is required to enter the menu system and process screens Limited access is available with out logging on see Table 5 1 on page 173 When Log On is required the Log On button will appear in the top right of the Main Menu screen The Log On button can be set to switch to auto Log Off at a specified period of time To Log On select the Log On button at the top right of the Main Menu screen Log On User is presented with a user name and password box First time user login is Admin No password is required Access for the first time user is removed once the password system has been configured Log Off Once the user has logged on the option in the Main Menu wY jai will turn to Log Off once selected the user is log
370. sieahatee oedetecste Email Alarm casters etiaisent Embedded Process Values Events Menu s cititiiundsntmaneneianuiatanss Error Alert on tcnichactridren i paisiisceapsieaatatnenth Ethernet Connections siiis ries E Eie Rear Port esscr Ethernet Appendix E 309 Event Causes ocer 86 Alarm Batch COuUnterS aeni i Eia Digital Input oe eeeeeeeeeeeeees Max Mins Reset cccsceeeeeeees Scheduled Event Causes SYSTEM yoron gantan sear O E EE TC Burn OUt vrina uhani Totaliser oseese User ACON rociera Event Chart Controls Event Effects actus cnnctawieomiadrecnctentoheeiens Alarm Acknowledge one Backlight cssssissvsssssecscicssvssevessessenvseies ae Batch 2ecs2cscisessssesseveascasetseeveestexeerctesicoecereusccta fatale Chart Control wiccccccccccccccccccscsscsscescesecsessscesesseees Clear All Messages ousie COUNLETS ennen ennta Aa Delayed Event ossessi Digital Outputs oe Display Alert ossessi Em il spraseusdmaanannig aaa Embedded Process Values LOS GING scsssssrsereaiescdicasceetsenssceecscesesits Mark on Chart oeie Max Mins Reset e Play Sound scsissssstssdssssssssseesscsssascetses Preset Markers oeer Print Sereen osissscssc sciscissssessecvesseceeeses REPOS 5 Sssceseeh bsnctbes cbiscdeeteaseeostets sens Screen Chan gee ssssoinemeariisissonsiasnip Script TIMErS serari a a RN Time Sync sss 6 a ann Rat Event Status MIACNIOSUICS denenen o i ets Event triggering from Scripts ge Events Men
371. so leave it at that unless you changed it on the recorder For active Modbus devices the recorder name and protocol variant can be changed Modbus vs Modbus X For an inactive Modbus device the device profile can also be changed Modbus Profile The Profile name box is used to tell Trend Server how to access the data on the recorder This profile is automatically generated from the recorder setup that was downloaded to Trend Server previously The system creates Modbus profiles from an imported setup or logged data and creates a profile including information for pen scale units etc The profile Name is made up from the Recorder name Type and ID number Once the setup or data has been imported it will dis play in this window the next time that it is opened no need to restart Comms Server For X Series recorders drop down the list and select the recorder from the list It will be in the list under the same name as the setup previously saved If any equipment other than X Series recorders is to use Trend Server to log and graph data then a profile has to be generated The Modbus Profile Tool is available to aid in setting up Device Profiles for other devices see Modbus profile tool data update on page 223 For more detailed informa tion on the Modbus Profile tool refer to the Trend Analysis software manual NOTE The Recorder ID number is NOT the same as the Slave ID Number Communications Port Choose between Ethernet or RS485 for
372. support Modbus RTU is standard See RS485 QX and SX recorders on page 29 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 205 206 Standard Communication Interfaces Front and Rear USB Communication Ports USB communication ports can be found one at the front and one at the rear of the recorder The QXe only has one USB port at the front fitted as standard An extra rear USB port is only available with the Comms card option The USB Host ports will provide an interface for e Save and Load Data e Save and Load Setups e External keyboard amp mouse e Barcode reader e Mass storage device USB key or Hard drives 250 GB USB Barcode Reader USB ports allow the use of a USB barcode reader Protocols Protocols are an agreed upon format for transmitting data between two devices The pro tocol determines the following e the type of error checking to be used e data compression method if any e how the sending device will indicate that it has finished sending a message e how the receiving device will indicate that it has received a message The following Protocols available are Modbus Modbus primarily sends data no setup information is transferred via Ethernet or RS485 ports The device ID and Serial number is held in the setup and this information is required to locate the correct device in Trend Server Modbus only requires the correct Slave ID to connect see Modbus on page 75 If the device is detected using the Slave ID t
373. t puts are available for the QXe recorder Common Alarm Output Not available for the QXe recorder The common alarm output include a single alarm relay This relay is the same rating as those on the 8 amp 16 Digital I O cards This relay is NC normally closed and can be activated by any alarm This relay will close when power is removed This relay is identified as Fixed in the relay output pick lists e Rating 24Vdc 1A Resistive Load Digital Input Cards Three options for digital inputs are available 8 Digital Inputs 8 Digital I O card this 8 channel card allows the user to configure each channel to be either relay output or digital input Relay output rated at 24V DC 1 Amp rated resistive load 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 257 258 Relay Alarm Digital Input Specification 16 Digital Inputs Not available for the QXe recorder 16 Digital I O card this 16 channel card allows the user to configure each channel to be ei ther relay output or digital input Relay output rated at 24V DC 1 Amp rated resistive load Digital Input Functions The digital inputs can be used for the following actions e A Digital contact on an input can be used to enable or disable one or any combination of alarms Can be used in Maths expressions e Can have current status indicated on DPMs Bars and Charts Failsafe Relay Positions Table 12 2 QXe QX and SX Relay Positions no alarms active
374. t already contain a password configuration will have their password configuration overwritten when they become part of a password group 20 Anew Master can be elected from any Slave recorder in the password group by going to the Type field in the Pwd NetSync dialog that is available from the Menu gt Config ure gt Passwords menu and selecting Master Any existing Master will automatically be relegated to a Slave and if the current password group Master was down at the time then it will be relegated to be a Slave the next time it comes online at start up Notes 1 Password NetSync is heavily dependent on a reliable network If the system seems to be suffering from apparently poor network connectivity then try splitting the password group up into multiple password groups with each group on a separate Set Please see the Manual for more details on Sets 2 Running Password NetSync without the Master of the password group powered up and connected to the network is an error condition Please rectify this situation as soon as possible as Password NetSync cannot be expected to function properly without a pass word group Master being present NOTICE The Password NetSync function in the X Series recorders uses a Peer to Peer communications protocol to synchronize passwords between the various recorders within the Network Synchronization Group While these systems have been rigorously tested with various network topologies We cannot guaran
375. t menu you can run your report either manually or by using the Event system e For a manual report see Reports Process on page 152 e Fora report triggered using the Event system see Event Effects on page 89 Pen Report Information Currently pens provide real time values max min and totals Reports need some history of these values to be maintained so a set of period based data is maintained The periods be ing an hour day week and month The recorder builds up the current hour day week and monthly data and keeps the previous completed hour day week and month stored At anytime it is possible to access the current hour day week or month for Max Min Aver age and Totals also you can get access to the previously complete whole hour day week or month for each pen e An hour is a whole hour starting on the hour eg 10 00 to 11 00 A day starts at one second passed midnight e A week starts one second passed midnight on Sunday e A month starts at one second passed midnight on the 1st of the month Access to this is provided automatically via reports but this information can also be included in maths scripts and by using embedded variables Examples below 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 119 120 Pen Report Maths In maths the following syntax is available prmax x y z Pen report Max value prmin x y z Pen report Min value prave x y z Pen report Average value prtot x y z Pen report Totaliser
376. t should be noted that BLKV s do not persist over a power removal and if the application were to require a non volatile count then BLKVn should be substituted with PSTVn Example 3 The application described in Examples 2 and 3 is to be extended to totalise the amount of time that Input 1 is the highest of 1 2 3 amp 4 Again scripting can be used to easily solve this requirement The Pseudo code is written as If input 1 is indicated as the current highest value then display the timer If input 1 is not the highest input value then stop totalising time and return the current timer value We know that in Example 1 the highest value channel number is contained with GLBV1 and as this is a global variable it is also accessible from this script if GLBV1 1 Tests if the global variable 1 is equal to channel 1 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Full Maths amp Script Processing BLKV1 trun 1 0 return tget 1 else BLKV1 tpause 1 return tget 1 If it is then keep the timer running without resetting Return the current timer value If not then Pause the timer Return the current paused timer value Note in this script above there is no way to reset the timer this could be modified to allow the user to reset this timer from a switch fed into a digital input as follows if D1 1 if GLBV1 1 BLKV1 trun 1 0 return tget 1 else BLKV1 tpause 1 return tget 1 else
377. t will trigger this event e Totalisers Set to cause an event when a totaliser Starts Stops or is Reset Select which pen has been set up as a totalise pen to trigger this event e Digital Inputs Set to cause an event when a Digital Input is turned On Off or has a State change Select the Digital to trigger this event TC Burn Out Select which analogue input has a thermocouple on that will trigger this event when it goes into a burnout state Scheduled See Scheduled Events on page 86 e User Counters See User Counters on page 88 Max Mins Reset A manual reset of the Max Min values by the user can be used as a cause to then trigger an effect Max Min values can be reset in the process menu see Max Min on page 150 System An occurrence in the system can be used as a cause to trigger an event effect System occurrences include Power On Setup Change Internal Memory Low Export Memory Low and FTP Memory Low The system moni tors the memory storage levels and triggers the alert when the low level set is reached To set the memory low level go to the Edit Recording menu go to Storage Alarm on page 117 e User Action Select a User action such as placing a mark on the chart as a cause to trigger and event e Batch Use a batch control as a cause to trigger an event effect An event cause can be set up so that when you Start Stop or Pause a batch it will cause an effect to occur Batches wo
378. ted as a Sub Type Set the time interval for how often this event should occur eg every hour would be 1h 00m 00s e Alignment Only available when Interval is selected as a Sub Type Select and enter a value from the list to align the scheduled event at specific intervals For certain applications it maybe desirable for a relatively fast schedule interval event for example every 10 minutes to be aligned with a particular time For example on the hour When the alignment function is not used the schedule interval starts immediately on committing the configuration When the alignment function is used the schedule inter val starts when the first interval event coincides with a subsequent interval that lines up with the desired alignment ie Top of the hour Figure 4 9 Interval alignment Time 1 00 1 10 1 20 1 30 1 40 1 50 2 00 2 10 2 20 2 30 2 40 2 50 3 00 hap alons t 4 4A 4 FAH ata t t t 4 Example of a schedule interval event started at 17 minutes past the hour Figure 4 9 shows if a 10 minutes schedule is required to align with a whole hour and the configuration is committed at 17 minutes past the recorder will wait until 20 past before starting the schedule interval As starting at 20 past with 10 minute increments will ensure alignment with a whole hour 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 87 e Count Only available when Interval Specific Days or Month End are selected as a Sub Type
379. tee that it will work with every combination of network switches hubs and other Ethernet network communications equip ment and settings Users of the Password NetSync function who experience issues with the recorders not being found or losing contact between various Password Slaves and the Password Master will need to trou bleshoot their own network to insure proper operation of the Password NetSync function 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 131 Figure 4 1 Example of Peer Network consisting of 2 Password Groups Password Net Sync Configuration Type To set up the Master recorder for the password group first select Master to make this recorder a slave device and select Slave e Password Group For a Master recorder enter the password group name using the on screen keypad or keyboard For a Slave recorder select a password group from the list to join this recorder to an existing group e Associated Slaves For Master recorders only Touch the screen to select from the available recorders shown in red Recorders that are enabled for password net sync and that already belong to this password group will be displayed in green Recorders not available because they ar a part of another group or do not have th firmware option enabled will not be displayed Select the back button and if all is correct confirm using the tick button This will have imme diate effect The update could take up to 2 minutes 132 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08
380. the screen and dragging it to either side or by using a mouse See Figure 6 3 on page 190 Exit to return to the previous process screen Action Toolbar The Action toolbar can be set to timeout disappear after a specified time To set the time see Menu bar TO Settings on page 122 e e Print This will print the current replay screen For network printers ensure all printer server information has been entered in Network Admin on page 73 Single This is for a single cursor to be displayed on the replay screen Dual This is a mode that displays an additional cursor showing the time difference between the two When selected the toolbar icons will change to Swap and d k Link The two cursors appear on top of each other and Action Swap Lin can be moved by dragging one of the cursors using the stylus on the touch screen The cursor with the two grey arrows is the movable one to change this use the Swap button Each cursor can be positioned independently and linked so they can be moved together use the Link button Each cursor will also show its current time date and the digital readings on the right hand side show the max and min between the cursors as opposed to under a single cursor See Figure 6 3 on page 190 Jump This is a Message jump mode that allows the user to jump to the next or previous message on the 8i chart the display will centre on the message in ques Aoin ADe Next tion Select Jump and
381. the toolbar buttons will change to Prev ious and Next Use these to jump to the previous or next message on the screen See Figure 6 3 on page 190 Exit to return to the Replay screen Messages List links to Replay Screen To locate the time of an occurrence on a chart you can select an item in any of the message lists and press the Jump button This will take you to the exact time of the occurrence on the replay screen If the message requested is older that the oldest chart time data available a message box will appear and jump you to the oldest chart time and date available 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 191 192 Hide Pens When in replay mode all pens are initially displayed to allow for better analysis Pens in re play can be quickly turned off leaving just the pens you want to analyse by pressing the dig ital panel for a pen the trace will be removed off the chart and the digital panel will go dark grey but still showing the pen name Press the digital panel of a removed pen to reinstate At least one pen must remain on the replay screen and any pens removed will be reinstated after exiting replay 3 00 Tem deg C ir OF 27 33 27 23 Pen 2 deg 27 540 27 538 Pen 3 w 1 2e 01 1 1e 01 Pen 4 w s be 01 5 6e 01 In the Replay screen the Pen 5 traces for pens 5 and 8 have Penge o been hidden to allow for 56 80 56 74 viewing Touch the DPM on Ponz sai the screen to toggle the pen i trace On and Off gt
382. tics gt Events Event screen Events Event 1 lt Event 1 gt C1 Scheduled 1m 00s next Wed Nov 15 2006 13 02 E1 Mark Chart td v P1 T P1 Y1 P1 U7 Event 2 lt Event 2 gt C1 Alarms Into Alarm 1 None E1 Screen Change Standard Screen 2 Event 3 lt Event 3 gt C1 Totalisers Start No valid causes E1 Mark Chart Screen change a This status screen displays all the currently enabled Events as they occur Each event displays the event number lt Event 1 gt followed by the event information C1 Cause 1 C2 Cause 2 C3 Cause 3 C4 Cause 4 E1 Effect 1 E2 Effect 2 E3 Effect 3 E4 Effect 4 If an Event has not been enabled no event will be listed in the status screen If part of an event is not enabled one will appear next to the incomplete cause or effect If a Cause is enabled but not an Effect or an Effect is enabled but not a Cause two will appear next to the incomplete part of the event When a scheduled event is displayed it will show the next time a scheduled cause is due 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 163 NOTICE Remember that Cause 1 2 3 OR Cause 4 will trigger Effect 1 2 3 AND Effect 4 Cause and Effect numbers are not linked eg Cause 1 and Effect 1 are not linked Comms Status Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnostics gt Comms e General See General Status on page 164 e Modbus See Modbus Status
383. tion Neg ative Range box appears instructing the user to apply the bottom range limit When this is done press the Calibrate button When the calibration is complete the icon changes to the User cal icon under the chan nel to show that the channel is using the user cal 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Calibration Input Ranges This table shows which input range is used for each input type Table 4 7 Calibration Input range table Input Type Input Range K Type TC 50mV R Type TC 25mV S Type TC 25mV B Type TC 10mV J Type TC 50mV T Type TC 25mV E Type TC 100mV N Type TC 50mV C W5 Type TC 50mV G W Type TC 50mV Chrome Copel 50mV L Type TC 50mV M Type TC 50mV P Platinel 100mV D Type TC 50mV PT100 RTD 100mV PT200 RTD 250mV PT500 RTD 500mV PT1000 RTD 1000mV Nickel 100 100mV Nickel 120 100mV Cu10 50mV Cu53 50mV 200 Ohms 50mV 500 Ohms 100mV 1000 Ohms 250mV 4000 Ohms 1000mV 0 20mA 250mV 4 20mA 250mV 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK CJC Calibration For Thermocouple Input calibration only There is a single CJC sensor for each Al card but the temperature across the connector will not be constant The CJC calibration allows the user to compensate for temperature gradi ent 4 licac Calibration ad Calibrate CJC AI Slot A 3 Input No Temp Value Cl Temp Temp ed A 8B 1 27 88 28 38 60 77 lt Slot A 1
384. tion toolbar The Dual button will change the icons on the replay tool bar to enable you to swap between cursors and or link them together 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Replay Toolbar The Replay toolbar will appear at the bottom of the screen e e Action See Action Toolbar on page 191 Rev This is used to scroll back through previous data Touch once to scroll back in incre ments or hold the Rev button down to continue backwards viewing of data Fwd This is to scroll forwards on the chart Touch once to scroll back in increments or hold the Rev button down to continue backwards viewing of data In Zoom In on the chart being displayed Place the chart cursor at the point you wish to zoom in to Zooming In will magnify the chart to show greater detail around the cursor posi tion Out Zoom Out on the chart being displayed Place the cursor at the point you wish to zoom out from Zooming Out will decrease the chart to show a larger time span around the cursor position Cursor Chart In Cursor mode the cursor bar can be moved along the chart showing the max min pen readings as they change and are displayed on the DPMs This can be done by touching the line cursor on the screen and dragging it to either side In Chart mode the chart can be moved along behind the cursor bar The DPMs will update reflecting the max and min readings at the position of the cursor bar This can be done by touching the chart on
385. tly active Serial No read only and cannot be edited e Credits read only and cannot be edited It displays the number of Credits available to activate additional firmware functionality 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 101 102 e Options Code The Options code is a unique coded number for this recorder that con tains information that enables certain functionality including the total credit value e Options This displays how many credits are currently in use Select this to produce a list of Firmware options available and their credit values Toggle each option On or Off to enable the feature within the recorder If there are not enough credits available More credits are available from your supplier For a complete lists of all the firmware options and their functionality see Table 7 1 Firmware Options on page 201 FW Upgrade Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Factory gt FW Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade button allows new versions of the recorder firmware to be loaded into the recorder via a USB key or a Compact Flash card The file type required to upgrade the Firmware has the file extension xsu Contact your supplier for more information Insert the Compact Flash or USB key with the latest revision of Firmware xsu file format and press the FW Upgrade button The recorder will scan and check the files on the external device with the current version running in the recorder Any later
386. to 180 days and no disable Expiry Warning Set how many days before the passwords expiry date that a warning notice will appear 1 to 20 days and 0 will disable no disable for ESS recorders When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Select the Back but ton to return to the previous menu Levels Main Menu gt Configure gt Passwords gt User Admin gt Levels The Level permissions are the 4 user levels that have been set up and named in the Policy menu eg Engineer Supervisor Technician and Operator Select each user level eg Engineer and setup the permission areas for that particular level of user Each Permission Area will give the user access to selected menus in the recorder The level permission has a set of default settings that are defined in Leve Permissions on page 173 Permission areas can be customised for each level if required see Users on page 129 Add User Main Menu gt Configure gt Passwords gt User Admin gt Add User The Administrator enters each new user name then selects the new user and assigns their Level of permission The Administrator can set up a new user but cannot assign a password A dummy password is set and the new user is prompted to change the password when they first Log on The same user name cannot be used User names must not contain numeric characters The Administrator can add more than one user at a time They will not be added until
387. to install This will be dependant on which version has been purchased Trend Viewer Trend Man ager or Trend Server Select to install Enter the code and organisation as supplied with each particular version of software The code can be found inside the CD case No code or organisation is required with Trend Viewer NB This is an alpha numeric code and must be entered exactly in upper case Codes from other software will not work each code is unique to the software supplied The Trend Analysis Software may find it necessary to automatically upgrade certain ap plications within your PC to complete installation The setup will require a re boot re start your computer to complete installation Upgrades There are three software packages available Trend Viewer Trend Analysis software and Trend Server If your software upgrade is for the same package the software will au tomatically over write the previous version Local database information will not be affected and all devices data and setups are retained Any other remote database servers will have to be added manually If you have purchased a different package to what is already installed the new software will detect this and only make available the same package To install a different package first un install the previous version There is no need to save databases or data these will not be lost when un installing the previous version Devices and data held on a local database are
388. trator scios einna A aa EEIN 169 POSSWOTG P O1CY vac tesa nena IAEE A E REET E E NIERE 171 User Interface requirement S ernenek mirisni rE EEEE EREE ARA 172 Audira snn na e E E 172 Level Permissions orenean e O E EER 173 Default PassWord ACCES Sei EEE E EEIE A NA 176 Section 6 Screen Configuration on cesccesenetenetcececaneretesniennesecccenetennnenececnnennnnns 187 Process Screen OV rvieW csccccsscccssscssscccesscesssecssscesescecsacecsceeeuseeseaeeceseesenseeseaeeesaes 187 Menu BAF 3 oa3 ce sx sticussdnssessestvivests A EE A ET 188 Sereen Men BOF oren n r NERA EEEE NA AR 189 RRODIGY eenaa a a E E E E RTA 190 CHAE Speeds oricisrin ioraa E EA E EE ROA A E EEA 195 ICTEEMACHVILY ieii a E N TONE AE R ORE E E A RTR 196 Section 7 Firmware Options ssssannnenunnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnna 201 Firmware Credit System cccsssssscsscssssscsscsessecessssnscsscsssenessessssnssessesssssorses 201 Firmware OPTIONS fcc essa arnet E E EA EEEE NO RER 202 iv 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Section 8 COMMUNICATION 2 20 ccecceeceeeccneceneceeccneseneceascneeeueceasecusenecnesensenes 205 Comms Configuration sccccccssssscsccsessecsscecssscessecscssessessssnsssessessssessessesssesere 205 Standard Communication Interfaces ccsscsssscssssssssssssscsccsssscsscscssscssessssses 205 PYOLOCOISS cevsseshvezes oui icasadl saa saesebaceasse ana Sota aes aaa Raa a 206 Hardware Installation snsecsisesasnoses
389. ts have green grab handles around the edge Pen and or channel information will appear for each object within the widget Each object in the widget can be assigned to the same or different Pen For example a DPM menu will display the pen currently being used and a set of channel information associated to the text digital and alarm marker objects within the DPM widget Select any of the objects in the channel menu to produce the setup screen Channel Mapping Setup screen In the Channel Mapping Setup screen select where the data is from e Data from Pen set what the object is going to be showing Current Value Minimum value Maximum value Average pen reading or Total pen reading Data from Alarm for Pen set the alarm number Data from Input Channel set the channel number and what the object is going to be showing Analogue Digital Hi Pulse or Low Pulse 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Select the pen number required On a widget you can select the Parent this will assign all the objects in the selected widget to the same pen Select objects individually on the screen to assign different pens to each object within the widget e Number of the Pen Alarm for Pen or Input Channel Showing is what is displayed on the screen The selections will change depending on what is selected in Data From e Showing For Pen Current Value Minimum Maximum Average or Total value Showing For Alarm for Pen List of available A
390. u Select the cross to ignore any changes and return to the Settings menu From the Settings menu select the Finish button to commit the changes or select the Back button to return to the previous menu Set Volume Set the volume here for the sound effects Use the slider to increase and decrease the vol ume Press the arrow button to the right of the slider to test the volume Update Sounds The user can pick from a list of 20 different sounds these can be configured to play a single time or repeat continuously To upgrade sounds the user must have a compatible sound file format of wav the wav file needs to be renamed to the internal format which is as follows S lt n gt lt name gt wav Where lt n gt is number 1 to 20 and lt name gt is a short name to describe the sound this file name will be shown in the pick lists Eg S1 Alert wav So a user could replace the default sound 1 which is S1 Two Tone Slow wav with S1 User Sound wav and this is what they will then see in their list To update the sounds a prompt will be displayed and the system will request the correctly named files be available on external media in the recorder once confirmed the system will scan the media for correctly named wav files and will replace the internal files with the new ones NB the wav files can be up to 100KB in size Prepare Sound Files The system will now update the sound files Please ensure files on the external media are
391. ues that cannot be changed by the user If the recorder is re calibrated to a User Cal the factory values can be restored at any time User Cal User calibration can be applied at any time To meet the accuracy values spec ified see Input Range Performance Accuracy Table on page 263 calibration source should be accurate to 0 01 full scale or better On initial power up the Factory Cal and the User Cal are the same 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK SIE 7 3 23 JAI Calibration Calibrate AI Slot A A ie Leo ete a Ma feiz Le lelelsisislelsts am Use Factory Settings 8 Use User Settings Recalibrate a err The Al Calibration menu displays a button for each Analogue Input card fitted Select the desired slot button and select the Range required to be calibrated from the drop down list eg 50V Each card has channels numbered 1 to 8 Underneath each channel is the type of cali bration Select the button below the corresponding channel number and select the type of cali bration from the list in this case Recalibrate The Recalibrate icon will appear under that channel Table 4 6 Analogue In Calibration Calibration Type Factory User Recalibrate Recalibrate All Factory All e The Calibration Positive Range box appears with instructions to connect the top limit of the input range Once this is done press the Calibrate button Next the Calibra
392. uld reduce the number by a factor of 1015 Time min Time min laaa 20 30 Figure 1 Figure 2 If it were possible to heat a sample from ambient to 121 11 C in 1 second hold it there for 15 minutes and then cool it back to ambient in 1 second the temperature time profile would look something like the trace in Figure 1 on page 297 and the Fog value would be 15 representing 15 minutes at 121 11 C In practice of course to reach this temperature the object would have to be subject to an initial heating period up to that temperature and later a cooling period back down again to ambient temperature more like the profile shown in Figure 2 on page 297 During all this heating up holding at temperature and subsequent cooling micro organisms are being killed at different rates and the Fg value is calculated by summing the effect at each tem perature provided it is over some defined starting temperature see below This calculation is performed by using the expression where T is the temperature in C and At is the time spent at that temperature The z factor that appears in this equation is the tem perature coefficient for the destruction of micro organisms and is the increase in tempera ture in C that produces a 10 fold increase in sterilisation rate This summation is only performed once the sample temperature has reached some speci fied starting temperature For example in Figure 2 on page 297 if this starting te
393. ully maintained Common Mode voltage is a voltage applied between the whole channel and earth not between pins on achannel 300V AC is permitted at Measurement Category CAT Il Overvoltage Category Il Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury NOTICE For 12 and 24 way connectors torque setting 0 4 Nm 3 5lbf in Do not over tighten Recommended wire size for termination connector is 22 12 AWG American Wire gauge equivalent to 22 14 SWG Standard Wire Gauge AWG metric 0 6426 2 052mm in diameter or SWG metric 0 71 2 03mm in diameter Analogue Input Channel Numbers Analogue Input cards are either 4 6 or 8 channels with a full length connector taking up 8 channels even if only 4 or 6 are operational Table 2 2 QX and SXAnalogue Input card Card Position Slot A Slot B Slot C Slot D Slot E Slot F Channel number 1to8 9 to 16 17 to 24 25 to 32 33 to 40 41 to 48 Table 2 3 QXe Analogue Input cards Card 3 CH 6 CH 9 CH 12 CH A 1 3 1 6 1 3 1 6 B 9 14 9 14 Analogue Input Connection Details Current Input For Current mA Input fit a 10 resistor across the and pins of the 12 way mating half analogue connector Figure 2 7 on page 19 shows a 1002 0 1 resistor fitted to chan nel 5 for a current mA input 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 17 18 Electrical Installation Thermocouples Ens
394. ulse frequency from the Pulse card n 1 to 48 25kHz max Pulse Inputs DIO Slots LPULn Get the Pulse frequency from the Digital Input card when in Pulse mode n 1 to 48 1kHz Max RT Compensation RTCOMPn Get RT Compensation value for channel n 1 to 48 Units mV RT Calibration RTCALn Get RT Calibration value for channel n 1 to 48 Units mA Totaliser Tn Get Totaliser value n 1 to 96 UC1 to UC16 UC1 User counters 1 to 16 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 273 274 Full Maths amp Script Processing Table 14 1 Maths Variable Table Maths Variables Syntax Description USB1 free storage space USB1FREE Returns the percentage of free storage space available on the USB storage key fitted initially front or rear USB2 free storage space USB1FREE Returns the percentage of free storage space available on the USB storage key fitted after the first USB has been fitted front or rear UV1 to UV32 UV1 This allows a system to be setup where val ues can be altered to effect calculations without having to change the configuration See Figure 22 1 Comms variables on page 304 Compact Flash is not available on the QXe Table 14 2 Maths Function Table Maths Functions Syntax Description Add Returns the result of the addition ACos acos x Returns the Arc COS of x ASin asin x Returns the Arc SIN of x ATan atan x Returns the Arc TAN of x
395. ure Units that the recorder is set to for temperature measurement Pen scale units may need to be changed accordingly See Pen Scale e Line Hz Toggle between 50Hz or 60Hz Mains power frequency Used to optimise analogue input filtering Note The default value is set based on the model number but can be changed here e Paper Size Switch between A4 or Letter 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK Batch Menu Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Batch Batch is a firmware option that can be activated from Credits on page 101 The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis Setting up a batch requires information to identify and control batches of data Batch data can also be paused for viewing and resumed A batch can be aborted at any time if so this will not register as a batch a batch is only complete when it has been stopped This Batch menu is the setup menu where you can configure all the Batch and Group prop erties before starting a batch Concurrent Batch Mode Batch mode has changed to allow concurrent batches where each batch is associated with a group so all pens within Group 1 will belong to the batch that is controlled by Group 1 Screens can now be set to display groups in this mode only messages associated with that group i e pens within that group or batch messages for that group will be shown on the chart Remember when you have set up your batch
396. ure polarity of thermocouple is correct Resistance Thermometers If using 2 wire R T the and terminals must be linked together See Figure 2 7 on page 19 Analogue Input Signal Wiring A CAUTION CONTROL UNIT DAMAGE Do not apply a hazardous live voltage between and pins within a channel eg 60V maximum on voltage ranges 5V maximum on millivolts ranges Do not apply a voltage above 1 2V to the pin Failure to comply with these instructions may result in product damage Figure 2 6 Analogue Input connector 514 5 6 7 8 9110 11 12 7 13 14 15116 17 18 19 20 21122 25 24 e o o o 7 o o o o y PH Ep o D o o o o o o HEHH A x H E x JE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 This Analogue Input card can be used as an option to add up to 6 more Analogue Input channels for the QXe recorder This will fit into Slot B and will display as channel numbers 9 to 14 The standard fit Analogue Input card is fitted in slot A with up to 6 channels channels numbers 1 to 6 To fit this option card into the QXe recorder you will require an expansion card to interface to the recorder See QXe Analogue Input Standard card on page 19 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Electrical Installation Figure 2 7 Input signal wiring Active Burnout Passive Burnout C Volts mV Thermocouples Thermocouples iil I amp t Xx f
397. ve This is a specified amount of time in seconds that the recorder clock must be within to ensure synchronisation with the network server Eg if set to 3600 the recorder time must be within 1 hour of the net work server to ensure time sync will take place Figure 4 7 Client Server network When using time synchronisation via SNTP always make sure that the recorders and the PC if any are configured to the same time zone See Localisation on page 106 Client Server Network Figure 4 7 on page 80 shows a Network Server at the top a recorder acting as both a server and a client in the middle and a string of client recorders at the bottom A recorder can be set up to be a server and a client Setting it as both means this recorder will synchro nise time with the network server But will also allow other recorders to time sync with it This saves many recorders trying to time sync with the network server When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK FTP File Transfer Protocol Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Comms gt Comms Services gt FTP This is a method of transferring data and setups to and from Trend Analysis software and the recorder e Enabled Tick to enable FTP transfer e Allow Upload Tick to allow FTP transfer from Trend Analysis software to the rec
398. ve burnout enabled input ok Degraded Thermocouple degraded difference measurement 10Q to 99Q increase Failing Thermocouple Failing difference measurement 10002 to 200Q2 increase Failing Thermocouple Failing absolute measurement over 230Q increase Almost Failed Thermocouple Almost Failed difference measurement over 200Q not failed Almost Failed Thermocouple Almost Failed absolute measurement 330Q2 to 2kQ Open Circuit Thermocouple Failed No data on passive channel Thermocouple Failed but no error on passive thermocouple channel Thermocouple Failed also failed status on passive channel Short Circuit Possible thermocouple wiring short circuit detected significant reduction in Q any increase is measured from the level when the recorder is first powered up Analogue Out Status Main Menu gt Status gt Diagnostics gt Hardware gt Analogue Out Not available for the QXe e Channel Displays the Slot position eg B E or F the Analogue Output number and the system channel position This will show a tick if this channel is enabled TX Pen Displays which pen is transmitting the signal e Range Displays the Output range set A tick here will indicate this is over range e Output Displays the current Analogue Output reading for this channel Go Back to return to the previous screen or select Print to print the screen Alarm Digital IO Status Main Menu gt Status gt
399. ver Add a Device oo Add a new Device eeeeeessesesiesesisesesiresrerereserreree Administration oo cececescescscescssesseceseseeeenes Client Connections Comms Server Overview Configure Database Logging Connect to a Database ow cece ccecceeceeceeeee Connect to a Database Server oeer 217 Data D ase ninaiona a aN Database Logging Delete a Database Delete a Device ou Diagnostics m Edit a Device ou Logging Configuration Network Settings Preferences Shutdown Status Screen Summary of Logging Changes Comms Server Database c Comms Server Overview vicecccccessvesvessssevesseevsee Comms Server Setup s Comms Server Status Screen Comms Overview Communications Connections Ethernet Connections o cccccccccccecessesseseeseeseeseeeees RS485 Connections sessesesseeresereeiersrereererererreree Compact Flash Format Concurrent Batch Mode General Batch Properties s es Group Batch sicssissisisislisassdisnsiaasssisiencsiies Configure Alarms sssrinin 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Configure Ment c dueancmanucdaekateniiue 47 Edit Layout LAY QUE aa a entddneinel stens 121 Eoad Layout hienona 125 Passwords ccccccccccesceseessessseeseees S Save Layout Setup Menu Counters Event Causes wi ccccccccccccccscsscsscsscsscssssscssesssssesseseess 88 Event Effects vssccessetscsceccencevecstssccss susesecteeseesstseigereeete 93 Counters
400. when the recorder is powered on and there are no open active alarms and the contacts open with an alarm active or when the power is removed See Failsafe Relay Positions on page 258 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 57 58 e Label Select and enter an identification label Up to 16 characters e Active Label Input and Output only This is the label that is shown when an alarm becomes active Select and enter a label Not available for Pulse Input Up to 12 char acters Inactive Label Input and Output only This is the label that is shown when an alarm becomes inactive Select and enter a label Not available for Pulse Input Up to 12 char acters e Reports To This will acknowledge the Alarm Digital IO to a selected destination Select User message to add the Digital IO occurrence to the messages list only Select Mark On Chart to display the occurrence on a chart and to the messages list When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Pulse Input Not available for the QXe recorder Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt Field IO gt Pulse Input Only available when a Pulse Input card is fitted as an option The Pulse Input card operates up to a frequency of 25kHz max See Pulse Input Channel Numbers on page 23 Input Low lt 1V High gt 4V to lt 50V DC or Volt free input Low s
401. will be a duplicate data entry of 2 minutes as the time will be synchronized to the nearest hour The data collected before synchronization will be preserved 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 97 98 General Menu Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General From this screen select the buttons required for General recorder configuration General os A 8 Identity Error Alert Factory Finish Identity Unique recorder information Name Description and ID See dentity on page 98 Error Alert Setup and customise the Alert box information See Error Alert on page 99 Factory This menu contains Credits for activating recorder options Firmware Upgrade Calibration Demo Traces Reset Setup and Localisation See Factory on page 101 Batch The Batch menu is for entering the Batch requirements for starting a new batch including using a Barcode reader Batch Menu on page 107 Printer The Printer menu allows configuration for setting up a printer See Printer Menu on page 110 Groups Groups of Pens can be specified and named with a Group name or number See Groups on page 1117 When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit Discard or Commit Later Select the Back button to return to the previous menu Identity Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit Setup gt General gt Ident Unique recorder information Name
402. works in the same way but at two different points on the signal input It is recommend ed that the two points should be more than 50 of the engineering units away from each other Low Eng and High Eng are the two points where the adjustment offset is made The user can enter their own adjustment points on the signal input and enter the Offset for both points Main Menu gt Configure gt Setup gt Edit gt Field IO gt Analog In gt Sensor Comp Figure 20 1 Dual Point Compensation Comp Type Dual Point Low Eng 0 0 Low offset 5 0 i High Eng 100 0 High offset 5 0 CE Compensation Type select from None Single Point or Dual Point compensation 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 299 300 10V 10V Single Point Sensor Compensation is used to offset the signal input by a user specified amount over the full range Sensor Compensation Low Eng only available when Dual point is selected Set the Low limit for the Engineer ing units Low Offset enter an offset value that is offset against the Low Eng value High Eng only available when Dual point is selected Set the High limit for the Engineer ing units High Offset enter an offset value that is offset against the High Eng value Figure App H 21 Sensor Compensation Solid line shows without compensation and dotted line shows with compensation J 10V 10V High Offset of 5 100 High Eng Low Off
403. y Only available when Restrict Range is active Select and enter the minimum limit for the totals to range to e Max Range Normal Totaliser only Only available when Restrict Range is active Select and enter the maximum limit for the totals to range from 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb08 UK 69 70 e Use Remainder Normal Totaliser only Only available when Restrict Range is active Toggles On and Off If the total exceeds the maximum range set the total will reset to the minimum range set When Use Remainder is active it will carry over any amount in excess of the maximum range set e Temp Input Units For Sterilisation select the temperature input units Start Temp For Sterilisation select the Start Temperature Ref Temp For Sterilisation select the Reference Temperature e Z Factor Temp For Sterilisation select the Z factor temperature e Include Cooling For Sterilisation Include Cooling if required e Completion Value For Sterilisation if cooling is not required enter a Completion Value The totaliser will stop at this value e Numb Format Displays the Notation of the number format Scientific or Normal e Notation Toggle between Scientific or Normal number format Auto Toggle Between Automatic number formatting and User Defined After Decimal Only available when User Defined is selected Select and enter the number of decimal places up to 15 decimal places When the setup is complete
404. y name can be renamed and a list of additional names can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup If Passwords are active on the recorder then the User ID page will be skipped for user entry and the name of the per son logged in through the password system will be automatically entered e Field 1 Props Defaults to Lot Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new batch The Lot number display name can be renamed and a list of additional names can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup The addi tion list names will not appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen unless you enable Show n List in the group properties menu See Group on page 109 e Field 2 Props Defaults to Description Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new batch The Description display name can be renamed and a list of addi tional names can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup The addition list names will not appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen unless you enable Show n List in the group properties menu See Group on page 109 e Field 3 Props Defaults to Comment Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new batch The Comment display name can be renamed and a list of addi tional names can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup The addition list names will not appea
405. yed data will display a gap in data until it is resumed ee Clear this will clear all the data being displayed Data will not be cleared if the chart has been stopped ee Prefill this will clear the chart and then fill it with the current reading Setup Window lis Events Counters Preset Markers General cnabled 4 WARNING 3 f Field 10 p Events are credit controlled Eventi Changes here may not be reflected on the recorder 7 ienn set ieaz W ea set Details of Effect 1 Enabled Iv Type Chart Control v Chart Action Recordin F g 6 Transfer Hardware Selection Type Reports 43 TV 25 33 GLO Iss 7 Feb 08 UK Communications Server Realtime Graphing To graph real time data on Trend Server press the Real time button located on the left hand side This will list all the recorders currently connected The recorder set up on Modbus will be in the list The recorder will be in the list under the name that you gave it when enter ing the device details Either click and drag the recorder name from the list to the graph area this will add all the recorders pens onto the graph or click on pens to list the pens available and drag the re quired ones onto the graph As soon as the pens are on the graph they should start to update in real time The graph will be split into two as below Figure 8 9 Realtime Graphing Default GRAPHOO3 xi Se TEER Default GRAPHOO3 qe zx

Paperless Recorders

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents